Sie sind auf Seite 1von 406

CommunicateIT NSD570 1KHW000890-EN

Edition April 2004

Teleprotection System

p
Operating Instructions
2002 ABB Switzerland Ltd
Baden

Released Editions Release Date


1st Edition 2002-12-20
2nd Edition 2003-01-31
3rd Edition 2003-09-01
4th Edition 2004-04-16

This Operating Instructions applies to the NSD570 Teleprotection System.

All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and registration
of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in particular
reproduction or making available to third parties, is prohibited.

This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the
reader find an error, she/he is requested to inform us at her/his earliest convenience.

The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a warranty
of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers in mind that
we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them abreast of advances in
technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies between a product and its
Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
1. Introduction

2. Safety instructions

3. System description

4. User interface program

5. Configuration and settings

6. Installation and wiring

7. Commissioning

8. Operation and maintenance

9. Troubleshooting

10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal

11. Appendices

12. Annex
NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

1. Introduction

1.1. Using these Operating Instructions .......................................... 1-3

1.2. Personnel qualifications ........................................................... 1-3


1.2.1. Operating personnel ................................................................ 1-3
1.2.2. Service personnel .................................................................... 1-4

1.3. Warranty restriction .................................................................. 1-4

Introduction April 2004 1-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

1. Introduction

The NSD570 teleprotection equipment is used for the dependable and


secure transmission of protection commands in electrical power
systems. In the event of a fault it makes a decisive contribution to
rapidly and selectively isolating the faulty part.
The NSD570 can be used for the transmission of blocking and tripping
signals via analog or digital communication links. Analog links include
pilot wires, speech channels of power line carrier equipment and voice
channels of analog or digital communication systems, whereas digital
channels include G.703 co-directional, RS-422/V.11 - RS-449/RS-530/
X.21 (56 kbps, 64 kbps), E1, T1 interfaces and optical fibers.
The conversion from an analog to a digital system is possible by
exchanging of only one module (the line interface of the NSD570).
The NSD570 comprises printed circuit boards with a height of three
standard units (3U) mounted in a 19" equipment rack. Two NSD570
devices with different line interfaces may be plugged in the rack. The
rack itself has a height of four standard units, providing a cable duct of
1U below the equipment at the rear side.

Fig. 1.1 Front view of NSD570

1-2 April 2004 Introduction


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

1.1. Using these Operating Instructions


These Operating Instructions are intended for maintenance and
operating personnel responsible for communication in the Electric
Utility. All safety rules in force in the users plant must be strictly
observed. Only properly trained personnel may work on the
equipment. The Operating Instructions contain all the information and
instructions needed during the life-cycle of the equipment, i.e.
shipping, storage, commissioning, maintenance, decommissioning and
disposal. Please refer to the respective Section for the particular topic
you are dealing with.
The operations in the life of the equipment, i.e. shipping, installation,
testing and commissioning are normally carried out by different people.
For this reason some of the safety instructions occur several times in
the various sections.
These Operating Instructions distinguish between two groups mainly
concerned with the equipment, service personnel and operating
personnel.
This manual applies to the NSD570 teleprotection system. Actual
hardware, firmware and software versions are to be found in the
document "Compatibility requirements" in the annex of the manual.

1.2. Personnel qualifications

1.2.1. Operating personnel

Operating personnel must:


have general knowledge of electronic and electrical systems
have had basic theoretical and practical training on teleprotection
equipment and its principles
be able to work with a PC/notebook, Windows operating systems
and web browsers in order to configure and program the
assemblies
be trained and familiar in handling potential sources of danger with
the corresponding caution
comprehend and heed warning signs and devices to avoid injury to
persons and damage to the plant
not carry out any of the changes or settings described in the
Sections:
Section 6 Installation and wiring
Section 7 Commissioning
Section 9 Troubleshooting
Section 10 Storage, decommissioning and disposal

Introduction April 2004 1-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

1.2.2. Service personnel

Service personnel must:


have read and understood the Operating Instructions before
commencing work on the NSD570
should attend a training course in the handling and operation of the
equipment
take the usual ESD precautions when working on the modules of
the NSD570 system
take all precautions and observe all warnings to avoid injury and
damage to the plant
ensure that in advance to any manipulation on the NSD570, the
equipment has to be set clear or standby and the signaling be
switched into a safe mode, to protect against unwanted tripping
signals.

1.3. Warranty restriction


The manufacturer disclaims any responsibility for hazards and material
damage, if the equipment is operated other than for its intended use as
described in these Operating Instructions or if the equipment is
serviced by non qualified personnel.

1-4 April 2004 Introduction


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

2. Safety Instructions

2.1. Presentation of safety information ........................................... 2-2

2.2. Basic principles........................................................................ 2-3

2.3. General instructions ................................................................. 2-3

2.4. Product-specific instructions .................................................... 2-4

Safety Instructions April 2004 2-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

2. Safety Instructions

2.1. Presentation of safety information


The NSD570 equipment itself is safe and without any risk. This is not
valid for its containment and the peripheral surrounding, like the high
voltage area and lines. Therefore only properly trained service
personnel may handle the equipment and make settings. Some other
work may be performed by operating personnel (see Section 1
Introduction).
In this manual the safety instructions are marked as follows:

Information or dos and donts to prevent serious


DANGER personal injury or extensive equipment damage.

Caution Specific information or dos and donts to prevent


minor damage and operating problems.

Note: Specific information with regard to the optimum use of


the appliance.

Safety signs marked on the equipment itself:

Hazardous voltage and hazardous energy level.


DANGER Beware of electric shock.

Caution Specific information to prevent minor damage and


operating problems.

Caution Specific information to prevent equipment damage


ESD by electrostatic discharge.

2-2 April 2004 Safety Instructions


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

2.2. Basic principles


The NSD570 is a state-of-the-art equipment that fulfils generally
recognized safety standards. Nevertheless, danger may exist if it is
used improperly.
Only use an NSD570 unit that is in perfect working order and observe
the Operating Instructions.

2.3. General instructions

Personnel qualification
An authorized and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out installing, programming,
commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting and
work of the equipment.

Instruction Manual
The Operating Instructions should be read and
DANGER clearly understood before working on the equipment.

Safety and monitoring facilities


Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates
DANGER must not be removed or by-passed.

Alteration
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
DANGER

Warning labels
Precautions and indications to hazardous voltages
DANGER and hazardous energy level must be strictly
observed.

Safety Instructions April 2004 2-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

2.4. Product-specific instructions

Technical specifications
The equipment must be operated within the
DANGER technical specifications. Failure to do so may result
in personal injuries or equipment damage.

Alteration
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
DANGER

Insertion and removal of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for


redundant power supply units - is permitted when
the equipment is powered on. Before plugging
modules in and out, the power supply of the
equipment has to be switched OFF.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,


ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Mechanical Installation
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip


DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

2-4 April 2004 Safety Instructions


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Shipping

Caution To avoid damage while being shipped, note the


instructions in Section 6 Installation and wiring in
the Operating Instructions.

Electrical Installation
This is a Class equipment specified in IEC 60950.
DANGER The equipment and the cabinet must be earthed.
The equipment must be supplied over circuit
breaker.

The circuit breaker for the power supply of the


DANGER equipment must be switched OFF.
The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the
cabinet must be switched OFF.

Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or


DANGER from the equipment.

The isolating terminals of the external cables must


DANGER be kept open during installation, maintenance and
before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

The Faston supply connectors at the rear of the rack


DANGER must be covered with an isolation sleeve.

The power supply is dangerous (hazardous voltage


DANGER and/or hazardous energy level).
Do not install the equipment with a live supply.

Caution When an analog NSD570 is connected to cables,


pilot wires or leased circuits, the equipment must
only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers
withstanding a 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms test voltage at
50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national
regulations or to electric utilities' practice.

Caution Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally


open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

Safety Instructions April 2004 2-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Fiber optic Installation

Caution Optical connectors


Clean all optical connectors by an approved method
before making any optical connection.
When making an optical connection, do not rotate
the optical connector unnecessarily.
When not connected, fit all optical plugs and
couplings with captive caps.

Caution Damage to optical fibers


When dressing fibers, take care not to exceed the
minimum bend radius (typically 35 mm) and do not
over tighten binders used for dressing as damage
may result.
When connecting other external cables and also the
rear cover, ensure that the optical fibers are not
bruised or crimped.

Back cover
Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER behind the back cover. Before removing the back
cover, the isolating terminals of the external cables
must be opened or the cables to the terminals must
be disconnected.

Working on the equipment


Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning.

Electrical strength test


Do not repeat any electrical strength tests. Improper
DANGER test methods can cause severe damage to the
equipment.
Electric strength and earth continuity tests have
been performed in the factory.

EMC

Caution This is a class A equipment specified in CISPR 22


(EN 55022). In a domestic environment, this
equipment may cause radio interference. In this
case, the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

2-6 April 2004 Safety Instructions


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Power supply for alarm

Caution The alarm power supply must be short current and


over current protected.

Common Interface G3LC


Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Relay Interface G3LR


Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

LAN Interface G3LL


The LAN Interface G3LL contains a lithium battery.
DANGER
Danger of explosion exists if the lithium battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
For replacing and inserting the battery always use a
potentially-free soldering iron.

Check the polarity before inserting the battery.

Caution For disposal of the lithium battery, the regional and


national regulations for electrical and electronic
waste have to be observed.

Laser / LED

Caution Class Laser/LED Product.


Laser / LED

Commissioning

Caution Do not close/establish the connections to the


protection devices until the NSD570 is properly
commissioned.

Safety Instructions April 2004 2-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Using HMI570

Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using


certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commis-
sioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote
test mode).
However, when a user is logged in with only "view
permission", it is not possible to disable the device.

Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation


the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of
the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes
the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked
for approx. 10 seconds.
During this time no commands can be transmitted.

2-8 April 2004 Safety Instructions


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

3. System Description

3.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 3-5


3.1.1. General NSD570 Features ...................................................... 3-6
3.1.2. Features of the NSD570 Analog .............................................. 3-8
3.1.3. Features of the NSD570 Digital ............................................... 3-8

3.2. Communication Channels........................................................ 3-9

3.3. System Architecture............................................................... 3-10


3.3.1. System Block Diagram........................................................... 3-10
3.3.2. Mechanical Design ................................................................ 3-11
3.3.3. External connections.............................................................. 3-12
3.3.4. Frontplate Signals and Controls............................................. 3-13
3.3.5. Service interface (COM 1) ..................................................... 3-13
3.3.6. Power supply G3LH ............................................................... 3-14
3.3.7. Examples of rack assemblies ................................................ 3-14

3.4. Modules descriptions ............................................................. 3-17


3.4.1. Common Interface G3LC ....................................................... 3-17
3.4.1.1. Block diagram G3LC.............................................................. 3-17
3.4.1.2. Short description G3LC.......................................................... 3-18
3.4.2. Analog Line Interface G3LA................................................... 3-19
3.4.2.1. Block diagram G3LA .............................................................. 3-19
3.4.2.2. Short Description G3LA ......................................................... 3-19
3.4.2.3. External Interfaces G3LA....................................................... 3-20
3.4.2.4. Processor Environment G3LA ............................................... 3-20
3.4.2.5. Transmitter G3LA .................................................................. 3-21
3.4.2.6. Receiver G3LA ...................................................................... 3-21
3.4.2.7. Boosting Output G3LA ........................................................... 3-22
3.4.3. Digital Line Interface G3LD.................................................... 3-22
3.4.3.1. Block diagram G3LD.............................................................. 3-22
3.4.3.2. Short Description G3LD ......................................................... 3-22
3.4.3.3. External Interfaces G3LD....................................................... 3-23
3.4.3.4. Processor Environment G3LD ............................................... 3-23
3.4.3.5. External Cable and Connector G3LD..................................... 3-24
3.4.3.6. E1/T1 Interface G1LE ............................................................ 3-24
3.4.3.7. Optical Interface G1LO .......................................................... 3-25
3.4.4. Relay Interface G3LR ............................................................ 3-26
3.4.4.1. Block diagram G3LR.............................................................. 3-26
3.4.4.2. Short Description G3LR ......................................................... 3-26
3.4.4.3. Inputs G3LR........................................................................... 3-27

System Description April 2004 3-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.4.4. Solid State Outputs G3LR...................................................... 3-27


3.4.4.5. Relay Contacts G3LR ............................................................ 3-28
3.4.4.6. Input Tripping Voltage G1LR ................................................. 3-28
3.4.4.7. External Cable and Connector G3LR..................................... 3-28
3.4.5. Display Panel G1LC............................................................... 3-29
3.4.5.1. Short Description G1LC ......................................................... 3-29
3.4.5.2. How to use the Display Panel G1LC...................................... 3-30
3.4.5.2.1. Display Panel activation and standby .................................... 3-30
3.4.5.2.2. Buttons on G1LC ................................................................... 3-30
3.4.5.2.3. Menu navigation hints ............................................................ 3-31
3.4.5.2.4. Reset ..................................................................................... 3-31
3.4.5.2.5. Display Panel settings............................................................ 3-31
3.4.5.3. Menu Structure Display Panel G1LC ..................................... 3-32
3.4.5.3.1. Top level menu ...................................................................... 3-32
3.4.5.3.2. Menu tree if connected to a local device................................ 3-32
3.4.5.3.3. Menu tree if connected to a remote device ............................ 3-34
3.4.5.4. Additional Features of Display Panel G1LC........................... 3-35
3.4.5.4.1. Requirements ........................................................................ 3-35
3.4.5.4.2. Display device communication baud rate............................... 3-35
3.4.5.4.3. Reset counters via display panel ........................................... 3-35
3.4.5.4.4. Disabling reset counters via display panel ............................. 3-35
3.4.5.4.5. Automatic display of Tx or Rx commands.............................. 3-36
3.4.6. LAN Interface G3LL ............................................................... 3-37
3.4.6.1. Short Description G3LL.......................................................... 3-37
3.4.6.2. Block diagram G3LL .............................................................. 3-38

3.5. Functional description ............................................................ 3-39


3.5.1. General Operating Principle................................................... 3-39
3.5.2. Signal processing .................................................................. 3-39
3.5.3. Analog Operating Principle .................................................... 3-40
3.5.3.1. Single-tone principle .............................................................. 3-40
3.5.3.2. Dual-tone principle ................................................................. 3-41
3.5.3.3. Programming of the analog system ....................................... 3-41
3.5.4. Analog Operating Modes ....................................................... 3-43
3.5.4.1. 1 single tone command A ...................................................... 3-43
3.5.4.2. 2 independent single tone commands A, B............................ 3-44
3.5.4.3. 2 independent dual tone commands A, B .............................. 3-44
3.5.4.4. 3 independent dual tone commands A, B, C.......................... 3-45
3.5.4.5. 4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D ..................... 3-46
3.5.5. Digital Operating Principle ..................................................... 3-48
3.5.5.1. Digital code structure ............................................................. 3-48
3.5.5.2. Digital frame structure............................................................ 3-48
3.5.5.3. Programming of the digital system......................................... 3-49
3.5.6. Digital Operating Modes ........................................................ 3-49
3.5.7. Common Functions................................................................ 3-50
3.5.7.1. Command Application............................................................ 3-50

3-2 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.5.7.2. Unblocking ............................................................................. 3-50


3.5.7.3. Tx Trip Duration Monitoring ................................................... 3-51
3.5.7.4. Tx input command delay........................................................ 3-51
3.5.7.5. Command Prolongation ......................................................... 3-52
3.5.7.6. Command Acknowledge ........................................................ 3-52
3.5.7.7. Rx Guard ............................................................................... 3-53
3.5.8. Functions of the analog system ............................................. 3-53
3.5.8.1. Transmit level setting / Transmit level monitoring .................. 3-53
3.5.8.2. Receive level setting / Receive level monitoring .................... 3-53
3.5.8.3. Boosting / Boost Output ......................................................... 3-54
3.5.8.4. Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) ................................... 3-54
3.5.9. Functions of the digital system............................................... 3-55
3.5.9.1. Bit error rate monitoring ......................................................... 3-55
3.5.9.2. Addressing............................................................................. 3-55
3.5.9.3. Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) ................................... 3-56
3.5.10. Event Recorder...................................................................... 3-57
3.5.10.1. General .................................................................................. 3-57
3.5.10.2. Command Events .................................................................. 3-57
3.5.10.3. Alarm Events ......................................................................... 3-58
3.5.10.4. Manipulation Events............................................................... 3-58
3.5.10.5. RTC Synchronization From an External Clock....................... 3-58
3.5.11. Counters ................................................................................ 3-59
3.5.12. Test facilities .......................................................................... 3-59
3.5.12.1. Testing during normal operation ............................................ 3-59
3.5.12.2. Cyclic Loop Test .................................................................... 3-60
3.5.12.3. Manual Loop Test .................................................................. 3-61
3.5.12.4. Local Test Mode .................................................................... 3-61
3.5.12.5. Remote Test Mode ................................................................ 3-62

3.6. NSD570 Applications ............................................................. 3-63


3.6.1. Permissive tripping schemes ................................................. 3-63
3.6.1.1. Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT) ............... 3-64
3.6.1.2. Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT) ................. 3-65
3.6.2. Blocking schemes .................................................................. 3-66
3.6.3. Unblocking ............................................................................. 3-68
3.6.4. Earth fault protection.............................................................. 3-70
3.6.5. Duplicated main protection .................................................... 3-71
3.6.6. Direct transfer tripping............................................................ 3-73
3.6.6.1. Line protection ....................................................................... 3-73
3.6.6.2. Re-closure lock out ................................................................ 3-74
3.6.6.3. Breaker back-up protection.................................................... 3-74
3.6.6.4. Shunt reactor protection......................................................... 3-75
3.6.6.5. Transformer protection........................................................... 3-76
3.6.6.6. Power system instability......................................................... 3-76
3.6.6.7. Generator shutdown and load shedding ................................ 3-77
3.6.6.8. Typical requirements in direct tripping applications ............... 3-78

System Description April 2004 3-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.6.7. Teed lines and tapped lines ................................................... 3-79


3.6.7.1. NSD570 Analog/Digital in normal T-operation..................... 3-81
3.6.7.2. NSD570 Analog/Digital in inverse T-operation .................... 3-82
3.6.7.3. Addressing of NSD570 Digital in T-operation ........................ 3-83
3.6.7.4. Tapped lines .......................................................................... 3-85
3.6.8. Phase-Segregated Command Transmission ......................... 3-86
3.6.8.1. Twin Line - Two Systems on Common Towers...................... 3-86
3.6.8.2. Long Single EHV Overhead Line ........................................... 3-87

3-4 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3. System Description

3.1. Introduction
The sizes, complexity and power ratings of high voltage networks
emphasize the need for highly reliable protection systems. Protection
is based on information derived from the power system at one or more
points, and fast selective protection applied to circuits with
geographically separated terminals, such as cables and overhead
lines, requires information interchange between these terminals.
NSD570 is a teleprotection equipment intended for use in protection
systems requiring a communication link. It is designed to convey
qualitative information, i.e. command signals generated by protective
devices in high-voltage electrical power systems. It is suitable for
analog voice-grade communication facilities, such as pilot wires and
speech channels of microwave radios or power line carrier links, and
for digital communication facilities, provided by digital multiplexers, and
for optical fiber.
Since any communication system is subject to interference and noise
of various forms, the performance of a teleprotection equipment is
commonly described in terms of security, dependability and
transmission time; further characteristics are the bandwidth of analog
equipment and the signaling rate of digital equipment. Interference and
noise on the communication link must neither simulate a command at
the receiving end when no command signal was transmitted (security),
nor impair the ability to convey commands correctly and promptly
(dependability).
Security, dependability, transmission time and bandwidth (or signaling
rate) are interrelated and interchangeable parameters. High security
and high dependability together with short transmission time and
narrow bandwidth are therefore conflicting requirements, but the
emphasis can always be placed on dependability or security or speed,
depending on the application. A blocking protection scheme, for
instance, needs a short transmission time and a high dependability,
while a permissive tripping scheme needs a short transmission time
with good security and a high dependability; direct transfer tripping
schemes, by contrast, require very high dependability and security,
achieved at the expense of a longer transmission time.
The above mentioned protection schemes are explained at the end of
this section (see Section 3.6 NSD570 Applications).

System Description April 2004 3-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.1.1. General NSD570 Features


Versatile application
Transmission of command signals in blocking, permissive and direct
transfer tripping schemes via pilot wires, speech channels of
microwave radio systems or PLC links, speech channels of digital
multiplexers, data channels conforming to ITU-T G.703 or to
TIA/EIA-422 / ITU-T V.11 recommendations, E1 or T1 circuits, or via
optical fibers.
NSD570 may also be used for the transmission of persistent tripping
signals in point-to-point or teed systems.
Compact and flexible design
Standard 19-inch rack for one or two NSD570 units; one unit for up to
4 independent protection commands via analog lines and up to 8
commands via digital lines; two independent units for duplicated
protection schemes.
Modular structure, few modules, low inventory
The equipment is split up into a signal processing module including an
analog or digital line interface and a relay interface which can transmit
and receive two commands. Additional commands can be conveyed
by simply inserting further relay interfaces (up to four per device).
The module rack consists of a common front plate, an interface with
shared functions (like alarm relays) and a supply backplane with
connectors for the electrically isolated power supply units.
Robust and reliable
All interfaces and the power supply are d.c. isolated from all other
circuits and from ground. Duplicated (redundant) power supply units
can be fitted.
Advanced technology, digital signal processing
High equipment availability and reliability due to carefully selected
components which have passed rigorous qualification tests.
Algorithms optimized for protection signal transmission ensure safe
and reliable operation even under extremely difficult conditions.
Browser-based Human-Machine Interface HMI570
The user communicates with the NSD570 via a PC connected to the
serial interface on the equipment front. A menu-guided HMI program,
installed on the PC, enables various operating modes to be configured
and detailed equipment settings and the operating or alarm status of
the local and remote unit to be viewed.
Remote access
An optional LAN interface is available for remote access to the
equipment via the Internet or a Corporate Network (Intranet). In a
substation, several NSD570 units can be inter-connected via a two

3-6 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

wire serial bus (RS-485 interface), and each NSD570 is then


accessible with a unique equipment address.
Embedded operation channel (EOC)
Allows remote NSD570 configuration and monitoring from one end.
In-operation testing
Automatic and manual testing routines enable the integrity of the
communication channel to be tested during normal operation. The
equipment availability is continuously monitored by self-testing
procedures.
Teed lines and tapped lines
Cost-saving schemes for protection of multi-ended circuits.
Redundant protection, 1 + 1 configuration
Two independent NSD570 units in a common rack, for improved
reliability in duplicated protection schemes. A mix of digital and analog
units in the same rack is possible.
Universal relay interface
The relay interfaces provide two opto-coupler inputs and two solid-
state outputs plus two heavy duty (electromechanical) relay outputs.
Each input and output is potential-free and isolated from ground and
all other circuits.
Commands can be individually mapped to any input/output.
Single-pole or double-pole tripping can be arranged, and command
outputs can be clamped to an off or on state during channel alarm
conditions.
Several additional functions like individual alarms can be mapped to
the remaining outputs.
Integrated event recorder and trip counters
More than 7000 command start/stop and alarm events can be
recorded and stored with time stamp in a non-volatile memory. The
event recorder can be synchronized to an external time signal (e.g.
GPS receiver) for accurate time stamping. The display of events is
possible in text view on the HMI570.
In addition to the event recorder, integrated trip counters for each
transmitted and received command facilitate investigations in case of
faults or abnormal conditions in the high voltage network.
Optional display panel
For monitoring the equipment status and alarms of the two devices in
a rack and of the devices in their remote stations (if the EOC is
enabled).

System Description April 2004 3-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.1.2. Features of the NSD570 Analog


Hardware
The NSD570 is arranged for use on audio-frequency communication
facilities when an analog line interface card is plugged.
Programmable bandwidth and centre frequencies
Tx and Rx bandwidth programmable from 120 Hz to 2800 Hz; center
frequencies programmable from 360 Hz to 3900 Hz in 60 Hz steps.
Programmable command configuration
Any command programmable for blocking, permissive tripping or direct
transfer tripping.
Up to 4 independent commands per unit
Suitable for protection of dual-circuit lines. Several NSD570 can be
operated in parallel on one AF channel in frequency-division multiplex
mode.
High speed
Short transmission times (as low as 4 ms transmitting one command,
or 6 ms transmitting two to four commands) meet demanding
transmission time requirements.
Level boosting
Command signals can be transmitted at a considerably higher power
level than the guard signal.

3.1.3. Features of the NSD570 Digital


Hardware
The NSD570 is arranged for use on digital communication facilities
when a digital line interface card is plugged.
Programmable signaling rate and data interfaces
Four signaling rates can be programmed via HMI570 (56 kbps,
64 kbps, 1.544 Mbps and 2.048 Mbps), depending on the data
interface in use.
Programmable command configuration
Any command programmable for blocking, permissive tripping or direct
transfer tripping.
Up to 8 independent commands per unit
One NSD570 can for example handle phase-segregated line
protection and breaker back-up protection of both systems of a dual
circuit line.
High speed
Transmission time < 4 ms, or < 6 ms at the highest security level.

3-8 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Addressable
Addresses assigned to the devices indicate for which station the guard
and command signals are intended; this prevents maloperations in
case of inadvertently transposed channels.

3.2. Communication Channels


g

al

op

an
an l

an al
l

op tal
a lo

a lo

di g
di al
ta
a lo

t ic

gi
tic

al
al

al
gi
gi

i
an

an

dig
an

o
t
o

og
ta
di

g
Protection Protection
commands commands

analog g
analo

3-Com.-Channels.vsd

Fig. 3.1 Communication channels

Analog channels with voice frequency bandwidth:


- pilot wires
- analog leased lines
- voice channels of analog or digital communication systems
- PLC links

Digital channels:
- serial data channels of digital multiplexers
- radio links and optical fiber systems
- leased digital telecommunication circuits

Optical channels:
- optical point-to-point connection
- optical connection to a digital multiplexer

System Description April 2004 3-9


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.3. System Architecture

3.3.1. System Block Diagram

OUTPUT
BOOST
Alarm 1

Alarm 2

(analog)

RELAY
INPUT
LINE
Laptop

Display Panel
G1LC Line Interface
Common
(analog, digital
Interface
or optical)
SYNC Relay Interface
GPS G3LA or G3LD G3LR
G3LC (or G3LD/G1LE or G3LD/G1LO) (or G3LR/G1LR)
Station
Supply
Bus Backplane
DC /
MAINS 1 Busplane (with Front Cover)
DC /
G1LB G1LA
MAINS 2
G3LH

G3LH
Power Supply 1

Power Supply 2

Line Interface
LAN Interface /
(analog, digital
Web Server
or optical)
Relay Interface
G3LA or G3LD G3LR
G3LL (or G3LD/G1LE or G3LD/G1LO) (or G3LR/G1LR)

G7BI
LAN

INPUT

OUTPUT
LINE

RELAY
BOOST
(analog)

3-System block diagram.vsd

Fig. 3.2 System block diagram

The Module Rack type G7BI consists of:


1 rack with cable tray
1 Bus Plane With Front Cover, type G1LA
1 Supply Backplane, type G1LB
1 Common Interface, type G3LC
1 Blanking Cover Plate

The analog NSD570 system consists of:


1 Module Rack, type G7BI
1 Analog Interface, type G3LA
1-4 Relay Interface(s), type G3LR

3-10 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The digital NSD570 system consists of:


1 Module Rack, type G7BI
1 Digital Interface, type G3LD
1-4 Relay Interface(s), type G3LR

Available options for both NSD570 systems are:


1 Display Panel per Module Rack G7BI, type G1LC
1 LAN Interface per Module Rack G7BI, type G3LL
1 piggyback per Relay Interface G3LR for tripping the two command
inputs by an internal d.c. voltage and an external dry contact only,
type G1LR

Options available for the digital NSD570 system are:


1 piggyback per Digital Interface G3LD with an E1/T1 Interface, type
G1LE
1 piggyback per Digital Interface G3LD with an Optical Interface, type
G1LO

3.3.2. Mechanical Design


Supply Backplane G1LB
G3LA, G3LD

G3LA, G3LD

G3LR, G3LL
Common Interface G3LC
Power Supply G3LH
Power Supply G3LH

G3LR

G3LR

G3LR

G3LR

G3LR

G3LR
G3LR
300 mm

Analog Interface G3LA


Digital Interface G3LD
Relay Interface G3LR
LAN Interface G3LL

Optional: Blanking Bus Plane with front cover G1LA


Display Panel Cover Plate
G1LC Top view
3-Rack Top View.vsd

Fig. 3.3 Mechanical design

System Description April 2004 3-11


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

The mechanical design of the NSD570 teleprotection system is as


follows:
- 19 inch rack, housing one or two NSD570 devices, 4 height units
(4U) including 1U for cable tray, blanking plate with labeling strip,
connectors, etc.
- one bus plane with front cover for one or two NSD570 in the same
rack
- 2 slots with 8 raster units (8R) for single or redundant power supply
- 1 slot with 6R for common interface
- 2 x 5 slots for line interface and relay interfaces (accessible from the
back side of the rack, after removing of the screening cover)
- optional display panel (instead of power supply front cover plate)
- optional LAN Interface instead of 4th Relay interface in the second
half of the module rack

3.3.3. External connections


All connections to the equipment, i.e. incoming and outgoing signals,
are made by plug-in connectors at the rear of the unit, which are either
Sub-D connectors, RJ45 connectors or spring-clamp terminal
connectors (2.5 mm2).
By using the optionally available connecting cables, the signals can
then be routed to isolating terminals (4 mm2), to Sub-D connectors in
the case of the data interfaces RS-449/RS-530/X.21 or to RJ45
connectors in case of the data interfaces G.703/E1/T1. The length of
the connecting cables is 2.5 meters (refer to Section 6 of this manual
for details).
The optical transmit and receive components are mounted on the
Optical Interface type G1LO. It is a piggyback module that can be
plugged on the Digital Interface type G3LD. The fiber optical
connectors used are E2000.

Caution When an analog NSD570 is connected to cables,


pilot wires or leased circuits, the equipment must
only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers
withstanding a 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms test voltage at
50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national
regulations or to electric utilities' practice.

3-12 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.3.4. Frontplate Signals and Controls

Fig. 3.4 Frontplate signals and controls

Status and alarm LEDs on the front panel:


- light up immediately when a condition is detected (Guard / Trip),
when an Input / Output / Relay is activated or after an alarm source
is detected (light up immediately, i.e. not only after the delay which
is configurable for the alarm outputs)
- One hardware status LED per line interface, relay interface and
LAN interface (green/red signals Ok/Fail)
- One status LED for each input/output and relay contact (dark/green)
- Two status LEDs for Guard and Trip reception (dark/green)
- Four alarm LEDs per system Transmit, Receive, Local, Remote
Alarm (dark/red)
- One hardware status LED per power supply module (green/red
signals Ok/Fail; "dark" indicates that no module is plugged)
- One status LED for the LAN interface; indicates when the ethernet
link has established (green/dark)

3.3.5. Service interface (COM 1)


A serial interface is provided on the frontplate for service and
diagnostic purposes and as a commissioning aid. By connecting a
PC/notebook to this interface, data on equipment settings, firmware in
use and operating parameters can be accessed without affecting the
normal operation of the NSD570.
It is also possible to configure the equipment and download new
firmware releases via the interface. For these actions the equipment
has to be taken out of service and re-commissioned afterwards.

System Description April 2004 3-13


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

A serial 1:1 cable (shielded) with 9 pin Sub-D connectors is necessary


for connecting the PC/notebook to the equipment. The cable must
have a female (to the PC) and a male (to the NSD570) Sub-D
connector.
Via the serial RS-232 interface a 57600 bps connection to both
NSD570 systems in the same module rack can be obtained. This high
transmission rate can only be achieved when the connecting cable is
not longer than 3 meter. If longer cables have to be used, the
transmission rate has to be reduced (refer to Section 4 of this manual).

3.3.6. Power supply G3LH


The rack can be equipped with one single power supply unit type
G3LH or may have a redundant supply with two units. The input
voltage range of the power supply unit covers all the standard battery
voltages between 48 VDC and 250 VDC and a mains supply of
115 VAC to 230 VAC. The power supply cable is connected to
FASTON terminals located on the side of the unit (refer to Section 6 of
this manual). The power supply modules are hot pluggable.

3.3.7. Examples of rack assemblies


Find below a few examples how a 19" rack NSD570 can be equipped.

Basic Equipment Analog:


Minimal rack assembly, comprising of one Module Rack type
G7BI, one Analog Interface type G3LA, one Relay Interface type
G3LR and a single Power Supply type G3LH;
capable of transmitting up to two commands.
G7BI
REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)

G3LR G3LA G3LC G3LH G1LB

PS2 PS1
POWER SUPPLY 1
POWER SUPPLY 2
X101

X100

X103
X102

X105 X104
PE PE

84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09 01

3-Rear View_Analog.vsd

Fig. 3.5 Basic equipment analog

3-14 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Basic Equipment Digital:


Minimal rack assembly, comprising of one Module Rack type
G7BI, one Digital Interface type G3LD, one Relay Interface type
G3LR and a single Power Supply type G3LH;
capable of transmitting up to two commands.
G7BI
REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)

G3LR G3LD G3LC G3LH G1LB

PS2 PS1

X101

POWER SUPPLY 2

POWER SUPPLY 1
X101

X103
X201

X102
X105 X104
PE PE

84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09 01

EQUIPMENT 2 EQUIPMENT 1
3-Rear View_Digital.vsd

Fig. 3.6 Basic equipment digital

Two independent NSD570 in the same rack:


Rack assembly for transmitting the maximum number of
commands with an analog system (4 commands) and a digital
system (8 commands) in the same module rack.
G7BI
REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)

G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LD G3LR G3LR G3LA G3LC G3LH G1LB

PS2 PS1
X101

POWER SUPPLY 2

POWER SUPPLY 1
X101

X101

X101

X101

X101

X101

X100

X103
X201

X102

X105 X104
PE PE

84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09 01

EQUIPMENT 2 EQUIPMENT 1
3-Rear View_Mixed.vsd

Fig. 3.7 Two independent NSD570 in the same rack

System Description April 2004 3-15


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Fully equipped rack with redundant power supply units:


Rack assembly, providing the maximum number of input (8) and
output (16) circuits per device in the module rack; redundant
power supply units.
G7BI
REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)

G1LR G1LR G1LR G1LR G1LE G1LR G1LR G1LR G1LR


G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LD G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LA G3LC G3LH G3LH G1LB

PS2 PS1

X101

POWER SUPPLY 2

POWER SUPPLY 1
X101

X101

X101

X101

X101

X101

X101

X101

X100

X103
X201

X102
X101 X105 X104
PE PE

84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09 01

EQUIPMENT 2 EQUIPMENT 1
3-Rear View_Fully.vsd

Fig. 3.8 Fully equipped rack with redundant power supply units

3-16 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.4. Modules descriptions

3.4.1. Common Interface G3LC

3.4.1.1. Block diagram G3LC

RX_DATA2
2-wire communication bus for G1LC LCD-Display
TX_DATA2 12 V X101

SUP1 12.3 V Supply 1 12 V +12 V


SUP2 12.3 V Supply 2
GND GND DC/DC
5 V Supply +5 V
max. 1 A

Check1 Supply supervision


& SUP_AL_1
Check2 plug In check SUP_AL_2
4
Supply1_LED
LED_0..3
ALARM1_LED
Supply2_LED
ALARM2_LED
RS-485 transceiver
RS-485
&
isolated supply

RS-232 COM1 RS-232 transceiver


RX_DATA1
& 2-wire communication bus
X901 TX_DATA2
isolated supply
SYS_AL_1
Relay 1, X102
SYS_AL_2
Relay 2, X102

extern 2
IRIG-B
IRIG-B

extern 2
GPS_SYNC
GPS_SYNC

TxD_RTB
RTB clock RxD_RTB
RTB & RTB
LOOP_DIS 8.192 MHz
frame sync
FS_RTB

3-Block-diagram-G3LC.vsd

Fig. 3.9 Block diagram G3LC

Signal description legend:


SUP1 (normal)
These signals are led through the PCI connector X100 to the Supply
Backplane G1LB, where the external connector terminals are located.
RS-232, X901 (bold)
These signals are led to other external interfaces, such as the RS-232
interface through X901 (COM 1), the connection to the Display Panel
G1LC through X101 and the additional alarm outputs through X102.
SYS_AL_1 (italic)
These signals are led to the backplane G1LA through the PCI
connector X900 and further on to the line interfaces G3LA/G3LD.

System Description April 2004 3-17


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.1.2. Short description G3LC


The Common Interface G3LC comprises all the circuitry that has to be
available to the entire system independently of the number of NSD570
that are equipped in the sub-rack. G3LC is an inherent part of the
combination of rack, busplane and supply backplane.
Both secondary voltage supplies (12.3 V) are taken from the
redundant power supply modules and de-coupled with serial diodes.
The secondary voltage supplies are separately monitored and their
working conditions are displayed with LEDs on the front as well as
signalized to the line interface.
The 12 V supply voltage is distributed to the busplane to supply other
modules (line interfaces, relay interfaces, etc.). On G3LC, it also
supplies the DC/DC converter generating 5 V that is led to the
busplane too. The auxiliary 5 V supply voltage serves the Common
Interface to supply some of its own circuitry and other 5 V circuits in
the system, e.g. the G.703 interface on the Digital Interface G3LD.
The bus clock and frame synchronization signals of the Real Time Bus
(RTB) are generated on G3LC and used by the DSP-Interface on the
Line Interfaces.
The Common Interface G3LC also contains the transceiver and the
isolated power supply of the RS-232 interface (COM 1) that can be
used to configure the NSD570.
The external connection to this serial communication port is available
at the Sub-D, 9 pin female connector X901 on the front panel.
The transceiver and the isolated power supply of the RS-485 station
bus are also located on G3LC. The station bus interconnects several
NSD570 racks in a substation. This allows to access several racks
over the COM 1 interface (or the LAN Interface G3LL) of one single
rack. Prerequisite for such operation is a different addressing of every
single NSD570 connected to the bus.
The external connection to the RS-485 bus is located on the Supply
Backplane G1LB at the rear side of the rack.
Each of the two possible NSD570 devices that can be fitted in one
rack has a system alarm. SYS_AL 1 is for the TPE 1 and SYS_AL 2 is
for the TPE 2. The Common Interface G3LC offers a heavy duty
relay with switchover contacts for each system alarm.
The external connector X102 to the alarm relays is located at the rear
side of the Common Interface.
The external connection of the synchronization inputs (GPS-
synchronization, IRIG-B) for the real time clock (located on the line

3-18 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

interfaces) are also located on Supply Backplane G1LB at the rear


side of the rack. These signals are led over the X100 PCI connector to
the Common Interface where opto-couplers provide electrical isolation.
At last, the Common Interface G3LC contains an internal socket X101
to connect the optional Display Panel G1LC to the equipment.
A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional
connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6
"Installation and Wiring".

3.4.2. Analog Line Interface G3LA

3.4.2.1. Block diagram G3LA


X100/5 Out
buffer
Boost 8
SDRAM
4W/2W

X100/6
Rx_Gain

32

X100/3
x1 u1

RTC Sync_Bus
Z

Rx-AF RB
50Hz / 60Hz Amplifier 4 kHz
limiter 8
RA

X100/4 Out LED's


Codec
Tx_Gain

buffer Local Alarm


24

Slot-Coding
X100/1 Digital signal Data bus HW Version G3LC
24
processor In
u1 x1

HW Version G1LA
Z

Tx-AF Output Amplifier Smoothing 32 buffer # of G3LH


TB
amplifier filter
TA Alarm on G3LH
X100/2 HW Version G3LA

Tx-Level
u1 x1
Buffer
8
+3.3 V DO
12 V 12 V DI
FS SPORT1 Reset
CLK
WD
3.3 V uC RS-232
SPORT0 Flag RS-485
Reset

+12 V
12 V 12 V
Supply 33 MHz
+12 V monitoring Serial-
Watchdog
-12 V FLASH
-12 V

Loop Test
Clk
RTB

3-Block-diagram-G3LA.vsd

Fig. 3.10 Block diagram G3LA

3.4.2.2. Short Description G3LA


The Analog Interface G3LA converts the incoming protection
commands of the Relay Interfaces G3LR into signals that are
transmitted over an analog communication line. Also, the commands
that are received by the analog line interface are passed onto the
appropriate relay interfaces. Communication between the G3LA and

System Description April 2004 3-19


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

the G3LR takes place over the Real Time Bus (RT-Bus) which is
located on the bus plane.
For signal transmission any transparent analog channel with 4 kHz
bandwidth, equipped with an appropriate standardized two-wire or
four-wire interface with 600 Ohm line impedance can be employed. It
is also possible to operate two NSD570s back-to-back via the Analog
Interfaces G3LA.

3.4.2.3. External Interfaces G3LA


The analog line interface includes an electrically isolated interface for
transmitting and receiving analog signals on a four-wire or a two-wire
connection. The bandwidth of the transmitted and received signal is
situated in the range of 300 Hz to 4 kHz. The line termination can be
configured to 600 Ohms or high impedance using jumpers.
Additionally, the analog line interface includes an electrically isolated
boosting output, which can be used for the boosting of the protection
signals in connection with a PLC equipment (e.g. ETL500). The
external signals are provided on the X100 connector (1 - 6; spring
clamp terminals). An external cable can be plugged to the X100
connector, making the signals available over disconnectable terminals.
A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional
connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6
"Installation and Wiring".

3.4.2.4. Processor Environment G3LA


The processor circuits described here are similar to the ones found on
the Digital Interface G3LD.
The circuits include a signal processor which carries out the necessary
signal generation and signal evaluation for all transmit and receive
functions. The signal processor can access an external 32 bit wide
memory that consists of two 4 Mbit SD-RAM chips.
A buffered Real Time Clock (RTC) provides the system timing. It is
also possible to synchronize the RTC with an external signal that
offers 1 second pulses. Or, alternately, the RTC can be synchronized
with an IRIG-B signal from a GPS receiver. This signal is provided to
the G3LA via the bus plane. The bus plane in turn receives the signal
from the Common Interface G3LC.
The micro-controller contains the interface to a PC/Notebook that has
the User Interface HMI570 installed. The micro-controller controls the
RS-232 interface, fetches the requested data from the DSP and
passes the data onto the HMI570. The micro-controller is also
responsible for the administration of the FLASH EEPROM memory,

3-20 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

which contains the configuration, the firmware and also the data from
the event recorder. Configuration and firmware updates can also be
downloaded from the PC to the FLASH EEPROM memory.
The G3LA comprises two watchdog facilities:
The first one is incorporated in the micro-controller. Should the micro-
controller seize up its arithmetic operations, a reboot is issued to the
micro-controller by its on-board watchdog. Then, a reset signal is
transmitted to the signal processor which consequently will also
restart.
The second external watchdog supervises the signal processor. The
watchdog recognizes when the signal processor ceases from
operating correctly and issues a reset to the micro controller. As
already described above, the micro-controller restarts and initiates a
restart of the signal processor.

3.4.2.5. Transmitter G3LA


In the transmission path there is a D/A converter followed by a
smoothing filter, a level adjuster, an output amplifier and a matching
transformer, which ensures the electrical isolation. The line termination
is set using the TA/TB jumper (TA: 600 Ohm, TB: high-impedance).
The transmitter level is configurable in the range from 24 dBm to
+11 dBm, where the highest level can only be reached by boosting
+9 dB. At the matching transformer, the transmitted signal is also
looped back to the DSP over a second A/D converter in the Codec
(Coder/Decoder). This allows the level monitoring of the transmitter.

Note: Level measurement is only accurate if the external


line impedance matches approx. 600 Ohm.

The transmit signal is available on the external connector X100 (1/2).

3.4.2.6. Receiver G3LA


In the receiver path a transformer that ensures the electrical isolation
of the signal is followed by a 50 Hz highpass filter, a level adjuster, an
anti-aliasing filter and an A/D converter with a resolution of 16 bit.
The receiver is dimensioned for a nominal range from 30 dBm to
+2 dBm. Additionally a dynamic range of 15 dB can be processed.
The line termination is set using the RA/RB jumper (RA: 600 Ohm, RB:
high-impedance).
The receiver signal has to be plugged to the external connector X100
(3/4).

System Description April 2004 3-21


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.2.7. Boosting Output G3LA


The Analog Interface G3LA features an additional electrically isolated
boosting output which may be used for example to signal a PLC
equipment that speech and superimposed data channels shall be
switched off, allowing the command signal being transmitted with
increased level. This boosting output is always activated when a
command is sent, i.e. the contact is closed. The boosting output is
designed for a maximal switching-power of 60 VDC at 50 mA (current
limited).
The boosting contact is available on the external connector X100 (5/6)
and is polarity independent.

3.4.3. Digital Line Interface G3LD

3.4.3.1. Block diagram G3LD


Connector to
piggy-back

SDRAM
DO
DI 32
FS
Signaling
from FPGA
CLK
In
buffer
5 24

Rx Data -
RTC Sync_Bus
Line interface
Codirectional

T+
T- 8
Signaling to
G.703
G.703

Rx Data + S+ FPGA Out


S- Out LED's
buffer buffer Local Alarm
5 24
Tx Data - GLOS 24

Tx Data + Slot-Coding
FPGA

Data bus HW Version G3LC


24
In HW Version G1LA
SD-A 32 buffer # of G3LH
SD
SD-B Alarm on G3LH
RD
RS-422 / V.11

RD-A HW Version G3LD


Line interface

RD-B ST
RS-422

TT-A RT Digital signal


TT-B
processor Buffer
TT
RT-A
8
RT-B DO
ST-A DI
FS SPORT1 Reset
ST-B CLK
SPORT0 WD
RS-232
uC
Flag RS-485
Reset

16.384 MHz 33 MHz


Serial-
Watchdog
FLASH

RTB
Loop Test

3-Block-diagram-G3LD.vsd

Fig. 3.11 Block diagram G3LD

3.4.3.2. Short Description G3LD


The Digital Interface G3LD converts the incoming protection
commands of the Relay Interfaces G3LR into digital data streams that

3-22 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

are transmitted over one of two on-board standard digital line


interfaces. Also, the commands that are received by the digital line
interface are passed on to the appropriate relay interfaces.
Communication between the G3LD and the G3LR takes place over the
Real Time Bus (RT-Bus) which is located on the bus plane.
For data transmission any transparent digital channel and an
appropriate standardized interface can be employed. It is also possible
to operate two NSD570s back-to-back via the Digital Interfaces G3LD.
The G3LD can be fitted with piggyback modules that provide the
following options:
E1/T1 Interface G1LE (refer to Section 3.4.3.6)
Optical Interface G1LO (refer to Section 3.4.3.7)

3.4.3.3. External Interfaces G3LD


The G3LD comprises two interfaces:
The TIA/EIA-422 / V.11 interface can be operated at 64 or 56 kbps.
It is equipped with a male Sub-D 25-pin connector. This connector
X101 is located at the rear of the G3LD and conforms to TIA/EIA-
530.
The G.703 codirectional interface with a data rate of 64 kbps. The
connector X201 that is located at the rear of the G3LD consists of
an 8-pin RJ45 receptacle.
Only one of the two interfaces can be used at a time.

3.4.3.4. Processor Environment G3LD


The processor circuits of the G3LD are similar to the ones on the
Analog Interface G3LA (Section 3.4.2.4)
The circuits include a signal processor which carries out the necessary
signal generation and signal evaluation for all transmit and receive
functions. The signal processor can access an external 32 bit wide
memory that consists of two 4 Mbit SD-RAM chips.
A buffered Real Time Clock (RTC) provides the system timing. It is
also possible to synchronize the RTC with an external signal that
offers 1 second pulses. Or, alternately, the RTC can be synchronized
with an IRIG-B signal from a GPS receiver. This signal is provided to
the G3LD via the bus plane. The bus plane in turn receives the signal
from the Common Interface G3LC.
The micro-controller contains the interface to a PC/Notebook that has
the User Interface HMI570 installed. The micro-controller controls the
RS-232 interface, fetches the requested data from the DSP and
passes the data onto the HMI570. The micro-controller is also

System Description April 2004 3-23


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

responsible for the administration of the FLASH EEPROM, which


contains the configuration, the firmware and also the data from the
event recorder. Configuration and firmware updates can also be
downloaded from the PC to the FLASH EEPROM.
The G3LD comprises two watchdog facilities:
The first one is incorporated in the micro-controller. Should the micro-
controller seize up its arithmetic operations, a reboot is issued to the
micro-controller by its on-board watchdog. Then, a reset signal is
transmitted to the signal processor which consequently will also
restart.
The second external watchdog supervises the signal processor. The
watchdog recognizes when the signal processor ceases from
operating correctly and issues a reset to the micro-controller. As
already described above, the micro-controller restarts and initiates a
restart of the signal processor.

3.4.3.5. External Cable and Connector G3LD


The RS-530 and G.703 signals can be accessed at the back of the
NSD570. In case these signals have to be connected at the back of a
cabinet, special cables can be supplied. The cables are equipped with
terminal blocks that can be mounted on DIN rails. The cable for the
RS-530 interface can be equipped with isolating terminals or
alternately with Sub-D connectors that comply with the standards X.21,
RS-449 or again with RS-530.
The connector block for the G.703 interface is equipped with insulation
displacement connectors that are terminated with a special punch-
down tool.
A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional
connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6
"Installation and Wiring".

3.4.3.6. E1/T1 Interface G1LE


The E1/T1 Interface G1LE is an optional sub-module (piggyback) that
can be plugged onto the G3LD. It provides an E1 or T1 interface,
depending on the configuration.
The E1/T1 interface permits the transmission via a digital PDH
interface of 2.048 Mbps (PCM30/31 for SDH access) or 1.544 Mbps
(PCM24 for SONET access). Framing, signaling and line coding can
be programmed according to the prevalent standards.
Of the 32/24 transmitted timeslots per frame (125 s), NSD570 data
are transmitted only in the first timeslot (TS1) after the frame
synchronization pulse. With E1, timeslot 0 (TS0) serves for frame

3-24 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

synchronization and signaling; with T1 this information is contained in


only one bit that precedes TS1. Additionally, 0xFF is transmitted on
TS3 to allow loss of signal detection when AMI line coding is used.
When the G1LE is plugged onto the main board, only one of the
available interfaces (RS-530, G.703, E1, T1) can be selected and
operated at the same time.
The E1/T1 interfaces can use the same external connecting cable as
the G.703 interface on the G3LD.

3.4.3.7. Optical Interface G1LO


The Optical Interface G1LO is an optional sub-module (piggyback) that
can be plugged onto the G3LD. It complements the interfaces that are
located on the main board with an optical 1310 nm or with an optical
850 nm interface, depending the module version.
The optical interface permits the transmission of protection signals via
fiber optical cables at a data rate of 2.048 Mbps. The G1LO can be
programmed to operate with a direct fiber connection and additionally
with FOX-6+, FOX-20 and the OTERM interface of the FOX515 with a
wavelength of 1310 nm. The 850 nm interface can be utilized with a
MUX that conforms to IEEE C37.94. The correct framing, signaling
and line coding is automatically set after choosing the interface type
out of the HMI570 pull down menu.
When the G1LO is plugged onto the main board, only one of the
available interfaces (RS-530, G.703, Optical Direct Fiber, Optical
FOX/OTERM, Optical IEEE C37.94) can be selected and operated at
the same time.
The optical interfaces are equipped with modern E2000 type
connectors that provide twin connections, one for the Tx and one for
the Rx fiber.
When multimode fibers at 850 nm are employed, distances of up to
3 km can be achieved. When the 1310 nm wavelength is used, 25 km
can be achieved with multimode fibers and 50 km with single mode
fibers. With this interface the NSD570 can be utilized in a point to point
application.

System Description April 2004 3-25


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.4. Relay Interface G3LR

3.4.4.1. Block diagram G3LR

12 V 3.3 V 1B

PROM 1C X101 / 2
12 V 1D Tx Input 1

1A
3.3 V 2.5 V
5V X101 / 1
Connector X100 to front plane bus

2B
2C X101 / 4
GND 2D Tx Input 2
3.3 V
2A
Supervision
X101 / 3

X101 / 6

Hardware release coding FPGA Rx Output 1

3 (Xilinx Spartan II) X101 / 5

Slot coding
X101 / 8
Rx Output 2
4

SPORT0 X101 / 7
12 V
4
Loop disable
X101 / 9
Relay 1

LED X101 / 11

12 V
8 X101 / 10

X101 / 12
Relay 2
X101 / 14

X101 / 13

3-Block-diagram-G3LR.vsd

Fig. 3.12 Block diagram G3LR

3.4.4.2. Short Description G3LR


The Relay Interface G3LR serves as the binary input/output logic
interface for the NSD570. It provides the link between the line interface
(G3LA or G3LD) and the external protection and logic circuits.
Communication with the line interface takes place through the serial
Real Time Bus (RT-Bus) on the busplane G1LA. The Relay Interface
G3LR comprises two inputs with opto-couplers, two solid-state outputs
and two relay outputs. Each one of these input and output circuits is
electrically isolated from each other as well as from the internal
circuitry and from ground. The command associations (inputs and
outputs) can be programmed by means of the Web-Browser based
user interface program (HMI570).
The G3LR is plugged into the G1LA busplane from the rear of the rack
G7BI assembly. At the front of the G3LR module, the internal signals
are connected to the busplane via a PCI connector. The external
signals are accessible by the customer via a Phoenix connector block
with spring-clamp terminals (see 3.4.4.7). A pre-terminated cable with
fixed length and terminal block with isolation knives is available as an
option with the G3LR module. The terminal block assembly can be
mounted on a DIN rail at the back or sides of the cabinet.
All LED indicators are mounted on the front panel and are driven by
the G3LR module via the PCI connector. Green LEDs are provided for
each input, output and relay contact (an OK/Fail LED will indicate

3-26 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Green for OK condition or Red for a Failed condition; alarms for


the various input/output circuits are signaled by the Red indication;
for details refer to Section 9 "Troubleshooting").
All input and output circuits are equipped with over-voltage and
reverse polarity protection.

3.4.4.3. Inputs G3LR


The G3LR has two isolated command input circuits.

The input circuits can be programmed by jumpers to one of three


voltage ranges for the nominal station battery voltage. Each
programming group covers the lower and upper nominal battery
voltage as follows:

24 VDC and 48 VDC


60 VDC and 110 VDC
125 VDC and 250 VDC

The switching threshold is approximately 60% of the lower voltage of


the programmed group.
Each input can be programmed freely to any one of the commands.
For example, Input 1 can be programmed to Command A and Input 2
to Command C.
The command signals are sent to the signal processor on the line
interface via the FPGA and the RT-Bus.
Mal-operations of the G3LR module (e.g. failure of an opto-coupler)
are recognized and will prevent the transmission of an unwanted
command. The G3LR signals its status with the dual color OK/Fail
LED (green = all hardware circuits okay / red = hardware alarm on the
module).
An optional piggyback module type G1LR "Input Tripping Voltage
NSD570" can be supplied. This auxiliary power supply provides
wetting voltage (internal 24 VDC). When the piggyback module is
installed, the command inputs can be keyed by a dry contact. A single
G1LR module is required for the two inputs of a G3LR module. Please
refer to Section 3.4.4.6.

3.4.4.4. Solid State Outputs G3LR


The G3LR has two isolated solid-state outputs.
The output command is received via the RT-Bus. This signal is
checked in the FPGA and when it is deemed valid, the semiconductor
in the output loop is switched on.

System Description April 2004 3-27


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

In order to protect the semiconductor output from excessive currents


(excessively low impedance burden or capacitive discharge from the
connecting cable), the output circuits are equipped with current limiting
and current shutdown electronics. The activation threshold is about
2.6 A. After the current limiting circuit has been in operation for more
than 5 ms, the output is blocked for approximately 1 s. Then, the
output is again turned on and the process is repeated until the fault
condition is cleared. When the current cut-off mechanism is triggered,
an alarm signal is generated.
Each output can freely be assigned to any one of the commands or
other functions (by means of the HMI570 User Interface Program). For
instance, it is possible to assign Output 1 to command A and Output 2
to Unblocking or Output 1 to Command B and Output 2 to a predefined
alarm.

3.4.4.5. Relay Contacts G3LR


In addition to the two solid-state outputs, the G3LR has two electro-
mechanical outputs.
The relays receive the switching signals from the RT-Bus. The NO
(normally open), NC (normally closed) and C (common) contacts are
wired to the external terminal blocks. The function of the relays can be
assigned by means of the HMI570 User Interface Program. For
instance, it is possible to assign Relay 1 to Command B and Relay 2 to
a predefined alarm.

3.4.4.6. Input Tripping Voltage G1LR


The Input Tripping Voltage G1LR is an optional sub-module
(piggyback) that can be plugged onto the G3LR. It generates 24 VDC,
automatically selects the lowest wetting voltage range and injects the
voltage to the required locations. This enables the keying of the
command inputs with an external dry contact but without the use of an
external voltage. With the G1LR, both inputs must be keyed with a
dedicated dry contact only. Any number of G3LR can be equipped with
the G1LR and the G3LR that arent equipped with the G1LR can be
operated with a contact and the station battery voltage as required by
the design of the control circuits.

3.4.4.7. External Cable and Connector G3LR


Each G3LR module is furnished with a 14-pin spring clamp terminal
block for external connections. The user can choose to either connect
directly to this terminals at the back of the rack or, alternatively, to
make connections elsewhere via the optional pre-terminated external
cable to isolating terminal blocks. The external cable for the G3LR

3-28 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

consist of a 14 pin knife-disconnect terminal block plus a ground


terminal, a 15 core cable with wires of 0.75 mm2 cross sectional area.
The Phoenix connectors fulfill the necessary requirements for high
voltages (air and creeping distances according to IEC 60950) that can
be applied to the terminals (250 VDC 20%).
The isolating terminals are required so that the user can disconnect
the NSD570 from the relays during maintenance work on the NSD570.
Transmitting of unwanted commands can therefore be prevented and
maintenance personnel can be protected from dangerous voltages
(with command voltages > 60 VDC). The terminals accept stranded
wires with a cross sectional area of up to 2.5 mm2 or solid wire with a
cross sectional area of up to of 4 mm2.
A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional
connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6
"Installation and Wiring".

3.4.5. Display Panel G1LC

3.4.5.1. Short Description G1LC


The optional display Panel G1LC provides various information such as
trip counter reading or alarm messages from the NSD570
Teleprotection Equipment - without having the need of a PC/notebook.
The Display Panel is assembled to the Module Rack G7BI, replacing
the blanking cover plate, which is mounted in front of the power supply
units. An enclosed ribbon cable connects the Display Panel G1LC to
the adjacent Common Interface G3LC, providing the 12 V supply
voltage and a 2-wire data link to the line interface of the NSD570
teleprotection devices equipped in the Module Rack.
The readout device is a dot matrix LCD display with two lines, 16
characters each, and a yellow/green background LED. The lightness
of the background LED, the contrast of the LCD and the standby time
of the display are adjustable.
Four buttons, which enable the menu-driven handling, are accessible
on the front of the Display Panel.

System Description April 2004 3-29


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.5.2. How to use the Display Panel G1LC


The following four buttons are used to navigate through the menu
structure of the Display Panel G1LC:

Up
Back Enter
Down

Fig. 3.13 Display Panel G1LC

3.4.5.2.1. Display Panel activation and standby


Press any button to activate the Display Panel. The background LED
of the LCD-module will light up (if not configured to OFF in the display
settings menu) and the top level menu SELECT DEVICE will appear.
If there is no activity on the Display Panel (no button pressed or no
ongoing task), it will be deactivated automatically after the preset
standby time has elapsed.

3.4.5.2.2. Buttons on G1LC


Use the Back button to leave a selected menu item and return to the
upper menu level, to leave a display settings menu without saving the
modifications, to interrupt an ongoing task or to select no from a
yes/no query.
Use the Enter button to select a menu item, to save modified display
settings, to execute a task or to select yes from a yes/no query.
Use the Up button to scroll through a menu level, to scroll through
listed information (e.g. trip counters, alarm messages) or to increase
the contrast and lighting settings of the LCD-module (in the
corresponding menu).
Use the Down button to scroll through a menu level, to scroll through
listed information or to decrease the contrast and lighting settings of
the LCD-module.

3-30 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.4.5.2.3. Menu navigation hints


A flashing b sign will appear to indicate that the Up or Down button
may be used to scroll in this menu level. Note that the flashing b sign
will only appear while scrolling up or down in the different menu levels,
it will not appear while scrolling through listed information (because all
16 characters are necessary for displaying the required data).
Some of the device information (like alarm messages or configuration
data) do exceed the available 16 characters of one display line. In this
case, the text is shifted left automatically. To speed up this procedure
press the Enter button and this will provide a word shift instead of
character shift. Additionally, a sign will appear to indicate that the
following words of the text can be obtained by continuing to press the
Enter button. The text will start over after it was completely displayed.
If no characters are visible at all or if the display is totally dark, the
contrast setting of the LCD-module may be incorrect. Pressing the
Back and the Enter button simultaneously as well as the Up or Down
button will allow to change the contrast setting directly (independent of
the actual menu level). Note that the Back button has to be released
first in order to store the new contrast setting.

3.4.5.2.4. Reset
A Display Panel reset will occur if the Back button is permanently
pressed for more than 6 seconds.

3.4.5.2.5. Display Panel settings


For the Display Panel itself, the following display settings may be
modified:
1. Increase/decrease the contrast setting of the LCD-module
(16 steps); default: 10
2. Increase/decrease the backlight setting of the LCD-Module
(4 steps and OFF); default: 3
3. Change the standby time of the Display Panel
(1 60 minutes); default: 10 minutes
If a display setting was accidentally modified, press the Back button to
restore the previous setting.
To save the modified display settings in a non-volatile memory, press
the Enter button after selecting the new value.

System Description April 2004 3-31


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.5.3. Menu Structure Display Panel G1LC

3.4.5.3.1. Top level menu

SELECT DEVICE Visible after pressing any button


| (Back, Enter, Up or Down)
|---TPE 1
| |---MAIN MENU
|
|---TPE 2
| |---MAIN MENU
|
|---TPE 1 Remote
| |---MAIN MENU
|
|---TPE 2 Remote
| |---MAIN MENU
|
|---Display
| |---CONTRAST
| |---Lighting
| |---Standby time
| |---FW/HW Version

3.4.5.3.2. Menu tree if connected to a local device

MAIN MENU
|
|---TRIP COUNTER
| |---CMD A TX/RX
| |---CMD B TX/RX
| |---CMD C TX/RX
| |---CMD D TX/RX
| |---CMD E TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD F TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD G TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD H TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---LOOP TX/RX
| |---UNBLOCKING
|
|---ALARMS Alarm messages according device state
|
|---STATUS
| |---INTERFACE TYPE
| |---LOOP TEST STATE
| |---LOOP TEST TIME
| |---RX LEVEL Analog Line Interface only
| |---TX LEVEL Analog Line Interface only
| |---SNR Analog Line Interface only
| |---BER 16 s AVERAGE Digital Line Interface only
| |---BER 262 min AVG. Digital Line Interface only
|
|---FIRMWARE
| |---DSP
| |---CONTROLLER
| |---CONFIGURATION
|
|---CONFIGURATION
| |---Device Info
| | |---LINE IF TYPE
| | |---LINE IF POSITION
| | |---SERIAL NUMBER
| | |---FW DOWNLOAD COUNTER
| | |---CONFIG DOWNLOAD COUNTER
| |

3-32 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

| |---HW Version
| | |---COMMON IF G3LC
| | |---LINE IF G3LA Analog Line Interface only
| | |---LINE IF G3LD Digital Line Interface only
| | |---PIGGYBACK @ G3LD Digital Line Interface only
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N34 If connected to TPE 1 the HW
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N40 Information of all 8 Relay
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N46 Interfaces are visible
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N52
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N64 If connected to TPE 2
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N70 If connected to TPE 2
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N76 If connected to TPE 2
| | |---REL. IF G3LR N84 If connected to TPE 2
| | |---BUSPLANE G1LA
| |
| |---Device ID
| | |---STATION NAME
| | |---HE NUMBER
| | |---DEVICE ADDRESS
| |
| |---Common Settings
| | |---DEVICE MODE
| | |---CMD OUT LNK FAIL
| | |---EOC
| | |---CYCL. LOOP TEST
| |
| |---Analog Settings Analog Line Interface only
| | |---LINE TYPE
| | |---RX BANDWIDTH
| | |---RX CENTER FREQ.
| | |---TX BANDWIDTH
| | |---TX CENTER FREQ.
| | |---OPERATING MODE
| | |---POWER BOOST
| | |---UNBL. THRESHOLD
| | |---TX LEVEL
| | |---RX LEVEL
| | |---TX ALARM THRES.
| | |---RX ALARM THRES.
| |
| |---Digital Settings Digital Line Interface only
| | |---INTERFACE TYPE
| | |---BER ALARM THRES.
| | |---ADDRESS CHECK
| | |---LOCAL ADDRESS
| | |---REMOTE ADDRESS
| | |---RS530 DATA RATE RS530 Interface Type only
| | |---RS530 RX CLOCK RS530 Interface Type only
| | |---RS530 TX CLOCK RS530 Interface Type only
| | |---RX CLOCK SYNC RS530 Interface Type only
| | |---TX CLOCK SYNC TT RS530 Interface Type only
| | |---TERMINAL TIMING RS530 Interface Type only
| | |---TX CLOCK SYNC G.703 64kbps codir. Interface Type
| | |---LONG HAUL E1 2048kbps, T1 1544kbps, Optical
| | | Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM
| | | Interface Type
| | |---RX BUFFER E1 2048kbps and T1 1544kbps Interface
| | | Type
| | |---TX BUFFER E1 2048kbps and T1 1544kbps Interface
| | | Type
| | |---E1 CODING E1 2048kbps Interface Type only
| | |---E1 FRAME FORMAT E1 2048kbps Interface Type only
| | |---T1 CODING T1 1544kbps Interface Type only
| | |---T1 FRAME FORMAT T1 1544kbps Interface Type only
| |
| |---Command Settings
| | |---COMMAND A
| | |---COMMAND B
| | |---COMMAND C
| | |---COMMAND D
| | |---COMMAND E Digital Line Interface only
| | |---COMMAND F Digital Line Interface only
| | |---COMMAND G Digital Line Interface only
| | |---COMMAND H Digital Line Interface only
| |

System Description April 2004 3-33


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

| |---Relay Interfaces If connected to TPE 2


| | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 1 (N34) TPE2 INTERFACE 1 (N64)
| | | |---INPUT 1 If Relay Interface 1 = 0n
| | | |---INPUT 2 If Relay Interface 1 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 1 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 1 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 1 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 1 = 0n
| | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 2 (N40) TPE2 INTERFACE 2 (N70)
| | | |---INPUT 1 If Relay Interface 2 = 0n
| | | |---INPUT 2 If Relay Interface 2 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 2 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 2 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 2 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 2 = 0n
| | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 3 (N46) TPE2 INTERFACE 3 (N76)
| | | |---INPUT 1 If Relay Interface 3 = 0n
| | | |---INPUT 2 If Relay Interface 3 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 3 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 3 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 3 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 3 = 0n
| | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 4 (N52) TPE2 INTERFACE 4 (N84)
| | | |---INPUT 1 If Relay Interface 4 = 0n
| | | |---INPUT 2 If Relay Interface 4 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 4 = 0n
| | | |---OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 4 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 1 If Relay Interface 4 = 0n
| | | |---RELAY OUTPUT 2 If Relay Interface 4 = 0n
|
|---MAINTENANCE
| |---Get Time & Date
| | |---TIME
| | |---DATE
| |---Reset TPE x x = 1 or 2
| |---RESET TPE x ? x = 1 or 2
|
|---DEVICE ADDRESS

3.4.5.3.3. Menu tree if connected to a remote device

MAIN MENU
|
|---TRIP COUNTER
| |---CMD A TX/RX
| |---CMD B TX/RX
| |---CMD C TX/RX
| |---CMD D TX/RX
| |---CMD E TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD F TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD G TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD H TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---LOOP TX/RX
| |---UNBLOCKING
|
|---ALARMS Alarm messages according device state
|
|---STATUS
| |---INTERFACE TYPE
| |---LOOP TEST STATE
| |---LOOP TEST TIME
| |---RX LEVEL Analog Line Interface only
| |---TX LEVEL Analog Line Interface only
| |---SNR Analog Line Interface only
| |---BER 16 s AVERAGE Digital Line Interface only
| |---BER 262 min AVG. Digital Line Interface only
|
|---FIRMWARE
| |---DSP
| |---CONTROLLER
| |---CONFIGURATION

3-34 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.4.5.4. Additional Features of Display Panel G1LC

3.4.5.4.1. Requirements
The additional features of the Display Panel G1LC are only available if
the micro controller firmware version of the line interfaces G3LA or
G3LD is greater or equal to Vers. 1.04 and if the firmware version of
the Display Panel G1LC is greater or equal to Vers. 1.01.
For details refer to the document "Compatibility requirements NSD570"
(1KHW000902-EN) in the annex of this Operating Instructions.

3.4.5.4.2. Display device communication baud rate


If the item Device Address in the main menu is selected, the
configured baud rate for the RS-232 communication of the connected
line interface is displayed as well.
This may be helpful for quickly finding out to what baud rate the
HMI570 must be configured.

3.4.5.4.3. Reset counters via display panel


If the conditions described in the Section 3.4.5.4.1 are met, it is
possible to reset the counters of the local line interfaces via the display
panel. The user can select clear all counters, clear command
counters, clear loop test counters or clear unblocking counter. The
event recorder of the line interface will consequentially record an event
Trip counter reset.
It is not possible to reset a single command counter only (e.g. Tx
Counter Command A) via the display panel.
Extended trip counter menu:
MAIN MENU
|
|---TRIP COUNTER
| |---CMD A TX/RX
| |---CMD B TX/RX
| |---CMD C TX/RX
| |---CMD D TX/RX
| |---CMD E TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD F TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD G TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---CMD H TX/RX Digital Line Interface only
| |---LOOP TX/RX
| |---UNBLOCKING
| |---CLEAR COUNTER?
| | |---CLEAR ALL CTR.
| | |---CLEAR CMD CTR.
| | |---CLEAR LOOP CTR.
| | |---CLEAR UNBL. CTR.

3.4.5.4.4. Disabling reset counters via display panel


If it shall not be allowed to reset the trip counters via the display panel,
this feature can be disabled, if required.

System Description April 2004 3-35


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Two PCB pads have to be interconnected by a solder bridge for that


purpose (see Fig. 3.14).

SY300

Reset of the trip


counters via the display
panel is enabled
(default)

SY300

Reset of the trip


counters via the display
panel is disabled

Fig. 3.14 Disabling reset counters

3.4.5.4.5. Automatic display of Tx or Rx commands


If a line interface G3LA or G3LD has sent or received a command, the
Display Panel G1LC will automatically switch on and display the
following messages (examples for commands on TPE 1):
TX COMMAND SENT!
ON TPE 1
RX CMD RECEIVED!
ON TPE 1
Usually, if there is no activity on the display panel (no button pressed
or no ongoing task), the display will be deactivated automatically after
the preset standby time has elapsed. In case of an automatically
displayed sent or received command, the display will not be
deactivated after the preset standby time the last command state will
be displayed until there is any manual activity.
In large substations this feature permits a quick indication of a
NSD570 link that has transferred protection commands.

3-36 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.4.6. LAN Interface G3LL

3.4.6.1. Short Description G3LL


The NSD570 LAN Interface (G3LL) is an Ethernet 10/100BaseT
interface. It can be used to connect one or more NSD570 systems to
TCP/IP-networks for configuration, monitoring and maintenance.
The user interface HMI570 LAN is embedded on the NSD570 LAN
Interface. This allows to use the HMI570 LAN from every computer
that is connected to the LAN/Intranet. There is no local installation of
an application necessary. A common web browser only (e.g. Internet
Explorer, Mozilla, Netscape) is needed on the PC/notebook for using
the HMI570 LAN on G3LL.

Substation A

NSD570 Rack

G3LA G3LA
1 .. 4 1 .. 4
or or
G3LR G3LR
G3LD G3LD

Station bus

NSD570 Rack
Ethernet
10/100BaseT
Internet /
Intranet
HMI570
G3LA G3LA LAN
1 .. 4 1 .. 3
or or
G3LR G3LR
G3LD G3LD LAN Interface
G3LL
Webbrowser

3-LANIFSubstation

Fig. 3.15 Connection to the NSD570 devices via G3LL

System Description April 2004 3-37


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.4.6.2. Block diagram G3LL

NSD570
Bus Plane
Ok/Fail LAN
Isolation
bus driver Link LAN

5V_L DC/DC 12V


PC/104
PC/104
External connections
at rear of equipment
5V_485 DC/DC 12V
RS485
LAN (RJ45)
10/100 BaseT
X201

COM1

HW_COMI

Stationbus (RS485) Isolation Switch Isolation


X500 RS485 driver Logic bus driver

3 BlockDiagramG3LL

Fig. 3.16 Block diagram G3LL

3-38 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.5. Functional description

3.5.1. General Operating Principle


In the guard state, i.e. when there is no command actuated at the
inputs, the NSD570 transmits a guard signal. The guard signal is
continuously processed by the receiver in the opposite station, which
gives alarm should the signal quality become inadequate.
In the command state, the NSD570 interrupts the guard signal to
transmit the command signal within the chosen communication
channel (analog, digital or optical).
If the continuous command supervision is enabled and the duration of
a command transmission exceeds a predefined value, an alarm will be
given at the transmit end and the guard is switched on again.
As soon as the receiver recognizes the missing guard signal and
simultaneously detects a valid command signal of adequate quality,
the command is relayed to the designated output.
Simultaneous reception or simultaneous loss of a command signal and
the guard signal leads to an alarm. In the latter case, the output(s)
programmed for unblocking function are activated.
An unblocking (deblocking) function is standard on all units, which
closes a contact for 200 ms (default setting; configurable) in the event
of loss of signal. Deblocking is sometimes used in the case of
permissive overreaching schemes.
All interfaces are potential free and DC isolated. A command is usually
transmitted by applying a DC voltage (contact + battery). At the
receiving end, each command may be mapped to a main (solid state)
and an auxiliary (relay) contact on the relay interfaces. Outputs may
also be used to signal various alarm sources or to acknowledge a Tx
or Rx command signal.

3.5.2. Signal processing


Signals are processed completely digitally by a signal-processor on
the line interface, i.e. signal generation at the transmitting end and
filtering and evaluation of the guard and tripping signals at the
receiving end.
The only A/D and D/A converters are at the AF inputs/outputs of the
Analog Interface G3LA.
The data interfaces on the Digital Interface G3LD convert the input
commands into a line signal conforming to the interface in use. The
digital techniques employed obviate any need for calibration.

System Description April 2004 3-39


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Digital processing eliminates calibrating, as well as the influences of


ageing and temperature fluctuations. Adaptive algorithms especially
developed for this type of teleprotection equipment adjust themselves
continuously to the prevailing channel conditions and achieve even
under worst-case conditions the high degree of security against loss of
genuine, respectively acceptance of false tripping commands, which is
essential for protection signals even if the communications channel is
disturbed.

3.5.3. Analog Operating Principle


The NSD570 Analog operates according to the frequency shift
principle.
Guard and command signals are transmitted within the selected
frequency band. The guard signal is always represented by a single
tone. Command signals can either be a single-tone or a dual-tone
signal, depending on the operating mode. Command signals can be
transmitted at a higher power than the guard signal (power boosting).
An NSD570 equipped for several commands transmits each signal or
signal combination with the same (full) power so that the maximum
possible signal-to-noise ratio is achieved at the receiver.
Alarm is given at the receiver if the signal-to-noise ratio is too low or if
the signal level is out of a pre-defined level range.
Up to eight pre-set frequencies corresponding to the various
commands or command combinations are provided in the chosen
frequency band.

3.5.3.1. Single-tone principle


A single tone command is represented by a single frequency for
obtaining the best practical signal-to-noise ratio and short command
transmission time. In the command state, with no power boosting
being programmed, a discrete frequency of the same amplitude as the
guard signal is transmitted.

Available
Bandwidth Frequency
Amplitude
Guard Signal

Trip Signal

Trip Test Group Frequency Time


signal signal signal 3-Analog-operating-principle.vsd

Fig. 3.17 Single-tone principle

3-40 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.5.3.2. Dual-tone principle


When dual tone command transmission is used, the tripping signal is
represented by two discrete frequencies to give added security against
speech and interference, e.g. an audio frequency generator. In the
command state two discrete frequencies (tones) are transmitted
simultaneously. With no power boosting being programmed, the
multiplex signal has the same amplitude (peak envelope power) as the
guard signal; but since each tone is transmitted at a 6 dB lower level,
the power level of the command signal is 3 dB lower than the power
level of the guard signal.

Available
Amplitude Bandwidth Frequency

Guard Signal

Trip Signal

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Frequency Time
3-Analog-operating-principle.vsd

Fig. 3.18 Dual-tone principle

3.5.3.3. Programming of the analog system


A special user interface program, the HMI570 is provided for setting
the unit, i.e. choice of channel frequency, bandwidth, commands and
their application (blocking, permissive or direct tripping), the alarm
threshold and the response of the unit in case of a link alarm.
Being able to program the unit eliminates tuned frequency dependent
components, which simplifies the stocking of spare parts and makes
the units more readily interchangeable.
The ability to program the unit enables the best use to be made of the
available bandwidth and the operation to be adapted to the different
requirements of the various protection schemes.
For example, the bandwidth can be set by means of the HMI570 in
accordance with the specified transmission time. NSD570s equipped
for one command only permit the fastest transmission time to be
obtained in the selected bandwidth. If more than one command is to
be transmitted in the same bandwidth, a slightly higher transmission
time has to be accepted.
The frequency band is used in the same way as for a narrow band
data channel with signaling speeds between 50 and 1200 Bd. The
channel center frequencies (center of the band) can be selected in
steps of 60 Hz.

System Description April 2004 3-41


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

The levels of security and dependability are given after the application
for the specific command is chosen.
The basic version of the NSD570 Analog is designed to transmit two
independent commands. By inserting an additional Relay Interface
G3LR, it can be expanded to handle up to four independent
commands. An NSD570 with two commands is ideal, for example, for
protecting a dual-circuit line.
The AF interfaces on the Analog Interface G3LA can be programmed
for a rated impedance of 600 Ohms or for high-impedance termination,
which enables units to be connected in parallel for frequency
multiplexed operation. The following diagram shows a few typical
examples of how channels can be allocated when using the analog
NSD570, where the numbers in the shaded boxes denote the
respective center frequencies:

1) SPEECH 2000 Hz 2760

1200

2) 960 1920 2880

960 960 960

3) 1500 3480

2400 960

0 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.4 3.96 kHz

3-Example_channel_allocation.vsd

Fig. 3.19 Channel allocation with analog NSD570

Example 1) shows a PLC application. An NSD570 channel 1200 Hz


wide with a center frequency of 2760 Hz is superimposed on a PLC
speech channel with a bandwidth limited to 2000 Hz.
Example 2) shows how three NSD570, each set to a bandwidth of
960 Hz, can be accommodated in one AF channel limited to 3400 Hz.
Example 3) shows two NSD570 in an AF speech channel if the whole
frequency range of 300 Hz put to 3960 Hz may be used. One NSD570
with a bandwidth of 2400 Hz ensures extremely short transmission
times, whereas the other with a bandwidth of 960 Hz, for example, can
be used for direct transfer tripping.

3-42 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

In all three cases, each of the NSD570, i.e. each of the frequency
bands shown, can handle one or up to four commands. Example 2
could therefore amount to a total of 12 independent commands.
The corresponding transmission times are found in the Technical Data
in the annex of this manual.

3.5.4. Analog Operating Modes


The NSD570 can be programmed for the following operating modes.

3.5.4.1. 1 single tone command A


Single tone test and guard signal
1 single tone command "A" (for blocking application only!)
Programmable for bandwidth:
120, 240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
Available
Amplitude Bandwidth

F1 F2 F3 Frequency

Fig. 3.20 1 single tone command A

Command assignment to frequencies:


Injected F1 F2 F3 Transmitted
Guard X Guard
A X A
Test X Test

Calculation of frequencies:

Bandwidth FShift Calculation


120 Hz 33.90 Hz Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency
240 Hz 65.57 Hz configured by HMI570
F1 = Fc FShift
360 Hz 95.24 Hz
F2 = Fc
480 Hz 125.00 Hz
F3 = Fc + FShift
960 Hz 235.29 Hz
1200 Hz 285.71 Hz
2400 Hz 500.00 Hz
2800 Hz 666.67 Hz

System Description April 2004 3-43


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.5.4.2. 2 independent single tone commands A, B


Single tone test and guard signal
2 independent single tone commands "A", "B"
Programmable for bandwidth:
240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
Available
Amplitude Bandwidth

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Frequency

Fig. 3.21 2 independent single tone commands A, B

Command assignment to frequencies:


Injected F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Transmitted
Guard X Guard
A X A
B X B
A&B X A&B
Test X Test

Calculation of frequencies:

Bandwidth FShift Calculation


120 Hz n.a. Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency
240 Hz 36.36 Hz configured by HMI570
F1 = Fc 2*FShift
360 Hz 52.63 Hz
F2 = Fc FShift
480 Hz 71.42 Hz
F3 = Fc
960 Hz 142.86 Hz
F4 = Fc + FShift
1200 Hz 181.82 Hz
F5 = Fc + 2*FShift
2400 Hz 285.71 Hz
2800 Hz 400.00 Hz

3.5.4.3. 2 independent dual tone commands A, B


Dual tone test, single tone guard signal
2 independent dual tone commands "A", "B"
Programmable for bandwidth:
240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz

3-44 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Available
Amplitude Bandwidth

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Frequency

Fig. 3.22 2 independent dual tone commands A, B

Command assignment to frequencies:


Injected F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Transmitted
Guard X Guard
A X X A
B X X B
A&B X X A&B
Test X X Test

Calculation of frequencies:

Bandwidth FShift Calculation


120 Hz n.a. Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency
240 Hz 31.25 Hz configured by HMI570
F1 = Fc 2*FShift
360 Hz 46.51 Hz
F2 = Fc FShift
480 Hz 62.50 Hz
F3 = Fc
960 Hz 111.11 Hz
F4 = Fc + FShift
1200 Hz 133.33 Hz
F5 = Fc + 2*FShift
2400 Hz 250.00 Hz
2800 Hz 285.71 Hz

3.5.4.4. 3 independent dual tone commands A, B, C


Dual tone test, single tone guard signal
3 independent dual tone commands "A", "B", "C"
Programmable for bandwidth:
360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz

Available
Amplitude Bandwidth

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Frequency

Fig. 3.23 3 independent dual tone commands A, B, C

System Description April 2004 3-45


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Command assignment to frequencies:


Injected F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Transm itted
Guard X G uard
A X X A
B X X B
C X X C
A&B X X A&B
B&C X X B&C
A&C X X A&C
A&B&C X X A&B&C
Test X X Test

Calculation of frequencies:

Bandwidth FShift
B B Calculation
120 Hz n.a. Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency
240 Hz n.a. configured by HMI570
F1 = Fc 2.5*FShift
360 Hz 44.44 Hz
B

F2 = Fc 1.5*FShift
480 Hz 58.82 Hz
B

F3 = Fc 0.5*FShift
960 Hz 105.26 Hz
B

F4 = Fc + 0.5*FShift
1200 Hz 125.00 Hz
B

F5 = Fc + 1.5*FShift
2400 Hz 250.00 Hz
B

F6 = Fc + 2.5*FShift
2800 Hz 285.71 Hz
B B

3.5.4.5. 4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D


Dual tone test, single tone guard signal
4 independent dual tone commands "A", "B", "C", "D"
Programmable for bandwidth:
480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz

Available
Amplitude Bandwidth

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Frequency

Fig. 3.24 4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D

3-46 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Command assignment to frequencies:


Injected F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Transmitted
Guard X Guard
A X X A
B X X B
C X X C
D X X D
A&B X X A&B
B&C X X B&C
C&D X X C&D
A&C X X A&C
B&D X X B&D
A&D X X A&D
A&B&C X X A&B&C
A&B&D X X A&B&D
A&C&D X X A&C&D
B&C&D X X B&C&D
A&B&C&D X X A&B&C&D
Test X X Test

Calculation of frequencies:

Bandwidth FShift
B B Calculation
120 Hz n.a. Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency
240 Hz n.a. configured by HMI570
F1 = Fc 3.5*FShift F5 = Fc + 0.5*FShift
360 Hz n.a.
B B B

F2 = Fc 2.5*FShift F6 = Fc + 1.5*FShift
480 Hz 42.55 Hz
B B B

F3 = Fc 1.5*FShift F7 = Fc + 2.5*FShift
960 Hz 83.33 Hz
B B B

F4 = Fc 0.5*FShift F8 = Fc + 3.5*FShift
1200 Hz 111.11 Hz
B B B

2400 Hz 222.22 Hz
2800 Hz 250.00 Hz

System Description April 2004 3-47


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.5.5. Digital Operating Principle


The NSD570 Digital uses a cyclic block code to transmit guard, test
and command messages in the digital communication channel.
During normal operation the NSD570 transmits a guard message. This
signal is generated by the digital signal processor (DSP) on the Digital
Interface G3LD and passed on to the configured data interface which
converts it to the corresponding line signal before sending it to the
multiplexer.
At the receiver, the line signal coming from the multiplexer is entered
via the data interface into the signal processor and is continuously
evaluated. Alarm is given should the bit error rate exceed a pre-set
level.
Upon being instructed to send one or more commands, the NSD570
interrupts the guard message and transmits the command message.
Command messages recognized by the receiver as being genuine
appear as command(s) at the appropriate output(s) after a code
evaluation time which is depending on the application setting of the
individual commands.

3.5.5.1. Digital code structure


The block code used for guard, test and command messages is
BCH (31,21,5) - the well-known and proven Bose-Chaudhuri-
Hocquenghem code. The hamming distance of the code is 5, i.e. at
least 5 bits are different between the individual guard/test/command
code words). 21 bits are utilized for guard, commands, test, EOC and
digital address (5 bit in each frame, 10 bit address combined after two
frames). The remaining 10 bits are used for detection and correction of
bit errors.

3.5.5.2. Digital frame structure


The 31 bits of the BCH (31,21,5) code are extended with 17
synchronization bits which leads to a frame length of 6 x 8 bit = 48 bit
in 64 kbps mode of the G.703 and RS-530 interface.
For the 56 kbps mode of the RS-530 interface the code is extended
with 18 synchronization bits which leads to a frame length of 7 x 7 bit =
49 bit.
At least 2 frames and up to 6 frames are evaluated. A dynamic
adaptive frame evaluation - depending on prevailing channel condition
- is implemented in the receiver of the digital NSD570.

3-48 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The following number of consecutive frames are evaluated for a


specific command (all of them having no bit errors or max. 1 bit error
respectively):
- blocking 2 or 3 frames
- permissive tripping 3 or 5 frames
- direct tripping 4 or 6 frames

3.5.5.3. Programming of the digital system


A special user interface program, the HMI570 is provided for setting
the unit, i.e. choice of the data interface in use, commands and their
application (blocking, permissive or direct tripping), the alarm threshold
and the response of the unit in case of a link alarm.
Being able to program the unit eliminates tuned frequency dependent
components, which simplifies the stocking of spare parts and makes
the units more readily interchangeable.
The ability to program the unit enables the best use to be made of the
existing data interface of the multiplexer and the operation to be
adapted to the different requirements of the various protection
schemes.
The levels of security and dependability are given after the application
for the specific command is chosen.
The basic version of the NSD570 Digital is designed to transmit two
commands. By inserting up to three additional Relay Interfaces G3LR,
it can be expanded to handle up to eight commands. An NSD570 with
six commands is ideal, for example, for phase segregated protection of
a dual-circuit line.

3.5.6. Digital Operating Modes


There are no special operating modes for the digital NSD570 as they
are known for the analog version - except for the fact that several
digital (and optical) standard interfaces are available and various bit
transfer rates are supported. The operating modes of the different
interfaces are described in Section 5.7 of this manual.

System Description April 2004 3-49


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.5.7. Common Functions

3.5.7.1. Command Application


Each command can be configured individually for transmitting
protection signals in blocking, permissive tripping or direct tripping
protection schemes.
Choosing the application of the command determines the individual
evaluation of the corresponding tripping signals regarding security and
dependability. The transmission time depends on the channel quality
(SNR/BER). The processing of the line signal is adaptive and therefore
always ensures the shortest possible transmission times for the
chosen application and the available channel quality.
The NSD570 Analog can transmit up to 4 commands (A - D), the
NSD570 Digital can transmit up to 8 commands (A - H) in any
combination.

3.5.7.2. Unblocking
An unblocking command used in directional comparison or in
permissive tripping schemes with overreaching first zone can be
allocated to one or more outputs on the Relay Interface G3LR. Note
that unblocking commands are not transmitted from the remote end,
but automatically produced by certain types of line faults (PLC
channels).
Should the communication channel be almost completely lost, i.e.
when the NSD570 is receiving neither guard nor tripping signals and
the unblocking threshold is exceeded, the unblocking contacts close
for a predefined time. After detection of the unblocking condition the
release of this pulse can be delayed (filtered) for a certain time whilst
the channel may recover.
The internal signal evaluation time to detect the unblocking condition is
typical less than the nominal command transmission time.
For the NSD570 Analog, further to the unblocking condition "no guard
and no trip signals being received", the total signal level in the chosen
bandwidth must be below a configurable threshold (compared to the
guard signal level) before an unblocking impulse is generated. The
unblocking threshold for the analog version can be configured in the
range of -20 -10 dB below the nominal guard signal level.
For the NSD570 Digital, further to the unblocking condition "no guard
and no trip signals being received", LOS (Loss Of Signal) or AIS
(Alarm Indication Signal) or invalid frames must be received before an
unblocking impulse is generated.

3-50 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The unblocking extra delay is configurable by means of the HMI570 in


the range of 0 ... 100 ms in steps of 1 ms.
The unblocking pulse duration is configurable by means of the HMI570
in the range of 50 500 ms in steps of 1 ms.

3.5.7.3. Tx Trip Duration Monitoring


For each command a Tx trip duration monitoring can be programmed
to OFF or ON, i.e. the transmission of persistent commands can be
disabled.
The duration of each single command injected at the relay interface
(G3LR) inputs is individually monitored if the Tx trip duration alarm is
enabled for this command.
Alarm is given and if no persistent command is injected
simultaneously - the guard signal is transmitted instead of the tripping
signal should the command duration exceed the predefined value.
Also the boost criterion of the NSD570 analog is set inactive before the
guard signal is transmitted again.
The maximum Tx Trip Duration can be configured in the range of 1
15 seconds in steps of 1 sec by means of the HMI570.

3.5.7.4. Tx input command delay


Warning:
If an input command delay is configured, it has a direct influence on
the transmission time of the equipment. It is delayed correspondingly
and thus means an artificial deterioration of the equipment
performance regarding command transfer delay. Normally the receiver
at the remote station decides whether it was a genuine command of
adequate length or only a transient spark on a command input.
Therefore the command inputs are not delayed by default. If there is a
request for some special applications (e.g. direct tripping when using
digital communication systems) a pick up time for the command
inputs can be configured. A command is transmitted only after the
corresponding command input was activated for the preset delay time.
The command sending duration is then prolonged by the same time.
The preset input command delay can be configured for each command
separately.
The Tx input command delay is configurable by means of the HMI570
and can be set in the range of 0 10 ms in steps of 1 ms.

System Description April 2004 3-51


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.5.7.5. Command Prolongation


A command prolongation ensures a steady output command even in
the event of discontinuations of the signal being received.
The NSD570 receiver compensates the time needed for evaluating the
tripping signals, i.e. the command duration at the output has almost
the same pulse width as the transmitted command at the remote
station (if no prolongation time is configured).

Tac
Local: Prolongation
G3LR Input

Remote:
G3LR Output
3-Command-prolongation.vsd

Fig. 3.25 Command Prolongation Time

A command prolongation can be programmed for each command


separately.
The Rx command prolongation is configurable in the range of
0 3000 ms in steps of 1 ms by means of the HMI570.
Default settings of the prolongation for the command application are:
Blocking 0 ms
Permissive Tripping 10 ms
Direct Tripping 100 ms

3.5.7.6. Command Acknowledge


A Tx command acknowledge is programmable for each command.
The Tx command injected is then looped back from the line interface
(G3LA or G3LD) to one of the various outputs on the relay interface
type G3LR to acknowledge that the corresponding command was
sent. This is, however, no confirmation that the command has been
received by the opposite station.
A "Tx command summary acknowledge" can be signaled on one of the
outputs of the relay interfaces for acknowledging when any command
has been sent.
A "Rx command summary acknowledge" can be signaled on one of
the outputs of the relay interfaces for acknowledging when any
command is received.

3-52 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

A "Tx or RX command summary acknowledge" can be signaled on


one of the outputs of the relay interfaces for acknowledging when any
command has been sent or received.
The operating time of the acknowledge outputs is as long as the
commands are sent or received, i.e. the Tx input command delay and
the Rx command prolongation are also considered.

3.5.7.7. Rx Guard
The state of the NSD570 guard receiver can be signaled by the line
interface to one of the various outputs on the relay interface type
G3LR. Reception of the NSD570 guard with adequate signal quality
means that the corresponding solid-state output is closed or the coil of
the selected relay contact is energized.
The configured output reflects the guard receiver state without any
additional pick-up or hold delays.

3.5.8. Functions of the analog system

3.5.8.1. Transmit level setting / Transmit level monitoring


The transmit (Tx) signal level can be set in the wide range of -24 dBm
to +2 dBm in steps of 1 dBm by means of the HMI570. This setting is
valid for the single tone guard signal. Including power boosting (refer
to Section 3.5.8.3) the maximum output level for a single tone
command signal is therefore +11 dBm and +8 dBm (RMS) for a dual
tone command signal.
The transmit (Tx) alarm threshold can be configured from -10 dB to
-3 dB in steps of 1 dB by means of the HMI570. From this follows that
the Tx level must drop off from nominal by the configured value before
alarm is given.

3.5.8.2. Receive level setting / Receive level monitoring


The receive (Rx) signal level can be set in the wide range of -30 dBm
to +2 dBm in steps of 1 dBm by means of the HMI570. This setting is
valid for the single tone guard signal. Including power boosting the
maximum input level for a single tone command signal is therefore
+11 dBm and +8 dBm (RMS) for a dual tone command signal.
Since the dynamic range of the receiver is 15 dB from nominal, the
overall input level range is in fact from -45 dBm to +17 dBm!
The receive (Rx) alarm threshold can be configured for a lower / upper
limit from 3 dB to 12 dB in steps of 1 dB by means of the HMI570.
This means that the Rx level must drop off or rise from nominal by the
configured value before alarm is given.

System Description April 2004 3-53


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.5.8.3. Boosting / Boost Output


In the case of NSD570 Analog, the tripping signal can be boosted and
be transmitted at a higher power in relation to the guard signal. The
ratio between the boosted tripping signal and the guard signal is
referred to as boost ratio and is expressed in dB.
The power boosting is selectable via HMI570 in the range of 0 to 9 dB
and in steps of 1 dB.
When transmitting a test signal, the boost signal will not be set active
and the test signal will not be boosted.
As long as any command is transmitted, the boost output on the
Analog Interface G3LA is operated (refer to Section 3.4.2.7).

3.5.8.4. Embedded Operation Channel (EOC)


By means of the EOC the configuration and monitoring of the remote
equipment in a link is possible from the local terminal.
The EOC needs no additional bandwidth, as it is operated in the guard
channel and therefore switched off during command transmission.

Note: The EOC of the NSD570 Analog is not available


during continuous command transmission!
The EOC is shortly interrupted by the manual or cyclic
loop test!

There is a limited functionality of the EOC when the equipment is in


T-operation mode (refer to Section 3.6.7.1 and 3.6.7.2; i.e. only end-to-
end operation for configurations with T-offs).
All HMI570 functions are supported also for the remote equipment,
connected via the EOC, except for the following features:
activating the local and remote test mode in the remote station
switch back to previous configuration
change the micro-controllers UART baud rate
In principle also the "Firmware download" via the EOC is working, but
due to the low transmission rate it would take a couple of hours to
download a new version via the EOC. It is therefore strongly
recommended to switch off the cyclic loop test during a firmware
download via EOC!

3-54 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The following transmission rates will arise:


channel bandwidth 120 / 240 / 360 Hz 20 bps
channel bandwidth 480 1 / 960 Hz 50 bps
channel bandwidth 1200 / 2400 / 2800 Hz 100 bps
On the other hand the immunity of the EOC against interference and
noise is very high. It operates down to a SNR of 6 dB.

Note: The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level
measurement displayed by the HMI570 do only have
an adequate accuracy if the EOC is switched off!

3.5.9. Functions of the digital system

3.5.9.1. Bit error rate monitoring


The BER is determined in 16 seconds (short term average) and in 262
minutes (long term average). The actual values can be seen by
uploading the status of NSD570 Digital by means of the HMI570.
If the bit error rate (BER) reaches a pre-defined threshold, alarm is
given and dependent actions are taken (e.g. the command outputs will
go to the quiescent state if configured).

3.5.9.2. Addressing
Provision is made by means of HMI570 for individually addressing
NSD570 teleprotection devices. The data transmitted from station A
can only generate a tripping command in station B, if station B's
address is contained in the incoming signal. The address and the local
alarm signals are transmitted to the remote station where they are
continuously evaluated. This coded information is contained in both
trip and guard messages. The time taken to recognize an address lies
within the time taken to detect a tripping message. This can prevent
false tripping, if for example channels of the data circuit-terminating
equipment are switched during the transmission of a continuous
command and the command signal is relayed to another station.
The command outputs are switched to their programmed alarm states
should a wrong address be detected (after the configured link alarm
pick-up time; refer to Section 5.5.1 of this manual). This can also occur
should addresses be corrupted by bit errors. The following

1 In 480 Hz channel bandwidth and with operating mode 4 independent


dual tone commands A, B, C, D -> 20 bps only.
All other modes -> 50 bps.

System Description April 2004 3-55


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

programming is therefore recommended for the alarm states of the


command outputs:
- in applications with continuous commands, the outputs should be
programmed to retain the states they had prior to the alarm to avoid
unwanted interruptions of commands.
- for short time tripping commands, the outputs should be
programmed to adopt their quiescent states.
The equipment ignores any incoming signal (Guard / Trip) if an
address error is detected. The LEDs on the frontplate indicate the
corresponding state (alarm LEDs Receive/Local light up). The event
recorder and the internal trip counters can only record a command
during address error, if the programming of the command output states
for the event of an alarm permits the command to be transferred to the
relay interfaces. In any case an address error alarm is added to the
event recorder list.
The usable range of the digital address is from 0 1023 (not to be
mixed up with the device address needed to connect the device by
means of the HMI570!).
The addressing facility is configurable via HMI570 to be switched ON
or OFF.

3.5.9.3. Embedded Operation Channel (EOC)


By means of the EOC the configuration and monitoring of the remote
equipment in a link is possible from the local terminal.
The EOC needs no additional bandwidth, as it is operated within the
used data stream. Since there are specific bits reserved for the EOC in
the digital frame structure, it is not switched off during command
transmission.

Note: The EOC of the NSD570 Digital is available during


continuous command transmission!

There is a limited functionality of the EOC when the equipment is in


T-operation mode (refer to Section 3.6.7.1 and 3.6.7.2; i.e. only end-to-
end operation for configurations with T-off).
All HMI functions are supported also for the remote equipment,
connected via the EOC, except the following features:
activating the local and remote test mode in the remote station
switch back to previous configuration
change the micro-controllers UART baud rate

3-56 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Also the "Firmware download" via the EOC is working, due to the
relatively high transmission rate it would take approx. one hour to
download a new version via the EOC.
The following transmission rate will arise:
channel data rate 56 kbps 1000 bps
channel data rate 64 kbps 1333 bps

On the other hand the immunity of the EOC against bit errors is not too
high. It operates up to a BER of 1E-05 without increased response
time for HMI requests.

3.5.10. Event Recorder

3.5.10.1. General
The event recorder registers special events of the NSD570 system,
provides them with an accurate time stamp and stores the information
sequentially into a non-volatile memory. The resolution of the events
which can be discriminated between is 1 ms.
There are three different types of NSD570 events: the command
events, the alarm events and the manipulation events.
The maximum number of events that can be stored is 7500. If more
than 7500 events occur, the eldest events are deleted and the newest
events are preserved.
The timing information for the event recorder is provided by the real
time clock (RTC) on the line interfaces type G3LA and G3LD. The date
and time is set via the User Interface HMI570 (refer to Section 4).
If the accuracy of the RTC is not sufficient, an external clock can be
used (see Section 3.5.10.5).
The events are displayed by means of the HMI570 in a text based
view.
Refer to Section 4 of this manual for instructions to upload, view and
save events.

3.5.10.2. Command Events


The event recorder acquires the timing information of all commands
which are sent and received via the inputs and outputs of the relay
interfaces type G3LR.

System Description April 2004 3-57


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

The following events are recorded as NSD570 command events:


Start time and end time of all commands sent excluding Tx input
command delay (i.e. the command was injected earlier at the input
by the amount of the configured delay)
Start time and end time of all commands received including
command prolongation (i.e. the command was longer released to
the output by the amount of the configured prolongation)
Start and end time of an unblocking pulse

3.5.10.3. Alarm Events


The event recorder acquires the alarms as they appear on the system,
i.e. pick up and hold times of the alarm relays are not included.
The following events are recorded as alarm events:
Start time and end time of all NSD570 low level alarms (refer to
Section 9 of this manual for details).

3.5.10.4. Manipulation Events


The following events are recorded as manipulation events:
Time when a loop test was sent
Time when a loop test was reflected
Time when a loop test failed
Time when a manual loop test was initiated (by means of the loop
test button on the front panel)
Time when the configuration was downloaded
Time when switched back to the previous configuration
Time when a firmware version was downloaded
Time when a new date and time was set
Time when the equipment started up
Time when a command counter was set to zero
Time when the event recorder was erased
Time when a manual reset was conducted

3.5.10.5. RTC Synchronization From an External Clock


An external clock source can be supplied to increase the accuracy of
the NSD570 system time. The clock signal has to be provided in the
IRIG-B format at TTL compliant level and it has to be connected to
the supply backplane type G1LB (refer to Section 6 of this Manual).

3-58 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The IRIG-B format only informs about the time and the number of days
having passed in the current year but not about the number of the
year. So the date and time has to be set once manually in the NSD570
to supply the system with information about the current year. See
Section 4 for the procedure about how to set the date and time.
Alternatively the RTC can be synchronized using an external sync
pulse only (every second).

3.5.11. Counters
All transmitted and received NSD570 commands, all transmitted and
received loop tests and the number of unblocking pulses are counted
individually by separate counters. The counters will overflow after >216
= 65536 events. They are stored in non-volatile memory.
Each single counter can be selectively set to zero or all counters at
once by means of the HMI570.
Refer to Section 4 for instructions to upload and reset command, loop
test and unblocking counters.
Two specific counters can be viewed after uploading the status from
an NSD570 device (link Device Information in the Edit
Configuration menu of the HMI570):
Firmware Download Counter
Configuration Download Counter
These counters cannot be set to zero.

3.5.12. Test facilities

3.5.12.1. Testing during normal operation


An automatic loop testing routine cyclically checks the teleprotection
link. The test signal, which is transmitted in the same way as a
genuine command signal (except for boosting in case of the NSD570
Analog version), is recognized by the receiver and "reflected" back to
the transmit station. The test routine is terminated, provided that the
test signal arrives back at the transmitter within a certain time,
otherwise it is repeated and the NSD570 gives alarm should it fail
repeatedly.
The loop test can also be initiated manually at any of the stations by
pressing a button on the frontpanel of the equipment or via the
HMI570. The result of the test is indicated by the LEDs on the
frontplate.

System Description April 2004 3-59


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

There are also internal test routines that continuously monitor the
availability of the NSD570.
The testing facilities impair in no way the ability of the equipment to
respond to a protection command, i.e. a genuine tripping command is
always given priority over all tests.
An NSD570 unit can also interrogate the status of the remote unit and
give alarm if necessary. Information regarding the nature of the
problem is contained in the signal received (via EOC).
A serial interface is provided on the front of the unit for service and
diagnostic purposes. With the aid of a PC/notebook and the HMI570
the following is available: details of equipment settings, firmware
release, operating parameters and alarm signals generated by the
local and remote units.

3.5.12.2. Cyclic Loop Test


A cyclic loop test sequentially checks the integrity of the teleprotection
link. The test signal simulates the transmission of a genuine tripping
signal and is recognized as such at the receiving end, from where it is
echoed back to the transmitter. The test is deemed successfully,
providing the transmitter receives the echo. If it does not, the test is
repeated and alarm is given should the results of three subsequent
trials be negative.
The loop test signal of the analog NSD570 is transmitted without
boosting, i.e. with the nominal command tone level.
The first cyclic loop test is sent 10 minutes after power-on the
equipment.
If the cyclic loop test is not turned off by the HMI570, a test signal with
its own test frequency or test code is transmitted to the remote station
and reflected back once every 1/3/6/12/24 hours, depending on the
programming (default setting: 6 hour interval).
The test signal is processed in the same way as a normal tripping
signal (interruption of the guard signal and transmission of a test
frequency or test message for 3 x T0 (T0 = nominal transmission time;
refer to Section 5.9.2.1); the reception of the reflected signal must take
place between 1.5 x T0 and 6 x T0 after sending it), which ensures
that all the functions required for transmitting a tripping signal are fully
tested.
If an automatically initiated test is not received correctly it is being
repeated at intervals of about 5 minutes until either the remote station
answers or a continuous alarm is given after the third attempt.

3-60 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The testing facilities impair in no way the ability of the equipment to


respond to a protection command, i.e. a genuine tripping command is
always given priority over all tests.
The loop test signal is always transmitted and evaluated in the same
way as the command configured for the highest security requirements.

Note: The NSD570 Analog loop test is performed at the


nominal command signal level and is not boosted.
The loop test is thus performed under more exacting
conditions than those of boosted transfer tripping
signals.

3.5.12.3. Manual Loop Test


The loop test can also be initiated manually from any station via the
HMI570 or via the button on the local front panel. The result of the test
can be viewed in the HMI570 window. The actual measured
transmission time (Tac) is displayed (half the value of both directions
there and back, a delay of 1 ms is added for one input and one output
circuit of a relay interface type G3LR (which can not be included in this
test).

Note: The measured actual transmission time by means of


the loop test does not include a configured input pick-
up delay for the commands.
The loop test signal is always transmitted and evaluated in the same
way as the command configured for the highest security requirements.
If the reflection of a manually transmitted test signal is not received
correctly, this is displayed in the loop test window.
A manually initiated loop test is transmitted in the same way as the
cyclic loop test.

3.5.12.4. Local Test Mode


The NSD570 can be set via HMI570 to a local test mode for checking
the relay interfaces, e.g. for measuring the command prolongation.
In this operating mode, which is indicated by a flashing "Ok / Fail" LED
and via the HMI570 by the alarm message "LOCAL TEST MODE
ACTIVE", the command input signal is looped via the line interface
back to the corresponding command output of the local relay interface
type G3LR.

Note: The trip counters will count the local commands as


well.

System Description April 2004 3-61


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

During the test mode the guard signal is continuously transmitted to


the opposite station.

Caution Genuine commands cannot be transmitted between


the stations when the equipment is in the local test
mode.

3.5.12.5. Remote Test Mode


The NSD570 can be set via HMI570 to a remote operating mode for
checking the transmission channel, e.g. transmission time
measurements without external looping of the commands in the
remote station.
Before starting the test, the local system must be isolated from the
protection circuits. The remote system's command outputs are
blocked; all commands are sent back as long as they are received.
In this operating mode, which is indicated by a flashing "Ok / Fail" LED
in the remote station and via the HMI570 by the alarm message
"REMOTE TEST MODE ACTIVE" (the local station indicates a
"Remote Alarm"), the command input signal is looped via the remote
line interface back to the corresponding command output of the local
relay interface type G3LR.

Note: The local and remote trip counters will count the
sent/received commands as well.

Caution Genuine commands cannot be transmitted between


the stations when the equipment is in the remote
test mode.

Caution The remote test mode must only be used for


commissioning point-to-point teleprotection links (not
applicable for T-operation; i.e. the two NSD570 links
in a T-off arrangement have to be commissioned by
means of the remote test mode as normal link first).

3-62 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6. NSD570 Applications


Power system faults taking place at specific points in the power
system are isolated by operation of the associated protection and
circuit-breakers. About 85 percent of all faults at the higher voltage
levels occur on overhead lines and are single phase to earth faults of a
temporary nature, e.g. caused by lightning. Provided that fast fault
clearance is achieved, they do not spread to other conductors and
usually do not result in permanent damage; the fault path is rapidly de-
ionized after isolation and the circuit can then be successfully re-
closed.
Faults due to deterioration of solid or liquid or gas insulation are
generally permanent and, because of the energy containment, there is
a risk of explosion and fire; reclosure is usually not possible, and there
is again a requirement for fast fault clearance.
Fast selective protection applied to cables and overhead lines requires
communication between the circuit ends. The NSD570 teleprotection
equipment is suitable for transmission of permissive tripping, direct
tripping and blocking commands via analog (audio-frequency) and
digital and fiber optical links; it is designed for duplex communication,
and some typical applications are described below.

3.6.1. Permissive tripping schemes


Permissive transfer tripping is used typically for the protection of
transmission lines. The transfer-tripping link between the protection
equipment at the ends of the line ensures that all faults can be cleared
in the time of the first zone along 100 % of the line.
In a permissive scheme, the transfer tripping signal from the NSD570
is connected in series with a local criterion (protection starting,
directional decision or phase selection) and tripping can only take
place at the receiving end, if a transfer tripping signal is being received
and the local protection relay detects a fault in the direction of the
protected line.
The reception of a spurious tripping signal caused by interference on
the communications channel cannot therefore give rise on its own to
unwanted tripping, but it may cause unwanted tripping under external
fault conditions when the protection is active and the fault is within the
reach of its starting elements (permissive underreaching) or within the
reach of the distance relay (permissive overreaching).
On the other hand, a delayed transfer-tripping signal may mean that a
fault on the line is tripped in zone 2 time instead of undelayed in
zone 1.

System Description April 2004 3-63


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

High dependability and a short transmission time therefore take priority


over high security in a permissive scheme.
Typical requirements are transmission times of less than 20 ms and
false command rates under worst-case interference conditions of less
than 1E-04 (overreaching schemes) respectively 1E-05 (under-
reaching schemes).
The following typical settings result:
Command application: permissive
Bandwidth analog: 480 Hz for single tone commands
960 Hz for dual tone commands
Relay interface output: solid state
Command prolongation: 20 ms, must sometimes be reduced to
10 ms or less in permissive
overreaching applications

3.6.1.1. Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)


Stepped distance/time protection is used, with its high-speed zone 1
reach set to typically 85 percent of the protected circuit length. The
zone 1 relay is directional and does not operate for faults behind the
relay position; it initiates tripping of the local circuit-breaker, and
command transmission indicates that an internal fault within zone 1
reach is seen at the transmit end. The zone 1 reach must
accommodate practical measurement errors without risking unwanted
high-speed tripping for faults external to the protected circuit, while the
reaches of zone 2 and 3, with their necessary time lags, extend
beyond the protected circuit; their operation is associated with backup
protection of adjacent busbars and line sections.
For a fault on the protected circuit, one end, or the other, or both ends
will experience zone 1 relay operation, and the communication link
used is used to accelerate the protection in order to avoid delayed
zone 2 tripping for internal fault positions close to the circuit ends. The
command transmission time is much shorter than the zone 2 time
delay, and the tripping action of the received command is made
dependent on fault detecting devices, e.g. underimpedance,
undervoltage or overcurrent starting relays, to achieve single-phase or
three-phase tripping. Alternatively, the received command may be
used to extend the zone 1 relay reach to typically 130 percent of the
protected circuit length, or to bypass the time-lag of an independently
operating zone 2 relay.
Reception of a spurious tripping command, caused for instance by
switchgear noise influencing the communication channel, cannot on its

3-64 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

own result in unwanted tripping, and the use of local fault detecting
devices to control tripping action thus limits the risk of unwanted
tripping to conditions for which these devices operate in case of
external faults, e.g. to faults within the reach of an underimpedance
starting relay.
Failure of the communication link does not prevent correct operation of
the protection; selectivity is retained, but tripping is delayed at one
circuit end for certain fault positions. For this reason, the
communication link is sometimes described as a supplementary
feature in such applications.
Typical requirements in a PUTT scheme are:
nominal transmission time less than one power-frequency cycle,
and typical permissible delay about one and a half cycle
high dependability, because inadequate dependability may cause
delayed tripping on internal faults
good security, because inadequate security may cause unwanted
tripping on external faults

3.6.1.2. Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)


This method also uses transmission of tripping commands under
internal fault conditions to obtain high-speed tripping with distance
protection. The directional zone 1 reach is set beyond the end of the
circuit, typically to 130 percent of the protected circuit length. The zone
1 relays then cannot be permitted to trip directly, and tripping at each
end is made dependent upon both operation of the local zone 1 relay
and reception of a tripping command from the far end. In other words,
tripping at each end depends on zone 1 relay operation at both ends,
and correct operation of both relays and correct functioning of the
communication link in both directions are necessary for complete
isolation of a faulted circuit. The communication link is thus an
essential feature in such applications, and both a high dependability
and a short command transmission time are required.
POTT is sometimes used as second protection in duplicated main
protection schemes, for distance protection of short lines where
accurate zone 1 reach setting is difficult due to arc voltage and ground
resistance, and for distance protection of longer overhead lines with
series capacitors. A POTT scheme is applicable only where there is
adequate feed of fault current at both ends of the protected circuit; if
the circuit-breaker at one end is open, a received command at this end
must be looped back to the other end to accomplish tripping on
internal faults. Reversal of fault current following partial clearance of

System Description April 2004 3-65


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

external faults, e.g. on parallel circuits, require consideration of


operating and resetting times of relays and teleprotection equipment.
The risk of unwanted tripping due to flashover or switchgear noise
influencing the communication link is limited to external fault positions
just beyond the ends of the protected circuit ends. Communication link
failure will cause delayed zone 2 tripping at one end of the circuit, or at
both ends.
Typical requirements in a POTT scheme are:
nominal transmission time less than one power-frequency cycle,
and typical permissible delay about one and a half cycle
high dependability, because inadequate dependability causes
delayed tripping on all internal faults
good security, because inadequate security may cause unwanted
tripping on external faults

3.6.2. Blocking schemes


These types of protection differ fundamentally from tripping schemes
where inward fault current flow initiates a command to trip. The
operating principle of blocking schemes is detection of outward fault
current flow at one end of a protected circuit when the fault is external
to it. Such detection initiates transmission of a blocking command
which inhibits the tripping action at the other end where the fault
current flow is inward. In case of external faults, either end may thus
block the other, while no commands are transmitted in case of internal
faults.
Directional current relays or high-speed distance relays with zone 1
reach set beyond the far circuit end may be used as inward fault
current detectors, and the devices detecting outward fault current are
usually directional impedance or directional current relays.
Alternatively, command transmission may be initiated by a non-
directional starting relay and interrupted by the zone 1 relay; one end
or the other will then transmit a blocking command on external faults,
and the blocking commands are only interrupted at both ends in case
of internal faults.
Blocking schemes work correctly for all fault positions on the protected
circuit, even in case of a weak or missing in-feed or an open circuit-
breaker at one circuit end. Zone 1 extension may also be used in a
similar way as in a PUTT scheme; the zone 1 relay reach is then set to
cover about 85 percent of the circuit length and is switched to typically
130 percent after a short waiting time, unless a blocking command is
received. These zone 1 settings allow fast tripping at both circuit ends
for any fault position where their characteristics overlap.

3-66 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

In blocking schemes, communication link failure generally does not


affect the ability of the protection to trip correctly on internal faults;
command transmission is, however, essential for avoiding unwanted
tripping on external faults. Because of the importance of the
communication link, the teleprotection supervision facilities may be
arranged to switch the zone 1 relay settings from overreaching to
underreaching in the event of a communication link failure.
To obtain correct blocking action on external faults, the tripping action
of the protection relay at the end feeding inward fault current must be
delayed sufficiently to ensure that the do not trip command sent from
the end feeding outward fault current has arrived. This delay must be
kept to a minimum to ensure fast clearance of internal faults, and a
short command transmission time is therefore required.
The use of the communication link to convey blocking commands
avoids the risk of unwanted tripping due to interference and noise, e.g.
caused by circuit-breaker operation, unless this can prevent command
reception. Even a short interruption of genuine blocking commands
may cause spurious tripping, and a high dependability is therefore
required.
Impulsive interference and noise during internal faults, e.g. caused by
circuit-breaker operation, may delay tripping by simulating a blocking
signal; the duration of such delays is unlikely to exceed half a power
frequency cycle, so that only a moderate security is required.
Typical requirements in blocking schemes are:
nominal transmission time about half a power-frequency cycle and
maximum permissible delay one cycle;
high dependability, because inadequate dependability may cause
unwanted tripping on external faults
moderate security, because inadequate security may cause
delayed tripping on internal faults; delays shorter than half a power
frequency cycle are usually considered acceptable.

Transmission times of less than 10 ms for a 50 Hz power system or


less than 8 ms for a 60 Hz power system are therefore required for
blocking. False command rates under worst-case interference
conditions should be less than 1E-03 or even less than 1E-04.

System Description April 2004 3-67


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

The following configuration and settings are recommended for a


blocking line protection scheme:
Command application: blocking
Bandwidth analog: 960 Hz for single tone commands
1200 Hz for dual tone commands
Relay interface output: solid state
Command prolongation: 0 ms

3.6.3. Unblocking
In the early days of power line carrier communication, blocking
schemes were often used for overhead line protection in conjunction
with single-purpose on/off (amplitude-shift type) carriers with common
transmit/receive (simplex) channels. No carrier signals were
transmitted under healthy line and inward fault current flow
conditions, and the protection relays initiated carrier transmission only
if outward fault current flow was detected. The carrier off condition
thus meant permission to trip, while a received carrier signal meant
block = do not trip.
Since blocking commands are transmitted under external fault
conditions only, i.e. over healthy line sections, cost-saving phase-to-
ground couplings were used, and since carrier transmission is not
required in case of internal faults, the actual line attenuation under
fault conditions is of no importance. Link testing under normal healthy
line conditions required the use of manual carrier send facilities, and
automatic link monitoring required clock test devices transmitting
carrier signals of short duration at regular time intervals, e.g. every 30
minutes.
PUTT or POTT schemes were also used together with single-purpose
on/off duplex carriers having separate transmit and receive channels.
Continuous carrier signals were transmitted during healthy line
conditions, and the protection relays interrupted the carrier
transmission only if inward fault current flow was detected. These
schemes avoided the use of outward fault current detecting devices,
and a received carrier signal again meant block, while a carrier off
condition meant unblock = permission to trip. Certain types of faults
would prevent carrier signal reception by bridging the circuit, thus
causing the carrier receivers to automatically output an unblocking
command without the aid of the protection at the remote line end.
The unblock output signal duration was limited to about 8 power-
frequency cycles to avoid unwanted tripping in the event of permanent
channel failure, cost-saving phase-to-ground couplings were again

3-68 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

used, and the normal continuous carrier transmission simplified link


monitoring.
Most modern power line carriers are multi-purpose duplex equipment
for speech plus data transmission and teleprotection, the latter usually
being of the frequency-shift type allowing channel monitoring by a
continuously transmitted guard signal, which is replaced by one or
more command signals during fault conditions. The standard
modulation method is single sideband suppressed carrier, and the
preferred coupling arrangement is phase-to-phase, which in normal
operation causes less interference with other circuits and provides
lower line attenuation than phase-to-ground coupling, and exhibits only
moderate additional attenuation under all phase-to-earth fault and
most phase-to-phase fault conditions.
Phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults represent a severe
shock to a power system, in particular when they occur close to a
busbar, and fast fault clearance is then mandatory. Three-phase faults
and phase-to-phase faults involving the coupled phases close to one
line end cause high additional line attenuation, and teleprotection
receivers on power line carrier links may then be unable to decide if
the remote line end was transmitting a guard or a command signal.
However, a decision must be made from a protection point of view,
and analog NSD570 receivers therefore include a device which
outputs an unblocking signal of about 200 milliseconds duration if
neither a clean guard nor a valid command signal is received for a
specific pre-set time, typically one power-frequency cycle.
It is noted that unblocking commands are not transmitted at
protection relay request; they are automatically produced by certain
fault types. The received unblocking signal permits tripping and
should arrive at about the same time as the local protection relay picks
up; this ensures minimum fault clearing time, because relay pick up
time at the remote line end and command transmission time are not
involved.
NSD570 unblocking signals may be used to switch underreaching
zone 1 distance relays to overreaching in PUTT schemes, or to bypass
the time delay of independently operating zone 2 relays, but they are
used more often as fleeting trip enable signals in POTT schemes, to
assist the essential communication links under difficult internal line
fault conditions. The main problem with fast unblocking devices is to
avoid unwanted tripping on external faults.
Unblocking is not a protection scheme, but a standard emergency
feature included in all analog NSD570 receivers, whether they are
intended for power line carrier applications or not. It is also included in
all digital NSD570 receivers, where it indicates a complete loss of

System Description April 2004 3-69


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

signal or a poor signal quality, i.e. a bit error rate insufficient for reliable
command transmission.
Typical requirements in unblocking applications are:
nominal loss of receive signal detection time about one power-
frequency cycle, and typical permissible detection delay about two
cycles
high dependability, because inadequate immunity to fault arcing
noise may result in guard signal simulation and suppression of
unblocking output signal and thus cause delayed tripping on
internal faults
good security, because inadequate immunity to circuit-breaker
noise may result in guard signal suppression and simulation of
unblocking output signal and thus cause unwanted tripping on
external faults.

3.6.4. Earth fault protection


Earth faults have less effect on the power system stability than phase
faults, in particular if the fault current is limited, and it may be difficult
or even impossible to achieve correct distance relay operation under
earth fault conditions on overhead lines, due to a high resistance value
in the fault current path, e.g. in cases of mid-span faults, use of
wooden poles, high ground resistivity, or bush fire.
Such problems do not occur under phase-to-phase fault conditions,
and a power direction comparison system is often used for earth fault
protection together with a conventional stepped distance-time
protection for phase-to-phase faults. The directional power relays (zero
sequence and/or negative sequence) then detect all earth faults
outside the pick up range of the distance relays, which detect all
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults and all earth faults within their
pick up range. The overall protection scheme involves the use of a
communication link, and a common channel may be used in either a
permissive tripping or a blocking scheme to achieve fast fault
clearance both under earth fault and phase fault conditions.
However, since the earth fault protection cannot provide phase
information, it is sometimes preferred to use two separate command
channels to achieve fast fault clearance, either single-phase or three-
phase, under low-impedance fault conditions and delayed three-phase
tripping and re-closure lock out under high-impedance earth fault
conditions, e.g. caused by bush fire. The delayed tripping action of the
earth fault protection, about 10 power frequency cycles, avoids
interference with the fast tripping action of the distance protection.

3-70 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.5. Duplicated main protection


Two independently operating main protection systems are often used
on important circuits; the purpose is to improve the reliability of tripping
on internal faults. The overlapping characteristics of the two systems
duplicate the tripping function, and this permits failure of one protection
equipment or one communication link (and maintenance or repair work
on one system) without loss of tripping on internal faults.
One protection system may fail to trip under difficult or marginal fault
conditions, and the different capabilities of the systems are then used
to advantage. The types of protection and communication links and
their independent use influence both the improved overall
dependability (reliability of tripping on internal faults) and the reduced
security (increased risk of unwanted tripping on external faults).
The use of two main protection systems on important circuits is
justified in relation to the attainable availability and tripping reliability of
a single system. It is generally more economical to achieve the
improved reliability of tripping on internal faults by two systems than
designing one system to the higher reliability.
Some associated equipment (e.g. current and voltage transformers,
trip coils and power supplies) may also be duplicated, and triple
systems consisting of two protections using telecommunication
facilities and one stepped distance-time protection without commu-
nication are sometimes used.
The NSD570 teleprotection equipment is particularly suited to
duplicated protection applications, because each unit can convey two
or more independent commands at the same time. The units are
preferably allocated to different transmission media, line protection
commands may be criss-crossed between NSD570s, and important
(direct transfer tripping) commands may be conveyed in parallel over
both communication links.

System Description April 2004 3-71


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

R R
MP1 A A MP1
MP2 B B MP2
Route 1 (e.g. Cable,
BFP C PLC, Radio, PCM) C BFP
GSD/LS D NSD570 NSD570 D GSD/LS

A A
B Route 2 (e.g. Cable, B
PLC, Radio, PCM) C
C
D NSD570 D
NSD570

MP1: 1st main protection GSD: generator shut down BFP: breaker failure protection
MP2: 2nd main protection LS: load shedding + overvoltage protection
R: protection relay + shunt reactor protection

3-Single-line2.vsd

Fig. 3.26 Duplicated line protection and breaker-failure


protection of an important single circuit

R2 R1 R1 R2

MP1 Line 1 A A MP1 Line 1


MP2 Line 2 B B MP2 Line 2
Route 1 (e.g. Cable,
BFP Line 1 C PLC, Radio, PCM) C BFP Line 1
BFP Line 2 D NSD570 NSD570 D BFP Line 2

MP1 Line 2 A A MP1 Line 2


MP2 Line 1 B Route 2 (e.g. Cable, B MP2 Line 1
PLC, Radio, PCM) C
C
D NSD570 NSD570 D

MP1: 1st main protection R1/R2: protection relay BFP: breaker failure protection
MP2: 2nd main protection + overvoltage protection
+ shunt reactor protection

3-Dual-line2.vsd

Fig. 3.27 Duplicated line protection of a twin line, with breaker-


failure protection on each circuit

3-72 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.6. Direct transfer tripping


Most protective systems are intended to respond to faults within a
precise zone, generally bounded by circuit-breakers. Their basis
function is to decide whether a fault is external or internal and, in the
latter case, to trip the circuit-breakers and isolate the protected zone.
Provided that fault conditions are as expected and provided that the
equipment functions correctly, such protection systems are very
effective.
The selective protection of circuits or components of a power system is
concerned only with what happens in its protected zone and thus
excludes consideration of the behavior of the power system as a
whole. Protection systems should therefore also be able to respond to
faults over a considerable area of the power system, in particular to
provide for conditions of a failure to clear a fault by neighboring
selective protections, which may be due to a failure to trip by these
protections or by their associated circuit-breakers.
Protection of this type is usually called back-up protection, and at the
lower voltage levels the desired function may be obtained by time
delays. The times involved are typically 0.5 to 2 seconds, and the
possibility of experiencing such fault duration and subsequent tripping
of a number of circuit-breakers is out of the question at the higher
voltage levels in large heavily loaded power systems. It is therefore
necessary to employ telecommunication techniques to reduce the
operating time of back-up protections to a few power frequency cycles.

3.6.6.1. Line protection


Direct transfer tripping may be used in conjunction with underreaching
distance protection to initiate tripping at the remote line end when the
local protection relay picks up. This ensures a high degree of tripping
reliability for the protected line, because fast or delayed tripping is
achieved at both line ends, even if one relay picks up after a time-lag
or not at all, e.g. due to weak in-feed, saturation of current
transformers, high earth-fault impedance, or relay failure.
Direct transfer tripping is, however, rarely used for line protection,
because reception of a spurious command always results in unwanted
tripping. A longer command transmission time must then be allowed to
achieve a considerably better security than required in permissive
tripping applications, and direct transfer tripping is also hardly suitable
in conjunction with single-phase automatic re-closure, unless a phase-
segregated transmission (one command per phase) is used, because
phase selection is needed at the receive end.

System Description April 2004 3-73


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.6.6.2. Re-closure lock out


Automatic re-closure is widely used in various forms to avoid
permanent isolation of a circuit in case of temporary faults, which
represent a high proportion of faults on overhead lines. Faults must be
isolated for a short time, about 0.3 seconds, to de-ionize the fault path
before the circuit is re-energized; the overall time must be kept to a
minimum, and this requires fast coordinated tripping of the circuit-
breakers at the line ends.
High-speed tripping and fast automatic re-closure thus limit the
dissipation of energy at the fault, minimize the disturbance to the
power system and reduce interruption of supply to important loads.
A re-closure lock-out command must sometimes be transferred to a
remote line end after that a fault has been cleared. Since reception of
a spurious command does not result in unwanted tripping, the
dependability and security requirements pertaining to permissive
tripping then apply.

3.6.6.3. Breaker back-up protection


The purpose of breaker back-up protection, often called breaker failure
protection, is to initiate fast tripping of the circuit-breaker(s) adjacent to
a damaged circuit-breaker which, due to jamming or loss of air
pressure, has failed to clear a fault.
In case of a fault on a busbar and a jammed line circuit-breaker
connected to it, the busbar protection first tries to clear the fault by
three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out of all local circuit-breakers
feeding fault current to the busbar. Since the local line circuit-breaker
is stuck, fault current is still flowing, and the breaker back-up protection
must now isolate the fault by sending a direct tripping command to the
remote line end, requesting three-phase tripping and re-closure lock
out.
In case of a line fault and a jammed circuit-breaker at one line end, the
line protection first tries to clear the fault by single phase or three-
phase tripping at both line ends. Due to the jammed circuit-breaker,
fault current is still flowing, and the breaker back-up protection must
now isolate the fault by three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out of
all local circuit-breakers feeding fault current to the line. After thus
having cleared the fault, it sends a direct tripping command to the
remote line end, requesting re-closure lock out and three-phase
tripping (to also disconnect the two healthy phases, if the line fault was
single phase).

3-74 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.6.4. Shunt reactor protection


The current flow in a lines shunt capacitance causes a voltage drop in
its series inductance and series resistance, which in turn leads to a
considerable voltage change at the receiving end from the no-load to
full-load current. This reduces the lines current carrying capacity,
causes increased power losses and may result in stability problems;
the large inductance of the lines and transformers is in fact the main
cause of stability problems for longer lines.
The most common remedy is to provide shunt reactors at the
substations. The shunt reactors reduce the problems associated with
the lines shunt capacitance by partly canceling out the power-
frequency shunt capacitive current, and for cost reasons they are
sometimes connected to the line without circuit-breakers. The line and
the reactors must then be protected together, and since it may not be
possible to provide adequate protection of the reactors by the relays at
the line ends, some problems arise from this requirement.
In case of a reactor fault, the fault current may be of limited or
negligible value, and it is usually necessary to distinguish between
reactor faults and line faults, because automatic re-closure is only
desirable for line faults. The use of a communication link overcomes
the problems when the reactor protection initiates three-phase tripping
and re-closure lock out of the local line circuit-breaker and at the same
time sends a direct tripping command to the remote line end,
requesting three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out.
Shunt reactor protection and breaker back-up protection may share a
common direct transfer tripping channel, because tripping commands
originate at the same location and terminate on the same remote
circuit-breaker.

System Description April 2004 3-75


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.6.6.5. Transformer protection


Transformers are sometimes connected to a line with circuit-breakers
only on the secondary lower voltage side. Transformer faults including
core insulation and interturn faults cannot be detected by the line
protection and require current differential protection in conjunction with
gas and oil actuated Buchholz relays.
When picking up, the transformer protection initiates tripping of the
secondary-side circuit-breaker and transmission of a direct tripping
command to the circuit-breaker(s) at the remote line end(s). High
dependability, fast transmission (less than 0.1 second) and high
security are required to avoid damage and unwanted tripping due to
interference and noise influencing the communication link.
In cases where the line is an important interconnection, automatic re-
closure may be required to follow tripping and disconnection of the
faulty transformer by a motor-operated isolator; this may require the
use of further communication facilities.

3.6.6.6. Power system instability


The complex interconnection of a number of generating centers by a
power transmission system constitutes a network which, even when
heavily loaded, is normally stable. When disturbed by some stimulus
such as a fault, the system may become unstable and, depending on
the type, location and duration of the fault, begin to oscillate; the
generating centers then swing beyond the stability limit and drop out of
step.
Power swing conditions cause interchange of three-phase currents,
amplitude-modulated at a frequency of typically 1 to 2 Hz, and present
serious problems to the continued operation of the power system.
When the generating centers are in anti-phase with each other, the
currents and voltages correspond to those which would occur with a
three-phase fault at the power systems electrical center, and
protections based on directional relays or distance relays may operate
at some point of the system and cause uncontrolled tripping.
Such uncontrolled (and usually unwanted) tripping can be prevented
by providing out-of-step blocking features; this can be done without the
use of communication links and is therefore not dealt with here. It may,
however, be desirable to initiate controlled tripping at certain points to
sectionalize the power system and minimize the disturbance, and
facilitate the restoration of normal conditions.
These points do not necessarily coincide with those at which distance
protections would operate, and the use of special devices and
communication channels for transmission of direct transfer tripping
commands may be required.

3-76 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.6.7. Generator shutdown and load shedding


Two power systems, each basically self-contained, may be
interconnected by a number of synchronous tie lines, e.g. for the
purpose of interchanging surplus power. The loss of one tie line, e.g.
caused by clearing of a permanent fault and subsequent re-closure
lock out, may not produce tripping conditions on other ties; they may
then become overloaded and, if this occurs at a time of heavy system
load, the subsequent tripping of an overloaded tie line may produce
successive overloading and tripping of other interconnections and thus
result in a widespread disruption of the system.
Since the effects of overload are thermal, they can be considered in a
considerably longer time scale than faults, e.g. up to one minute
compared to a fraction of a second; they may, however, affect a
considerable portion of the power system.
It may therefore be necessary to employ teleprotection links to transmit
generator shutdown commands and load shedding commands from
interconnection points over larger distances and through a number of
intermediate stations to generator sites and to load locations. The
dependability, security and transmission time requirements are similar
to those which apply to breaker back-up protection, but the overall
operating time must be considered, due to the tandem connection of
communication links through a number of intermediate stations.
It is noted that telecommunication facilities for generator shutdown and
load shedding permit interconnections to be operated closer to their
overload limits than without their use; they thus improve network
utilization and commercial efficiency of the electricity supply. Without
such facilities, larger safety margins are needed to avoid overload and
stability problems in case of a tie line loss.

System Description April 2004 3-77


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.6.6.8. Typical requirements in direct tripping applications


nominal transmission time less than one and a half power-
frequency cycle, and maximum permissible delay about two and a
half cycles
very high dependability, because inadequate dependability causes
delayed tripping; delays shorter than about one power frequency
cycle are usually acceptable
very high security, because inadequate security always causes
unwanted tripping; the false trip probability must be kept extremely
small in normal operation and in particular during fault and
abnormal operating conditions.

Communication facilities for direct transfer tripping applications are


often duplicated at the upper voltage levels, to improve the reliability of
wanted operation.
Very high security and dependability, achieved at the expense of
transmission time, are therefore required in direct transfer tripping
applications.
Transmission times of 25 to 40 ms are generally sufficient for direct
transfer tripping. False command rates under worst-case interference
conditions should be less than 1E-07 or even less than 1E-08.
The following typical settings result:
Command application: direct
Bandwidth analog: 240 Hz for single tone commands
360 Hz for dual tone commands
Relay interface output: solid state or relay contacts
Command prolongation: 10 ms up to 100 ms (it is
recommended not to configure a
prolongation below 10 ms)
Command outputs set to the quiescent state in case of an
alarm

3-78 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.7. Teed lines and tapped lines


In power systems undergoing development and extensions, multi-
ended circuits are sometimes used for economic reasons instead of a
number of two-ended circuits. Multi-ended circuits may be either
teed circuits provided with circuit-breakers at each end at the same
voltage level, where the ends are of equal or comparable
importance, or
tapped circuits where the two-ended main circuit is equipped with
circuit-breakers at each end and the taps are transformers
connected to the main circuit with circuit-breakers only on the
secondary lower voltage sides. The taps supply loads are generally
less important than the main circuit.
A teed circuit usually presents a difficult protection problem. When
distance relays are used for line protection, their reaches are affected
by the length of the line sections and the in-feed or out-feed of fault
current at the line ends; the latter may increase or decrease the
apparent line impedance seen under fault conditions and thus cause
the protection to underreach or overreach.
The distance relays can sometimes (under favorable conditions) be
set to a suitable zone 1 reach at all ends, i.e. to underreach and avoid
overreaching the nearest end. Operation of any zone 1 relay is then
arranged to transmit permissive underreaching commands to all other
ends, so that an internal fault detected at one end will initiate tripping
at all ends.
The choice of a suitable zone 1 reach is, however, often difficult or
insufficient when the setting should avoid overreaching the nearest
end, so that a considerable portion of the line would be protected by
the delayed zone 2. The zone 1 relays are then be set to overreach
beyond the line ends, and a blocking or a permissive overreaching
protection must be used.
Detection of outward fault current flow at any end may be arranged to
transmit blocking commands to all other ends, so that an external fault
detected at one end will prevent tripping at all ends.
Alternatively, detection of inward fault current flow at any end may be
arranged to transmit permissive overreaching commands to all other
ends; an internal fault must then be detected at all ends to initiate
tripping at any end.
Individual analysis is always required to ensure correct function of the
protective system, and attention must be paid to the risk of loss of
tripping on internal faults when two ends of a teed circuit are also
interconnected by a direct line. This may result in outward fault

System Description April 2004 3-79


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

current flow at one end during some internal fault conditions, and the
direction of power flow in the direct line must be considered.
Protection of a multi-ended circuit generally requires communication
between all ends, and the classical solution for protection of a multi-
ended circuit with n terminals is to provide two transmitters and two
receivers at each end and communication links between all ends, i.e.
n x (n-1):2 communication links (2 out of n) and n x (n-1) transmitters
and receivers. Command inputs must be parallel connected at all
ends, while the command outputs are either parallel connected (wired
OR) or series connected (wired AND), depending on the chosen
protection scheme.
Type NSD570 teleprotection offers solutions saving both information
links and terminal equipment, and the diagram below shows the
arrangement for a three-ended circuit: The operating principle is,
however, also applicable to circuits with four or more ends and thus
considerably reduces the required number of NSD570s and
communication links, because only (n-1) communication links (from A
to first T, from first T to second T, etc., and from last T to B) are
required, together with 2 x (n-1) NSD570s (one at A and B and two at
each T).

A B

TX TX
TX TX

RX RX
RX RX

TPE 1 TPE 2

TX RX RX TX

TX RX 3-T-operation.vsd

Fig. 3.28 T-operation principle

3-80 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.7.1. NSD570 Analog/Digital in normal T-operation


One NSD570 is installed in A and one in B, and two NSD570 in a
common rack are required in T. Under normal fault-free conditions with
the NSD570 Analog, the guard signals transmitted from A and B are
through-connected in T towards B and A. At the same time they are
evaluated in T, while the guard signals originating at T are suppressed.
In case of the NSD570 Digital, the guard signals are also generated at
T, i.e. there is no through-connection of the guard from A to B or from
B to A.
Under fault conditions, blocking or permissive underreach tripping
commands originating at A and/or B are through-connected at T and
simultaneously lead to the NSD570 outputs ("dropping" of commands),
which are parallel-connected to the protection relay input (wired OR).
When a command originating at T is applied to the parallel-connected
NSD570 transmitter inputs of a NSD570 Analog, the A-T-B and B-T-A
through-connections are interrupted, and the T command is sent to A
and B instead of the guard signals received from B and A.
T-commands originating at an NSD570 Digital are sent to A and B
instead of the guard signals generated in T.
When a command from A or B is received in T and a local transmit
command is active at the same time, a combined command signal is
generated and conveyed to B or A ("inserting" of commands).
The operating principle of the normal NSD570 T-operation is thus to
perform all required OR combinations of blocking commands or
permissive underreach tripping commands in the intermediate T
stations. The command delays due to the signal through-connections
at T are small and may be ignored in practical operation, while
conventional tandem connections at the transmit and receive
interfaces in T would result in addition of the A to T, T to T and T to B
command transmission times.
Loop tests may only be initiated at the outer stations A and B; test
signals are relayed through all stations and thus test the complete
teleprotection system. The cyclic loop test must be switched off in the
T-station.
Transmitter and receivers of the analog version must use the same
bandwidth and center frequencies in "normal" T-operation, while end-
to-end operation allows a different transmit and receive channel
bandwidth.
The digital interfaces of the two links in a digital T-operation scheme
may be different, i.e. one link may use the G.703 interface of G3LD
while the other uses the RS-530 interface.

System Description April 2004 3-81


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

In the "normal" T-operation the EOC is only operating between the


outer stations A and B and - in case of the analog version - only if the
guard signal is transmitted.
If the NSD570 Analog is used, the guard signal is restored in the
T station if one link fails, i.e. the "healthy" link remains active (as a
simple point-to-point connection). If the guard signal reappears from
the "lost" outer station, the guard signal originated in the T station will
be removed and the original T-operation scheme is re-established.
Because there is no through-connection of the guard signals in the
NSD570 Digital, no restoring is needed in case of one link fails. The
"healthy" link automatically remains active.
Please refer to Section 5 "Configuration and settings" of this manual
for details about configuring command application and T-operation
mode.

3.6.7.2. NSD570 Analog/Digital in inverse T-operation


One NSD570 is installed in A and one in B, and two NSD570 in a
common rack are required in T. Under normal fault-free conditions, the
guard signals originating at T are transmitted towards A and B. The
guard signals received from A and B are evaluated at T but not
through-connected towards B and A, just as in normal end-to-end
operations.
Under fault conditions, commands received from A and/or B are lead
to the NSD570 outputs at T, which are series-connected to the
protection relay input (wired AND), but received command signals are
only through-connected when at least one command originates at T. In
contrast to the NSD570 Digital the received guard signals of the
NSD570 Analog are through-connected as well when a command is
originating at T. Consequentially the boosting facility is disabled in
the NSD570 Analog devices configured for Inverse T-Operation, but
the boosting output on the Analog Interface G3LA is still operated
when a command is injected at T.
Commands originating at T are therefore not transmitted towards A
and B; they just through-connect received guard (NSD570 Analog
only) and command signals. No provisions are made for individual
through-connection of specific command signals. Any command signal
received from A is sent to B, and vice versa, when some command
originates at T.
All ends must thus transmit command signals to generate a receive
command state at any end, and the operating principle of the inverse
NSD570 T-operation is to perform all required AND combinations of
permissive overreach tripping commands in the intermediate T
stations. The command delays due the signal through-connections at

3-82 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

T are small and may be ignored in practical operation, but the


application is generally confined to one command per end, because
command signals cannot be selectively through-connected at T.
Loop tests may be initiated at all stations; test signals from the outer
stations are either reflected from the T station or from the remote outer
station (when a command is injected at the T station) and thus test the
complete teleprotection system.
Transmitter and receivers of the analog version must use the same
bandwidth and center frequencies in "inverse" T-operation, while end-
to-end operation allows a different transmit and receive channel
bandwidth.
The digital interfaces of the two links in a digital T-operation scheme
may be different, i.e. one link may use the G.703 interface of G3LD
while the other uses the RS-530 interface.
In the "inverse" T-operation the EOC is operating between the outer
stations A and T respectively B and T (when no command is injected
at the T station) or - in case of the analog version and only if the guard
signal is transmitted - between the outer stations A and B (when a
command is injected at the T station). In a digital scheme the EOC
always operates between A and T respectively B and T, independent
of the command state in T.
Please refer to Section 5 "Configuration and settings" of this manual
for details about configuring command application and "inverse" T-
operation mode.

3.6.7.3. Addressing of NSD570 Digital in T-operation


For point-to-point links, the local address must be the same as the
remote address at the opposite end of the line. The remote address is
included in the outgoing signal and compared with the local address by
the receiver. The address of the station for which the signal is intended
thus forms part of the signal transmitted.
The programming is somewhat special in teed stations. In normal T-
operation (Section 3.6.7.1), the incoming signal is relayed through the
teed station as long as no local command is being activated, i.e. the
address in the incoming signal is also relayed unchanged. Should the
protection in the teed station trip, the tripping signal is generated
locally and has to be transmitted to the other stations with the same
address information than previously.
Thus in the teed station both the local and remote addresses applied
to the Digital Interface G3LD are identical with the address in the
incoming signal.

System Description April 2004 3-83


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

A B
Local address: 15 Local address: 23
Remote address: 23 Remote address: 15

TX TX
TX TX

RX RX
RX RX

Local address: 15 Local address: 23


Remote address: 15 TPE 1 TPE 2 Remote address: 23

TX RX RX TX

TX RX 3-Normal-T-operation-with-digital-addresses.vsd

Fig. 3.29 Addressing example for normal T-operation


In inverse T-operation (Section 3.6.7.2), the outgoing signal in the teed
station is generated locally in the quiescent state and in case a local
command is being activated the incoming signal is relayed to the other
stations. Since there are two independent links A-T and B-T in the
quiescent state, the digital addresses have to be configured
correspondingly.

A B
Local address: 15 Local address: 23
Remote address: 23 Remote address: 15

TX TX
TX TX

RX RX
RX RX

TPE 1 TPE 2
Local address: 23 Local address: 15
Remote address: 15 Remote address: 23

TX RX RX TX

TX RX 3-Inverse-T-operation-with-digital-addresses.vsd

Fig. 3.30 Addressing example for inverse T-operation

3-84 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.7.4. Tapped lines


(See also Direct Transfer Tripping, Section 3.6.6; Transformer
Protection, Section 3.6.6.5)
Stepped distance/time protection relays are well suited for multi-ended
circuit applications involving transformer tapping points; the setting of
their zone 1 coverage is eased, because it may reach into part of the
transformer impedance, and a permissive underreaching transfer
tripping scheme may be chosen for line protection.
The transformers are often connected to the main circuit with circuit-
breakers only on the secondary lower voltage sides; they usually
supply loads and are less important than the main circuit, but power
feedback to the main circuit may occur during fault conditions. The line
protection must then be arranged to trip the breakers at the main
circuit ends and some or all secondary-side circuit-breakers at the
tapping points.
Transformer faults cannot be detected by the main circuit protection,
and a transformer protection must initiate tripping of its secondary-side
circuit-breaker and transmission of direct tripping commands to the
circuit-breakers at the main circuit ends and to some or all other
circuit-breakers at the tapping points. Fast transmission, high
dependability and high security are required as in all direct transfer
tripping applications.
Received direct tripping commands are usually arranged to cause
three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out. Command transmission
of limited duration is sufficient to achieve wanted operation, and
subsequent restoration to normal operation is then accomplished by
SCADA commands after that the faulty transformer has been
disconnected from the main circuit.
NSD570 in normal T-operation (refer to Section 3.6.7.1) are suitable
for such applications, when direct tripping is arranged to take priority
over blocking or permissive underreach tripping.
In cases of important main circuits and tapping points, automatic re-
closure may be required to follow tripping and disconnection of the
faulty transformer by a motor-operated isolator. Command
transmission must then be arranged to continue until the faulty
transformer has been isolated from the main circuit; it must first be
ensured that the circuit-breakers at all ends have tripped, and the use
of further communication facilities is thus required.
Please refer to Section 5 "Configuration and settings" of this manual
for details about configuring command application and "normal" T-
operation mode.

System Description April 2004 3-85


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

3.6.8. Phase-Segregated Command Transmission

3.6.8.1. Twin Line - Two Systems on Common Towers

E E

T1 T2 T1 R2

S1 S2 S1 S2

R1 R2 R1 T2

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
3-Twin-line.vsd

Fig. 3.31 Twin Line - Two Systems on Common Towers

The conductor arrangement in Fig. 2 is often preferred, because it


provides a better balance of the line capacitances to earth than the
arrangement shown in Fig1.
Suppose now that a lightning stroke close to the line induces a voltage
adding to all phase voltages, and suppose that this causes insulation
breakdown on the phase T conductor of the circuit 1 and flash-over
across a T1 insulator shown on Fig. 2, somewhere in the center
portion of the line. Suppose further that insulation breakdown occurs a
moment later on the phase R conductor of the circuit 2 (subsequent
flash-over across a neighboring R2 insulator). In a POTT scheme, the
circuit 1 and 2 protection relays are then in this situation:
Underimpedance/undervoltage/overcurrent start relays detect
phase-to-ground fault on phases R and T; the distance relays on
both circuits transmit permissive tripping commands; permissive
tripping commands (without phase names) are received at all line

3-86 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

ends; the received commands in combination with the local phase


informations result in three-phase tripping * at all line ends, because
the line protections believe that they are faced with either a phase-
to-phase fault on both circuits, or with an intercircuit fault. A PUTT
scheme would behave similarly, at least at one line end.
* The usual strategy is to use three-pole tripping in case of two-phase or three-
phase faults. Single-pole fault clearance may be used in case of phase-to-
ground faults, if the protection and the power system arrangement permits;
however, some power utilities are afraid of negative sequence and never use
single-pole tripping.

That was an unnecessary and unwanted action, because the phase


conductors R1 and T2 and both phase conductors S1 and S2 were
healthy; it would have been sufficient to trip the phase T circuit
breakers on circuit 1 and the phase R circuit breakers at the circuit 2
ends.
Correct single-pole fault clearance can be achieved on both circuits
when phase names are attached to the permissive tripping commands,
e.g. if phase-segregated command transmission is used in a POTT
scheme. This requires the use of three line protection commands (R,
S, T) instead of only one permissive tripping command on each circuit,
and the tripping action of a received R, S or T command must be
made dependent of the local R, S or T fault detecting devices (logical
AND combination, or series wiring).

3.6.8.2. Long Single EHV Overhead Line


About 85 percent of all faults at the higher voltage levels occur on
overhead lines and are single phase to ground faults of a temporary
nature, e.g. caused by lightning. Provided that fast fault clearance is
achieved, they do not spread to other conductors and usually do not
result in permanent damage; the fault must be isolated for about 0.3
seconds to de-ionize the fault path, and the circuit can usually be
successfully re-energized after about 0.5 seconds.
Consider a single-circuit overhead line and suppose now that a
lightning stroke has induced a voltage adding to all phase voltages,
and that this causes insulation breakdown and flash-over across a
phase R insulator somewhere on the line. Both line ends then detect a
phase R to ground fault, and the circuit breakers are tripped at both
line ends, either single-phase or three-phase, as appropriate and pre-
programmed.

System Description April 2004 3-87


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Longer EHV overhead lines sometimes exhibit a somewhat peculiar


transient response upon re-closure, and the generating centers at the
line ends may be slightly out of phase when the circuit breakers re-
close, which may cause the line protection relays to pick up
sporadically. This may result in unwanted re-tripping and re-closure
lock-out, at least at one line end.
It is noted that the re-closures at the line ends are not synchronized.
When the last circuit breaker re-closes, the line protections at both
ends may pick up sporadically and indicate a transient fault on phase
R at one end and on phase T at the other end. Re-tripping and re-
closure lock-out can be avoided under such conditions when phase
names are attached to the permissive tripping commands, e.g. if
phase-segregated command transmission is used in a POTT scheme;
the tripping action of a received R, S or T command must then be
made dependent of the local R, S or T fault detecting devices (logical
AND combination).
If a blocking scheme is used for line protection, the line end feeding
outward fault current transmits a blocking command to the remote
end in case of an external fault to prevent possible tripping due to in-
feed of inward fault current. Some users let this blocking command
stand on the line for about 0.75 seconds, i.e. for a time sufficiently long
to prevent unwanted tripping if the protection at the line end feeding
inward fault current should pick up sporadically when the circuit
breakers on the adjacent line section re-close.
It is further noted that a distance relay set to underreach in a PUTT
scheme may be switched to overreach while a re-closure pulse is
applied to the line circuit breaker; this allows fast a fault clearance
independent of communication facilities *, e.g. if a metallic connection
exists across the insulation. Such rare faults are usually due to failure
to remove grounding connections before replacing a circuit into
service; they are normally three-phase and may cause considerable
disturbance to the power system, in particular when they are close to a
busbar. They are therefore usually considered to be permanent faults,
requiring three-phase tripping and re-closure lock-out.
* A power line carrier link is obviously unable to work, when maintenance work is
done on the overhead line and maintenance grounds are placed at the working
location, and the line is three-phase grounded at both ends.

3-88 April 2004 System Description


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

4. User interface program

4.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 4-3


4.2. Safety instruction ..................................................................... 4-4
4.3. System requirements and technical data for the HMI570 ........ 4-4
4.4. Installation of the HMI570 ........................................................ 4-4
4.5. Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570..... 4-5
4.5.1. Local connection ...................................................................... 4-5
4.5.2. Remote connection over (EOC)............................................... 4-6
4.6. Communication between the HMI570 LAN and the NSD570... 4-6
4.6.1. Remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet........................ 4-6
4.6.2. Security considerations for connections over Internet.............. 4-7
4.7. Multiple connection .................................................................. 4-8
4.8. Browser front end .................................................................... 4-9
4.8.1. Browser Settings...................................................................... 4-9
4.8.1.1. Internet Explorer 5.x............................................................... 4-10
4.8.1.2. Internet Explorer 6 ................................................................. 4-10
4.8.1.3. Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x / 7.x ............................................... 4-11
4.8.1.4. Additional browser settings for the HMI570 LAN ................... 4-12
4.9. Starting the program .............................................................. 4-13
4.9.1. HMI570 PC ............................................................................ 4-13
4.9.2. HMI570 LAN .......................................................................... 4-13
4.10. Operation ............................................................................... 4-14
4.10.1. Introduction ............................................................................ 4-14
4.10.2. Basic operation principles ...................................................... 4-14
4.10.3. Design.................................................................................... 4-14
4.10.4. Login / Logoff ......................................................................... 4-15
4.10.5. User Administration and Permissions .................................... 4-15
4.10.6. Change password .................................................................. 4-17
4.10.7. Connect / Disconnect Device................................................. 4-17
4.10.7.1. Connect Device ..................................................................... 4-18
4.10.7.2. Error messages and troubleshooting ..................................... 4-19
4.10.7.3. Disconnect Device ................................................................. 4-20
4.10.8. Configuration ......................................................................... 4-21
4.10.8.1. Load From Disk ..................................................................... 4-21
4.10.8.2. View Configuration................................................................. 4-21
4.10.8.3. Edit Configuration .................................................................. 4-21
4.10.8.4. Save To Disk ......................................................................... 4-24

User interface program April 2004 4-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.8.5. Discard Configuration ............................................................ 4-24


4.10.8.6. Download To Device.............................................................. 4-24
4.10.8.7. Upload From Device .............................................................. 4-24
4.10.9. Event Recorder...................................................................... 4-25
4.10.9.1. Load From Disk ..................................................................... 4-25
4.10.9.2. View Events ........................................................................... 4-25
4.10.9.3. Save To Disk ......................................................................... 4-25
4.10.9.4. Upload Events ....................................................................... 4-25
4.10.9.5. Clear Event Recorder ............................................................ 4-25
4.10.9.6. Import events into a spreadsheet or word processing tool..... 4-26
4.10.10. Status / Alarm ........................................................................ 4-26
4.10.10.1. Upload Status ........................................................................ 4-26
4.10.10.2. Upload Alarm ......................................................................... 4-27
4.10.10.3. Trip Counter........................................................................... 4-27
4.10.11. Maintenance .......................................................................... 4-27
4.10.11.1. Manual Loop Test .................................................................. 4-27
4.10.11.2. Reset Device ......................................................................... 4-28
4.10.11.3. Previous Configuration........................................................... 4-28
4.10.11.4. Set Time and Date ................................................................. 4-28
4.10.11.5. Get Time and Date................................................................. 4-28
4.10.11.6. Device Communication .......................................................... 4-29
4.10.11.7. Firmware Download ............................................................... 4-29
4.10.12. Commissioning ...................................................................... 4-30
4.10.13. Alarm Polling.......................................................................... 4-30
4.10.13.1. Impact when the Alarm Polling is started ............................... 4-32
4.10.13.2. Start Alarm Polling ................................................................. 4-33
4.10.13.3. Stop Alarm Polling ................................................................. 4-33
4.10.13.4. Configure Alarm Polling ......................................................... 4-33
4.10.13.5. Graphical View....................................................................... 4-34
4.10.13.6. View Entire Logfile ................................................................. 4-35
4.10.13.7. View Latest 50 Entries ........................................................... 4-35
4.10.13.8. Clear Entire Logfile ................................................................ 4-35
4.10.13.9. Refresh Page......................................................................... 4-35
4.10.13.10. Stop Refreshing ..................................................................... 4-35
4.10.13.11. Start Auto Pop-Up.................................................................. 4-35
4.10.13.12. Stop Auto Pop-Up .................................................................. 4-35
4.10.13.13. Multiple users......................................................................... 4-36
4.10.14. HMI570 Options..................................................................... 4-36
4.10.14.1. Device Communication .......................................................... 4-36
4.10.14.2. LAN Interface......................................................................... 4-36
4.10.14.3. About ..................................................................................... 4-37
4.10.14.4. Exit HMI570 ........................................................................... 4-37

4-2 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4. User interface program

4.1. Introduction
The HMI570 software is the interface between the user and the
NSD570 system. Therefore it is an integral component of the NSD570
equipment family. It allows the user to commission, configure and
monitor a NSD570 device.
The HMI570 has a client / server architecture. This means that the
application runs on a server and the user interacts with the application
through a web browser (client).
There are two different kinds of HMI570 applications available:
The HMI570 PC can be installed from CD onto a PC/Notebook
and allows connecting an NSD570 device locally and remote over
EOC. This kind allows no connection over LAN/WAN but no LAN
interface G3LL is needed.
The HMI570 LAN needs a NSD570 LAN Interface (G3LL) in the
NSD570 rack. It allows connecting an NSD570 device remotely
over LAN/WAN.
The HMI570 supports:
Configuration of NSD570 systems
Commissioning of NSD570 links
Monitoring of NSD570 devices.

To establish a connection to the NSD570 system, the HMI570 has to


communicate with the NSD570 device, see Section 4.5.
Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570.
Some functions of the HMI570 can also be used without a device
connected. Configuration data entered into the HMI570 in this mode
can be saved to file for later use or data fetched previously from a
device and saved to file can be analyzed and visualized later with the
HMI570.

User interface program April 2004 4-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.2. Safety instruction

The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using


Caution certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commis-
sioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote
test mode).
However, when a user is logged in with only "view
permission", it is not possible to disable the device.

Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation


the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of
the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes
the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked
for approx. 10 seconds.
During this time no commands can be transmitted.

Note: It is recommended to disconnect the PC / notebook


from the LAN while running the HMI570 and
connecting a device via the RS-232 interface.

4.3. System requirements and technical data for the HMI570


Please refer to 1KHW000894 Software Installation Description
HMI570.

4.4. Installation of the HMI570


Please refer to 1KHW000894 Software Installation Description
HMI570.

4-4 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.5. Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570


To connect the HMI570 PC running on a PC to a NSD570 via the
RS-232 interface on the front panel, a 9-pole 1:1 modem cable (female
to male) is required. Also the handshake signals (RTS and CTS) must
be 1:1 connected. In case the COM port of the PC has a 25-pole
RS-232 connector, an adapter (25-pole female to 9-pole male) is
needed.
The default baud rate (57600) requires a cable length below 3 meters.

Parameter Setting

Baud rate 57600


Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control RTS, CTS handshake

Table 4.1 RS-232 default interface settings

4.5.1. Local connection


Substation A
Station bus

NSD570
TPE 1 TPE 2 TPE 1 TPE 2
100 101 120 121

NSD570 A1 NSD570 A2
RS232
Device
address

HMI570
4-Local-connection.vsd

Fig. 4.1 Example for local connection

A connection between the PC / notebook allows to connect all


NSD570 that are within a substation and wired by the station bus. In
the example above, the devices with address 100, 101, 120 and 121
can be connected via a local connection.

Note: Every NSD570 line interface within a substation must


have a unique device address.

User interface program April 2004 4-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.5.2. Remote connection over (EOC)


Embedded operation channel (EOC)

Substation A Substation B
Station bus

NSD570
TPE 1 TPE 2 TPE 1 TPE 2 TPE 1 TPE 2
100 101 120 121 220 221

NSD570 A1 NSD570 A2 NSD570 B1


RS232
Device
address

HMI570
4-Remote-connection.vsd

Fig. 4.2 Remote connection over EOC

Note: This remote connection is only possible if both


devices (the local and the remote) have the EOC
switched on.

A connection over EOC allows connecting the remote peer device of a


link. In the example above, a remote connection with device address
100 effectively connects device 220.

4.6. Communication between the HMI570 LAN and the NSD570

4.6.1. Remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet


Substation A Substation F
Station bus

TPE1 TPE2 LAN


TPE1 TPE2 LAN TPE1 TPE2 100 120 Interface
100 101 Interface 120 121
NSD570 F1
NSD570 A1 NSD570 A2

Device
address

LAN / WAN
Internet

HMI570

4-Remote-connection.vsd

Fig. 4.3 Remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet

In the example above, the devices with address 100, 101, 120 and 121
in Substation A can be connected from the HMI570 LAN via the LAN
Interface in the NSD570 A1 rack. The devices with address 100, 120
in Substation B can be connected from the HMI570 LAN via the LAN

4-6 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Interface in the NSD570 F1 rack. The LAN Interfaces and the


subsequent NSD570 devices can be distinguished by their IP address.
However it is recommended to use unique NSD570 Device Addresses
in a network (not as in the example above).

Caution Encrypted SSL connections are strongly


recommended for communication channels that are
not secure (e.g. Internet).
Additionally, remote connection over Internet
requires appropriate security measures
(see Section 4.6.2).
Never connect a NSD570 LAN Interface directly to
the Internet!

Note: This connection over LAN / WAN / Internet needs a


LAN Interface G3LL plugged in the NSD570 module
rack and connected to the corresponding communi-
cation media.

4.6.2. Security considerations for connections over Internet


Recommended security measures:
Never connect a NSD570 LAN Interface directly to the Internet,
there must be at least a firewall in between.
Only use encrypted SSL connections to access the HMI570 LAN
running on the NSD570 LAN Interface G3LL.

User interface program April 2004 4-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.7. Multiple connection


Substation A
Station bus

TPE1 TPE2 LAN TPE1 TPE2


100 101 Interface 120 121

NSD570 A1 NSD570 A2

Device
address RS232
LAN / WAN
Internet
HMI570

HMI570

4-Multiple-connection.vsd

Fig. 4.4 Multiple connection from local and remote

Note: Do not connect a device simultaneously from local


and from remote site.

Substation A
Station bus

NSD570
TPE 1 TPE 2 TPE 1 TPE 2
100 101 120 121

NSD570 A1 NSD570 A2
RS232 RS232

HMI570 HMI570

4-Multiple-connection.vsd

Fig. 4.5 Multiple connection via the station bus

Note: Do not plug more than one PC/notebook


simultaneously to NSD570 racks that are
interconnected by a station bus.

4-8 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.8. Browser front end


The HMI570 uses a web browser as front end (client part). This means
that all interactions between the user and the HMI570 take place in a
web browser window. Several web browsers supporting HTTP/1.1 and
HTML 4 can be used as HMI570 front end. Subsequently listed are the
web browsers that are recommended to use:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
Mozilla 1.2 or higher (http://www.mozilla.org)
Netscape 7.0 or higher (http://www.netscape.org)

4.8.1. Browser Settings


In order to run the HMI570 properly, the following settings of the web
browser must be configured:
Cookies must be enabled
File download must be enabled
The HMI570 pages must not be cached
Bypass proxy server for local address and for the IP addresses
that are used for the HMI570 LAN Interface
JavaScript must be enabled

Detailed instructions will follow how you can set this for the most
common browsers.

User interface program April 2004 4-9


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.8.1.1. Internet Explorer 5.x


Enable Cookies
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Security
choose local intranet press button Custom Level Cookies:
Enable all cookies settings
Enable File Download
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Security
press button Custom Level Downloads File Download:
Enable
Avoid caching of HMI570 Pages
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options General
press button Settings (under Temporary Internet Files) Check
for newer versions of stored pages: Select: Automatically
Bypass proxy server for local address
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Connection
press button LAN Settings
If the checkbox Use a proxy server is activated, also activate the
checkbox Bypass proxy server for local address
Enable JavaScript
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Security
choose local intranet press button Custom Level Active
Scripting: enable

4.8.1.2. Internet Explorer 6


Enable Cookies
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Privacy Move
the Slider to the bottom (Accept all cookies)
The META refresh tag must also be enabled:
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Security
Enable Allow META REFRESH
Enable File Download
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Security
press button Custom Level Downloads File Download:
Enable

4-10 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Avoid caching of HMI570 Pages


Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option General
press button Settings (under Temporary Internet Files) Check
for newer versions of stored pages: Select: Automatically
Bypass proxy server for local address
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Connection
press button LAN Settings
If the checkbox Use a proxy server for your LAN is activated, also
activate the checkbox Bypass proxy server for local address
Enable JavaScript
Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Security
choose local intranet press button Custom Level Active
Scripting: enable

4.8.1.3. Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x / 7.x


Enable Cookies
Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Privacy & Security
Cookies Select: Enable all cookies
Avoid caching of HMI570 Pages
Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Cache
Select: Every time I view the page or when the page is out of
date
Bypass proxy server for local address
Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Proxies
If the checkbox Manual proxy configuration is activated, type
localhost in the field No Proxy for
Enable JavaScript
Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Scripts
& Windows Enable Script for Navigator

User interface program April 2004 4-11


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.8.1.4. Additional browser settings for the HMI570 LAN


There are additional browser settings to observe when using the
HMI570 LAN
Bypass proxy server for the IP addresses that are used for HMI570
LAN Interfaces

Internet Explorer 5.x and 6


Bypass proxy server for the IP addresses that are used for HMI570
LAN Interfaces

Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Connection


press button LAN Settings
If the checkbox Use a proxy server for your LAN is activated,
press the button Advanced.
The window Proxy Settings opens.
Enter the proxy IP address and port in the upper part of the window
(inside the frame Servers).
In lower part (inside the frame Exceptions) enter the IP addresses
that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces.

Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x / 7.x


Bypass proxy server for the IP addresses that are used for HMI570
LAN Interfaces
Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Proxies
If the checkbox Manual proxy configuration is activated, enter the
IP addresses that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces in the field
No Proxy for.

4-12 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.9. Starting the program

4.9.1. HMI570 PC
On the taskbar Start Programs HMI570-Shortcut Folder start
HMI570 starts the HMI570. The server will be started and also a
browser (Internet Explorer).
If you would like to use another browser than Internet Explorer or the
Internet Explorer does not start properly, restart the browser and type
in the URL:
http://localhost:10570/hmi570/index.jsp

Note: It is not possible to run more than one HMI570


application parallel on the same PC / notebook.
Nevertheless it would be possible to open another
browser window, type in the above URL and connect
a different NSD570 (for the time being this is
applicable and verified for Internet Explorer only).

4.9.2. HMI570 LAN


Start a web browser (Internet Explorer, Mozilla, Netscape) and type in
the following URL:
http://<IP_LAN_Interface>/hmi570/index.jsp
To access the LAN Interface over an encrypted SSL connection, use
the subsequent URL:
https://<IP_LAN_Interface>/hmi570/index.jsp
where <IP_LAN_Interface> is the IP address of the LAN Interface that
shall be connected (e.g. http://172.20.162.54/hmi570/index.jsp).

Note: The usage of an SSL connection requires a NSD570


LAN interface that is SSL enabled.
Encrypted SSL connections are strongly
recommended for communication channels that are
not secure (e.g. Internet).

User interface program April 2004 4-13


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10. Operation

4.10.1. Introduction
This section outlines the operation of the HMI570. It describes the
different menus and functions, how they can be executed and
particularities to be regarded when using the HMI570.
It is recommended to read this chapter thoroughly before beginning to
work with the HMI570.

4.10.2. Basic operation principles


Due to the nature of the HMI570 as client / server software, there are
some operation principles that may be different to other software tools:
Do not use the buttons from the toolbars of the browser (in parti-
cular do not use "Back", "Forward", "Stop", "Refresh" or Reload).
A few functions need somewhat longer to execute. This execution
time depends on the speed of the PC/notebook. The progress bar
at the bottom right side of the browser shows the progress of the
executed function. Do not use the "Stop" button from the browser
toolbar because this will not stop the execution. Do not start
another function by clicking a menu item before the previous
function has finished.
Do not edit manually the URL (web address).
Do not close the browser window manually to exit the HMI570.
Instead click on Exit HMI570 on the left side of the window.

4.10.3. Design
The HMI570 window is divided into three parts. At the top there is a
header with the logos and the green Status Box. At the left side there
are the menu items.
The display sector on the right hand side of the menu shows the
information and input fields of the currently executed function, e.g.
status, alarm, configuration info.

Status Box
The green box in the top right corner is the Status Box. It shows the
name of the user that is logged in, the permissions the user has, the
name of the configuration that is loaded, the name and address of the
device that is connected and what kind of interface is used (analog or
digital).

4-14 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.4. Login / Logoff


Before starting to work with the HMI570, logging in with username and
password is required.
Click on "Log In" in the menu bar and type in username and
password. To confirm, click on the "Log In" button or press "Enter".

Note: Username and password are case sensitive.

There are three predefined users:


User: Password: Permissions:
Administrator welcome admin, modify, view
Service welcome view, modify
Operator welcome view

Note: For security reasons the passwords should be


changed immediately after the installation of the
HMI570.

After logging in, the username and the permissions are indicated in the
green Status Box on the top.
It is possible to add and delete users and to change the passwords
and permissions. This is described in Section 4.10.5. User
Administration and Permissions.
To log off, just click on Log Off in the menu bar. It is recommended
to disconnect the device first, before logging off.

4.10.5. User Administration and Permissions


In this menu item, users can be added or deleted, permissions and
passwords can be changed.
Log in as a user with "admin" permission, e.g. Administrator.
Click on User Administration.

Add new User


Type the name of a new user into the text field and click on the "Add
new user" button. Set the permissions of the new user and press the
"Change" button to confirm. To add a password, choose "Edit user" for
the wanted user, type in the new password and confirm with "Set".

User interface program April 2004 4-15


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Delete User
Click on "Edit user" button of the user to be deleted. Press "Delete
User" to delete the user or "Cancel" to skip.

Permissions
View: a user with view permission can monitor an NSD570 but he/she
can neither disturb a link nor clear any data stored on the NSD570. For
details see the table below.
Modify: a user with modify permission can monitor the NSD570 and
can make changes to the configuration of a device. Some functions
that could disturb or disable a running NSD570 can also be executed.
For details see the table below:

Action View Modify


Permission Permission

Load/save configuration from/to disk X X


Load/save event recorder from/to disk X X
Connect and disconnect device X X
Upload status, alarm and trip counter from X X
device
Upload configuration and event recorder X X
from device
Discard configuration in HMI X X
Execute manual loop test X X
Reset device X
Reset trip counter X
Set time and date X
Firmware download X
Change baud rate for device X
communication
Clear event recorder of device X
Download configuration to device X
Execute commissioning functions X

Table 4.2 Permissions View and Modify

4-16 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Admin: admin permission allows the user to access the User


Administration menu and make changes to the user settings, as
described above.
The permissions are also displayed in the green Status Box, when a
user is logged in.

4.10.6. Change password


A user without admin permission can only change his/her own pass-
word.
Log in as a user without "admin" permission, e.g. Operator.
Click on User Administration.
The logged in user is prompted to type in a new password. The
"update" button sets the new password.

4.10.7. Connect / Disconnect Device


For details about different connections see Section 4.5.
Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570.

Local Connection:
The HMI570 PC/notebook is physically and logically connected to the
local NSD570.

Remote Connection over Embedded Operation Channel (EOC):


The HMI570 PC/notebook is physically connected to the local
NSD570. The logical connection is made to the remote peer device of
the link.

Note: This remote connection is only possible if both


devices (the local and the remote) have the EOC
switched on.

Note: A remote connection over EOC has the drawback of a


slow communication between the HMI570 and the
remote device. The respond time of the HMI570 may
increase drastically (especially with an analog link).
Please be patient and do not press any button from
the toolbars of the browser.

User interface program April 2004 4-17


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.7.1. Connect Device


To connect a device, click on Connect Device and then type in the
device address. Choose between local or remote over EOC.
Please note: to connect remotely, type the address of the local device
and check the remote over EOC box.
If the device address is unknown use 241 for the device plugged in
TPE 1 respectively 246 for TPE 2. These addresses are the default
addresses of the rack and cannot be used as device addresses.
To connect a device with the default address, the two buttons TPE 1
and TPE 2 below Connect with Local Default Address can be used.

Note: If a device shall be connected with the default


address, the station bus of this rack must be
disconnected (because the devices TPE 1 or TPE 2
of all other racks share the same default address).

The device address range is from 1 to 240.


If the connection is successful, information of the device will be
displayed, an example is shown next:
Device connected
Analog line interface
Device address 101 local
DSP firmware version 1.05
Controller firmware version 1.03
Configuration version 1.00
The green Status Box displays the name and address of the
connected device and what kind of interface is in use (digital, analog).
A boot failure of the device is indicated by the red Fail LED on the
frontplate whereas all other LEDs are off. In this case it is possible to
connect the device with address 255. It is recommended to disconnect
the station bus and plug off one line interface in the rack first, before
connecting with 255 to the other line interface. After a successful
connection to the device with address 255, execute a firmware
download, see Section 4.10.11.7. Firmware Download.

4-18 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.7.2. Error messages and troubleshooting

Error! The device is already connected by another user/


application
Only one connection to a device can be established at the same time.
If there already is a connection to the device it must be disrupted
before a new connection can be established. If a session is aborted
(the browser window was closed for example) with a device connected
to, this device cannot be reconnected before the aborted session is
timed out (this will take a maximum of 60 minutes). The only possible
faster solution is to stop and restart the HMI570.

Note: Stop and restart of the HMI570 LAN is not possible


(remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet).
See Section 4.10.14.2 LAN Interface what to do in
this case (Reset communication).

Error! Device communication, timeout


The device could not be reached. Several reasons are possible:
1. The HMI570 PC / notebook is not or not correctly connected to the
NSD570
check the cabling, try a shorter cable according to Section 4.5
2. The device address is wrong
verify the device address or try it with the default device address
3. The NSD570 is not running
verify that the desired device is running
4. The parameters for the Device Communication of the HMI570 and
the NSD570 do not correspond
try to connect the NSD570 with another baud rate
5. The station bus is not correctly wired
check the cabling of the station bus

Error ! Device communication is busy ! Please try it later again


Another user is connected to a device and occupies the
communication channel.

Note: If it is not possible to connect the device after some


retries, stop and restart the HMI570 PC.
Stop and restart of the HMI570 LAN is not possible
(remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet).
See Section 4.10.14.2 LAN Interface what to do in
this case (Reset communication).

User interface program April 2004 4-19


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

COM port is not available or owned by another application


The COM (RS-232) port cannot be used by the HMI570. Two reasons
are possible.
1. The HMI570 PC / notebook does not support the desired COM port
(RS-232)
check the COM ports of the PC / notebook and the HMI570
settings
2. Another application uses the COM (RS-232) port
stop the application that uses the COM port

Error! This configuration version is not supported


The firmware version of the device is not compatible with the HMI570.
update the HMI570 to the latest version.

The menu item Connect Device cannot be selected


First make sure that you are logged in (see 4.10.4 Login / Logoff).
If you are logged in and Connect Device is still not selectable, it is
possible that another user has started the Alarm Polling (see Section
4.10.13 Alarm Polling). This can happen only when using the HMI570
LAN.

The browser shows the error


"Connection Timed Out", response (504)

This can happen when the user tries to connect a device remotely over
the EOC with the HMI570 LAN.
In case of the NSD570 Analog it may take a long time due to the low
transmission rate of the EOC.
When the connection between the NSD570 LAN Interface (where the
HMI570 LAN runs) and the browser goes over a proxy server, this
timeout error comes from the proxy. To avoid the error, the browser
must be configured to bypass the proxy for the NSD570 LAN Interface,
see 4.8.1.4 Additional browser settings for the HMI570 LAN.

4.10.7.3. Disconnect Device


To disconnect the device, click on Disconnect Device in the menu
bar.

Note: It is strongly recommended to disconnect a device as


soon as there are no more intentions to interact with it
any longer.

4-20 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.8. Configuration

4.10.8.1. Load From Disk


If Load From Disk is not accessible, the current configuration has to
be discarded first, see Section 4.10.8.5. Discard Configuration.

Load Default Configuration


Loading a default configuration is a good start for the configuration of a
NSD570 device. There are four default configurations:

Default_TPE1_Analog.xml Analog Line Interface TPE 1


plugged at the left side of the rack (slot N28)
Default_TPE2_Analog.xml Analog Line Interface TPE 2
plugged at the right side of the rack (slot N58)
Default_TPE1_Digital.xml Digital Line Interface TPE 1
plugged at the left side of the rack (slot N28)
Default_TPE2_Digital.xml Digital Line Interface TPE 2
plugged at the right side of the rack (slot N58)

Click on the according load button to load a default configuration.

Load Configuration from local disk


An earlier saved configuration can be loaded from the local disk.
Click on Load Configuration and then the Browse button to select
the file on your local disk, press the load button afterwards.

4.10.8.2. View Configuration


Choose this menu item to view the entire configuration of the NSD570
on one browser page. This gives an overview of all the settings and is
especially intended for printing out the configuration.

4.10.8.3. Edit Configuration


If a configuration is loaded (either from disk or uploaded from a device)
Edit Configuration allows viewing and editing the settings.
The Edit Configuration submenus are further described below. The
first three submenus (Device Information, Hardware Versions and
Firmware Versions) are not editable.
To edit a configuration parameter, choose the submenu, click on the
edit button and type in the desired values or choose them from a
dropdown list. If the changes are to be skipped, click on the cancel
button. Click on the update button to confirm.

User interface program April 2004 4-21


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Note: Clicking the update button confirms only a change of


the parameters stored inside the HMI570, it has no
influence to a connected device.

Device Information
Contains the type of the interface (analog, digital), the position where it
is plugged in, the serial number and the counter of the firmware and
configuration downloads.

Hardware Versions
Displays the hardware versions of the plugged modules. The power
supply units have no version coding.

Firmware Versions
Displays the firmware version of the Micro Controller and the Digital
Signal Processor (DSP).

Device Identification
Contains the version of the configuration, the configuration type
(analog, digital), the name of the station, the HE number and the
device address.

Common Settings
In this menu item the settings for the Extra Delay and Pulse Duration
for Unblocking and for the Pickup Time and Hold Time for Link Failure
can be edited, the Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) for remote
connection can be enabled and the settings for GPS Synchronization
can be configured.

Analog Interface (only shown for analog configuration types)


Defines the Line Type, the Rx and Tx Bandwidth, the Center
Frequencies and the Analog Operating Mode. Power Boost, Un-
blocking Threshold, Rx and Tx Level and Alarm Threshold can also be
changed.

Digital Interface (only shown for digital configuration types)


There are seven different types of digital and optical interfaces:
1. G703 64kbps codirectional
2. RS-530
3. E1 2048kbps
4. T1 1544kbps
5. Optical Direct Fiber
6. Optical FOX/OTERM
7. Optical IEEE C37.94

4-22 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Every interface type allows the configuration of the following


parameters:
Digital Address Check (on/off),
Local Digital Address,
Remote Digital Address,
Bit Error Rate (BER) Alarm Threshold.
Additional parameters per interface may be changed (type specific).

Command Settings
Contains the settings for every command. If the application is set to
off, the corresponding command cannot be used.
If Tx Trip Duration Monitoring is enabled, the Max. Tx Trip Duration
can be given in seconds. Tx Input Delay and Rx Prolongation is given
in milliseconds.

Relay Interface
Displays the settings for the relay interfaces. If the interfaces are used,
commands can individually be mapped to the inputs and outputs of the
relay interfaces.

Alarm Settings
The Pickup Time and Hold Time can be set.
User Alarms 1...3 can be configured to combine some different alarms
into a user alarm.

Jumper Settings
Displays the jumper settings for the Relay Interfaces and the Analog
Interface.

Note: These parameters have no influence on the device


and must be set manually for documentation purpose.

Rack Assembly
Displays the type of the plugged components and boards.

Note: These parameters have no influence on the device


and must be set manually for documentation purpose.

User interface program April 2004 4-23


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.8.4. Save To Disk


The configuration can be saved to disk.
Choose Save To Disk in the menu. Click with the left mouse button on
the link and choose "Save this file to disk" and select the destination
folder.
It is recommended to save configurations with the extension *.xml.

4.10.8.5. Discard Configuration


Discards the current configuration of the HMI570. Has neither
influence on the connected device nor on a saved configuration.
After discarding a configuration it is possible to upload a configuration
or load one from the local disk.

4.10.8.6. Download To Device


Downloads the configuration to the device. It is recommended to save
a configuration to disk (see Section 4.10.8.4. Save To Disk) before
downloading to the device.
To activate the downloaded configuration, reset the device after the
download. The link gets disturbed during reset! A wrongly configured
device can cause a malfunction of the teleprotection link!

Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation


the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of
the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes
the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked
for approx. 10 seconds.
During this time no commands can be transmitted.

4.10.8.7. Upload From Device


Uploads a configuration from the device.
If Upload From Device is not accessible, maybe there is no device
connected (see Section 4.10.7.1. Connect Device) or the previously
used configuration has not been discarded inside the HMI570 (see
Section 4.10.8.5. Discard Configuration).

4-24 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.9. Event Recorder


The event recorder is a feature of the NSD570 device. It logs
command, alarm and manipulation events in the non-volatile memory
of the NSD570. Every event is logged with a time stamp.
To ensure the correctness of the time stamps, check time and time of
the device, see Section 4.10.11.5. Get Time and Date.
The event recorder can store approximately 7500 event entries. If this
is exceeded, the oldest events will be overwritten.

4.10.9.1. Load From Disk


Loads events from the local disk. Click on the Browse button to
choose the file and press the load button.

4.10.9.2. View Events


Shows the events available at the HMI570 (previously loaded from
disk or uploaded from a device). It is also intended for printing the
events.

4.10.9.3. Save To Disk


Saves events available at the HMI570 to the local disk.
Choose Save To Disk in the menu bar. Click with the left mouse
button on the link and choose "Save this file to disk" and select the
destination folder.
It is recommended to save events with the ending *.xml.

4.10.9.4. Upload Events


If Upload Events is not accessible, maybe no device is connected
(Section 4.10.7.1 Connect Device).
It is possible to upload and view the latest (last saved) 50, 100, 200,
500, 1000, 2000, 5000 or all entries of the Event Recorder.

4.10.9.5. Clear Event Recorder


Clears the Event Recorder in the connected NSD570. After clicking
Clear Event Recorder, pressing the clear button confirms the
erasure of the Event Recorder. When the Event Recorder is cleared,
only one entry is shown in the list: Event Recorder cleared.

Note: Clear Event Recorder deletes all events recorded in


an NSD570 device. It is not possible to restore them
afterwards.

User interface program April 2004 4-25


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.9.6. Import events into a spreadsheet or word processing tool


There are two ways to import events into a third party tool (e.g.
Microsoft Excel):
1. The third party tool supports an XML file import
Start the tool and import the saved NSD570 event file (*.xml).
2. Copy and paste
Choose the menu Event Recorder, View Events and select the
entire list of events or a part of it. Right click the selected events
and choose "Copy". Change to the third party tool and insert the
copied events.

4.10.10. Status / Alarm


If Status / Alarm menu is not accessible, maybe no device is
connected (see Section 4.10.7.1 Connect Device).

4.10.10.1. Upload Status


Uploads the status information from the connected device. If the
Status Upload was successful, the following information is displayed:

Loop Test
If a loop test has passed then the transmission time of the loop test is
also indicated. Else Loop test did not pass! is shown without
transmission time.

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)


The results of the CRC memory checks are shown.
The information about the Loop Test and CRC are shown on both
analog and digital interface.
Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) (NSD570 Analog Interface only)
The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) in 4 kHz noise bandwidth is displayed
for an NSD570 Analog device.
Rx Level (NSD570 Analog Interface only)
Receive level in dBm.
Tx Level (NSD570 Analog Interface only)
Transmit Level in dBm.

Note: The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level
measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if
the EOC is switched off!

4-26 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Bit Error Rate (BER) (NSD570 Digital Interface only)


The Bit Error Rate (BER) is displayed as 16 sec. average and
262 minutes average.

4.10.10.2. Upload Alarm


Alarms are indicated by the red LED on the front panel of the NSD570.
To view the alarms, upload them from the device by clicking on
Upload Alarm.
If no alarms occurred, the message no pending alarms is displayed.

4.10.10.3. Trip Counter


The trip counters display the number of sent and received commands
and loop tests of the connected device. The number of unblocking
pulses is also shown. Each device has its own trip counter.

Upload Trip Counter


To upload and view the trip counters, click Upload Trip Counter.

Reset Trip Counter


Mark the checkbox of the command, loop test, unblocking counter(s)
you want to delete and press the Reset Trip Counter button. Check
All to delete all counters.

4.10.11. Maintenance
If Maintenance is not accessible, maybe no device is connected (see
Section 4.10.7.1 Connect Device).
The user must have modify permission to execute the maintenance
menu. Users having just view permission can only start a loop test. All
other menu entries are prohibited.

4.10.11.1. Manual Loop Test


Starts a loop test.
If the loop test passes, the transmission time is displayed. If the loop
test fails, an error message will appear and no transmission time is
shown. The loop test state and the transmission time can be viewed in
the status (see Section 4.10.10.1. Upload Status). A loop test can also
be started by pushing the "Loop Test" button on the frontside of the
NSD570.

User interface program April 2004 4-27


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.11.2. Reset Device


Resets the connected device. After downloading a firmware or a
configuration, you always have to reset the device. The link gets
disturbed when a reset is executed!

Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation


the "Reset Device" in the Maintenance menu of the
HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the
NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for
approx. 10 seconds.
During this time no commands can be transmitted.

4.10.11.3. Previous Configuration


When downloading a configuration, the device stores the previous
configuration to fall back on in case the downloaded configuration
does not work as expected.
Execute Previous Configuration to switch to this fall back configuration
and reset the device.

4.10.11.4. Set Time and Date


Adjusting the Real Time Clock (RTC) of the device with the
HMI570 PC, date and time are taken from the PC/Notebook
connected to the device.

Note: The time and date of the PC/notebook must be


correct to execute this function.

Adjusting the Real Time Clock (RTC) of the device with the
HMI570 LAN, date and time are taken from the NSD570 LAN
Interface.

Note: The time and date of LAN Interface must be correct to


execute this function, see 4.10.14.2 LAN Interface.

Set Time and Date executed with a connection to a remote device


over EOC will mirror the time of the local device to the remote device.
Therefore check first the time and date of the local device.

4.10.11.5. Get Time and Date


Shows the current time and date of the connected device. To adjust
time and date, see Section 4.10.11.4. Set Time and Date.

4-28 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.11.6. Device Communication


The baud rate of the RS-232 connection to the connected NSD570 is
changeable. There are three possible values: 57600, 19200 and 9600.
To keep the connection to the device working it is necessary to set the
baud rate of the HMI570 accordingly.
Choose HMI570 Options and then Device Communication. Set the
"RS-232 baud rate" to the same value as in Device Communication.
Click on update to accept or cancel to skip.

Note: 57600 baud is the default baud rate. To connect a


NSD570 with changed baud rate it is necessary to set
the baud rate of the HMI570 accordingly.

4.10.11.7. Firmware Download


To download a new firmware, click on Firmware Download. The link
gets disturbed while using this function!
After a successful firmware download, reset the device. This will
activate the new firmware. The Firmware version can be viewed by
clicking on Firmware Versions in the Configuration Menu after
uploading the configuration from the device.

Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation


the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of
the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes
the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked
for approx. 10 seconds.
During this time no commands can be transmitted.

Note Please read 1KHW000896 NSD570 Firmware


Download Description before executing a Firmware
Download.

User interface program April 2004 4-29


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.12. Commissioning
In the Commissioning menu you can put the device into test modes.
Depending on the connection type (remote, local) you can start a
Remote Test Mode respectively a Local Test Mode when your
connection is local. The user must have modify permission to start /
stop test modes.
To start a test mode press the Start Local / Start Remote Test Mode
button.
A yellow warning message appears in the header of the HMI570. This
indicates that the device is in a test mode.
To stop the test mode press the Stop Local / Stop Remote Test
Mode button. The warning will disappear when the Test Mode is
stopped. The link gets disturbed while using this function!

For details refer to Sections 3.5.12.4. and 3.5.12.5.

Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using


certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commis-
sioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote
test mode).
However, when a user is logged in with only "view
permission", it is not possible to disable the device.

4.10.13. Alarm Polling

Caution The Alarm Polling functionality is only possible with


a LAN Interface G3LL plugged into the NSD570
module rack and a connection to G3LL over LAN /
WAN / Internet.

The Alarm Polling functionality of the HMI570 polls NSD570 devices in


the same substation interconnected by the station bus for their alarms.
The devices to be polled must be configured in the Device list (see
Section 4.10.13.4 Configure Alarm Polling).
To work with the Alarm Polling the user has to be logged in.

Note It is not possible to connect any devices for any user


while Alarm Polling is running.

The Alarm Polling can only be started when no device is connected.

4-30 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Caution Only one Alarm Polling can be started for all users
at a time (see Section 4.10.13.13 Multiple users).

Substation A
Station bus

TPE1 TPE2
120 121

NSD570 A3

TPE1 TPE2
110 111

NSD570 A2

TPE1 TPE2 LAN LAN / WAN


100 101 Interface

NSD570 A1

Device
address

HMI570
LAN

4-Alarm Polling.vsd

Fig. 4.6 Alarm polling in an NSD570 network

In the above example, the LAN Interface in the rack NSD570 A1 can
poll all NSD570 devices that are interconnected by the station bus
(these are the devices with address 100, 101, 110, 111, 120 and 121).
The result of every Alarm Polling cycle is displayed in the
HMI570 LAN by the browser running on the PC/Notebook.

User interface program April 2004 4-31


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.13.1. Impact when the Alarm Polling is started

Log in, Log out It is possible to log in and out while the Alarm
Polling is running. But only logged in users can
work with the Alarm Polling.
User Administration Always possible.
Connect device Only possible when Alarm Polling is stopped.
Configuration It is possible to load from disk and save to disk
when Alarm Polling is started.
Event Recorder It is possible to load from disk and save to disk
when Alarm Polling is started.
Alarm Polling Returns to the graphical view or to the entry
screen, depending whether the Alarm Polling is
started or not.
HMI570 Options Do not change Device Communication
parameters during Alarm Polling !
Exit HMI570 Only possible when Alarm Polling is stopped.

The table below shows all the functions of the Alarm Polling and when
they are executable:

Started Stopped
Start Alarm Polling X
Stop Alarm Polling X
Configure Alarm Polling X
Graphical View X
View entire logfile X X
View latest 50 entries X X
Clear entire logfile X
Refresh page X
Stop refreshing X
Start Auto Pop-up X
Stop Auto Pop-up X

4-32 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.13.2. Start Alarm Polling


Starts the Alarm Polling for all users and shows the graphical view of
the devices (see Section 4.10.13.5 Graphical View). Please be patient,
as this can take a long time (especially when an analog device gives
no response) and all the devices in the list are polled once before the
view appears.

4.10.13.3. Stop Alarm Polling


The Alarm Polling stops for all users.

4.10.13.4. Configure Alarm Polling


Different settings of the Alarm Polling functionality can be configured
here.
The Device List Shows the configurable parameters and the device
list.
Entering devices in the Device List:
Type in the address of the device and mark the checkbox if you want
to poll its remote peer as well. Click the Add Device Button.

Note: The device address must be in the range of


1 239.

The remote polling is only effective when the connection over EOC is
enabled in the configuration.
Changing devices in the Device List:
Click on the Edit button next to the device and make your changes.
Click on the Change button.
Deleting devices from the Device List:
Click on the Edit button next to the device. Click on the Delete button.
There is no other way to restore an accidentally deleted device than to
add it anew.
Changing Polling Parameters:
Polling Cycle: Select the desired Polling Cycle time.
The polling waits at the end of each cycle until the specified time is
over (counted from the start of the cycle).

Note: If the polling of all devices takes longer than the


selected Polling Cycle, the polling continues
immediately with the first device.

User interface program April 2004 4-33


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Auto Pop-Up:
If the checkbox is marked, the graphical view pops up every time an
error occurs. This setting is the general setting for all users. Each user
can stop it individually, when this feature is switched on (see Section
4.10.13.12 Stop Auto Pop-Up).
Logfile:
The size is the maximum size of the logfile. If the logfile exceeds this
size, the oldest entry is deleted. When the new size is smaller than the
old one, the file is shortened.
To save the changes made to the parameters click on the update
button.
Exit configuration:
Exits the configuration and shows the entry screen of the Alarm
Polling.

4.10.13.5. Graphical View


Shows the alarm LED picture of the devices. When an alarm occurs, a
click on the picture shows the individual alarm message view.

No Alarm:

Alarms:

No Response:

Note: The red Receive LED means, that the connection


between the device and its peer is disturbed.

Note: The picture No Response is shown for the remote


device when it is not possible to upload its alarms.

4-34 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

4.10.13.6. View Entire Logfile


Shows the entire logfile on screen. When the Alarm Polling is started,
the page refreshes itself every 60 seconds. To stop the Refreshing,
click on Stop Refreshing. The page is not updated, although the logfile
is still being written. To refresh the page choose Refresh page. When
the Alarm Polling is stopped the whole logfile is shown and cannot be
refreshed.

4.10.13.7. View Latest 50 Entries


The 50 newest entries of the logfile are shown. The page refreshing
works like with the whole logfile. The difference is the amount of
entries and that the oldest of the 50 entries are not shown anymore
when newer entries are in the file.

4.10.13.8. Clear Entire Logfile


The whole logfile is cleared by clicking on the clear button. The entry
Logfile cleared by user: (name of the logged in user) is entered.

Caution It is not possible to undo the clearing. All data will


be lost after clearing.

4.10.13.9. Refresh Page


Refreshes the logfile views.

4.10.13.10. Stop Refreshing


The logfiles stop updating its views. The logfile is still being written.

4.10.13.11. Start Auto Pop-Up


When the Auto PopUp is switched on for all users, the clicking on
Start Auto Pop-Up causes the graphical view to pop up as active
window whenever it refreshes itself and any device has an alarm.

Note: The Auto Pop-Up functionality does only work with


Microsoft Internet Explorer

4.10.13.12. Stop Auto Pop-Up


To stop the graphical view from popping up, choose Stop Auto Pop up.
To switch this feature off for all the users, uncheck the corresponding
checkbox in the Alarm Polling Configuration.

User interface program April 2004 4-35


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

4.10.13.13. Multiple users


Because the status of the Alarm Polling affects all users, the
executable features depend also on what the other users are doing.
Starting and stopping the Alarm Polling does this for all users
Only one user at the time is allowed in the configuration.
No user can enter the configuration while the Alarm Polling is
started
No user can connect any device while the Alarm Polling is started
No user can start the Alarm Polling while a user is connected to a
device
No user can start the Alarm Polling while another user is in the
configuration. Only this user can start the Alarm Polling.
Messages are displayed when other users affect the status of the
Alarm Polling for all users.

4.10.14. HMI570 Options

4.10.14.1. Device Communication


These settings refer to the RS-232 connection.
Set the COM Port number for your serial connection to the NSD570,
the baud rate or turn on/off the handshake protocols. If you have
enabled RTS/CTS In, you also have to enable RTS/CTS Out and vice
versa.
Click on update to accept or cancel to skip.

Note: The HMI570 settings are stored and become effective


in all HMI570 sessions.

4.10.14.2. LAN Interface

Note: This menu is only available with the HMI570 LAN and
contains LAN Interface specific options.
The date and time of the LAN Interface is displayed here. This time
must be correct to set the date and time of a connected NSD570
Device (see 4.10.11.4 Set Time and Date).
Please refer to the Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL
(1KHW001289) on how to set time and date of the LAN Interface.

4-36 April 2004 User interface program


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The button Reset communication disconnects all devices, even the


devices that are connected by other users are disconnected.

Note: This function can cause unexpected malfunctions to


other users. Use this function just in case of a
communication error.

4.10.14.3. About
This menu shows information about the version of the HMI570. There
are also address, phone number, fax number and the email address
for contact displayed. A link allows visiting the ABB Utility
Communications website.

4.10.14.4. Exit HMI570


Click on the Exit button to end and exit the application.
The HMI570 PC will shutdown the server and closes the browser
window. If the browser shows a dialog Do you want to close this
window? click the Yes button.
The HMI570 LAN shows the dialog Please close the browser. Then
you can manually close the browser window.

Note: Do not close the browser window manually before


clicking the Exit button.

User interface program April 2004 4-37


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

5. Configuration and settings

5.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 5-3

5.2. Configuration ........................................................................... 5-4

5.3. Use of HMI570 files.................................................................. 5-4

5.4. Configuration with HMI570....................................................... 5-5


5.4.1. Configure device type .............................................................. 5-5
5.4.2. Configure device parameters................................................... 5-5

5.5. General configuration notes..................................................... 5-6


5.5.1. Status of the command outputs during a link failure ................ 5-6

5.6. Configuration notes for the NSD570 Analog ............................ 5-8


5.6.1. Analog Channel selection ........................................................ 5-8
5.6.2. Parallel operation of analog NSD570s ..................................... 5-9
5.6.3. 2-wire and 4-wire operation of NSD570 Analog..................... 5-11
5.6.4. Transmit level and power boosting for NSD570 Analog......... 5-12
5.6.5. Receive level for NSD570 Analog.......................................... 5-13
5.6.6. NSD570 Analog over PLC equipment ETL500 ...................... 5-14

5.7. Configuration notes for the digital NSD570 Digital ................. 5-16
5.7.1. Digital Channel selection ....................................................... 5-16
5.7.2. G.703 interface application notes .......................................... 5-16
5.7.3. RS-530 (RS-422/V.11) interface application notes ................ 5-18
5.7.3.1. Transmit and receive timing provided by the DCE................. 5-18
5.7.3.2. Transmit timing provided by the DCE .................................... 5-18
5.7.3.3. Transmit timing for the DCE provided by the G3LD ............... 5-19
5.7.3.4. Transmit and receive timing generated internally (G3LD)...... 5-20
5.7.4. E1/T1 Interface application notes .......................................... 5-21
5.7.4.1. E1 Interface ........................................................................... 5-21
5.7.4.2. T1 Interface............................................................................ 5-22
5.7.5. Optical interface application notes ......................................... 5-22
5.7.5.1. Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface ........ 5-22
5.7.5.2. Optical IEEE C37.94 Interface ............................................... 5-23

5.8. Configuration examples ......................................................... 5-24


5.8.1. Example of NSD570 Analog configuration............................. 5-24
5.8.2. Example of NSD570 Digital configuration .............................. 5-29

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.9. Performance Criteria.............................................................. 5-34


5.9.1. General .................................................................................. 5-34
5.9.2. Transmission time.................................................................. 5-35
5.9.2.1. Nominal transmission time..................................................... 5-36
5.9.2.2. Maximum Actual Transmission Time ..................................... 5-36
5.9.3. Security.................................................................................. 5-37
5.9.4. Security Measurements ......................................................... 5-37
5.9.5. Dependability ......................................................................... 5-38
5.9.6. Dependability Measurements ................................................ 5-38

5-2 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5. Configuration and settings

5.1. Introduction
The NSD570 system is configured by means of the user interface
program NSD570 Human Machine Interface (also called HMI570)
supplied with it. The user interface program runs on a PC connected to
the RS-232 interface of the NSD570 rack or connected via Ethernet to
the optional LAN interface G3LL.
The configuration of the NSD570 has to be done according to
document "Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570"
(1KHW000898-EN).
The two major steps of the procedure are: 1. Programming and
2. Testing. Each of these steps consists of a number of substeps with
associated instructions listed in the document. Each substep is
documented in a report to be filled in during the procedure. Templates
for these reports one for programming and one for testing - are
included in the document. These reports should be kept for reference
as long as the equipment is in use.
Programming is done with the equipment not powered. Few hardware
programming is made by inserting or removing jumpers. Software
settings are entered via the HMI570 menu "Configuration". Usually
these settings are saved to a file, which is downloaded into the
equipment later during testing of the system.

Note: The configuration download operation will only be


successful when the system components (including
the HMI570 program) are compatible. To verify this,
refer to document "Compatibility requirements for
NSD570" (1KHW000902-EN). In case of uncertainty,
use the newest available HMI570 version.

Testing is done with the equipment powered. Some of the test


procedures are supported by the HMI570, menu "Maintenance",
"Status / Alarm" and "Event Recorder".

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.2. Configuration
From a communications point of view the main parameters of
consequence are:
Analog channels bandwidth, center frequencies Tx/Rx, line
interface levels
Digital channels type, data rate and operating mode of the data
interface
security and dependability
For the protection the main parameters of consequence are:
transmission time
command prolongation (= trip extension)
status of the command outputs in the event of an alarm
arranging the command inputs to suit the battery voltage
The corresponding programming instructions can be found in the
document "Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570"
(1KHW000898-EN) which is available in the annex of this manual.
The configuration is complete if all links in the "Configuration" menu
are worked off from "Device Identification" down to "Rack Assembly"
and the editable items are set to the desired values.

5.3. Use of HMI570 files


Data entered into HMI570 as described in Section 5.4 can be saved to
file. The extension of such files is xml. The data can be loaded back
anytime into HMI570 from these files for modifications or for
downloading to an NSD570 terminal connected to HMI570.
To save the data to file, click on Configuration in the main menu, then
on Save To Disk.
To reload data from a previously stored file, click on Configuration in
the main menu, then on Load From Disk and finally on the Browse
button to choose the corresponding file from your file directory.
Maybe you have to click on Discard Configuration first before a new
configuration can be loaded from file.
To view or print the information recorded in a file after having opened
it, use the View Configuration link (full screen display of all settings)
or the various items in the Edit Configuration menu.

5-4 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.4. Configuration with HMI570


In this section it is explained, how to create a configuration with the
HMI570 for an NSD570 equipment. It is recommended to work through
the next sections in this document and the section A of the document
"Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570" (1KHW000898-EN)
step by step. After that, a configuration is created which should be
stored in a file. This is described in Section 5.3.

5.4.1. Configure device type


A maximum of two devices have to be configured in the same rack
(TPE 1 and TPE 2). They may be either NSD570 Analog or NSD570
Digital version. "Analog" and "Digital" represent the type of the line
interface in use (Analog Interface G3LA or Digital Interface G3LD).

There are four default configuration files available for each of these
possible device types (TPE 1 Analog, TPE 1 Digital, TPE 2 Analog,
TPE 2 Digital). Choose the one that fits the desired application by
clicking on the Load From Disk link in the Configuration menu and
click on the corresponding load button on the right side of the
Default .xml file list.

5.4.2. Configure device parameters


After a default configuration or a previously created xml-file has been
loaded, the device parameters can be altered in order to adapt them to
the protection scheme where the teleprotection equipment is used in.

The possible settings and/or the setting ranges of the parameters that
can be modified are listed in the document "Programming and Testing
Instructions NSD570" (1KHW000898-EN). Some additional informa-
tion, which may be helpful for deciding the appropriate setting, is given
in the following sections.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.5. General configuration notes

5.5.1. Status of the command outputs during a link failure


The response of the command outputs to a level or signal-to-noise
ratio alarm in the analog version or to a loss of Rx synchronization, the
detection of LOS/AIS, an excessive bit error rate or an address error in
the digital version can be set by means of the HMI570. The following
settings are possible:
a) do not change
The command outputs continue to correspond to the current status
of tripping signal processing, i.e. they do not respond at all to the
alarm.
b) guard state
The command outputs are set to their quiescent states (= no
tripping signal).
c) retain in state
The command outputs retain the statuses they had immediately
prior to the alarm detection.
d) set permissive and blocking to command state
The command outputs configured for direct tripping are set to
guard state and the command outputs configured for permissive
tripping or blocking are set to their tripped states.

These settings apply to all signals in the case of units equipped for
several commands.
Alternative a) is the default setting when the units are supplied from
the works. With this setting the NSD570 responds normally to changes
in the status of the input signals. This is permissible in spite of the
alarm condition, due to the high security of tripping signal evaluation.
Sometimes setting b) is preferred to setting a), for example, when
redundant sets of communications equipment are installed.
Setting c) is used when the status of the command outputs - that they
had in the last alarm free condition - shall be "frozen".
Setting d) is only used in seldom cases with overreaching or blocking
protection schemes having special logic and in certain instances for
blocking auto-reclosure relays.
The responses of the command outputs according to b) and d)
become effective after an internal alarm processing time (e.g. less
than 1 second for low level alarm) from the instant the alarm condition
arises and remain so throughout the alarm condition and for a further
processing time of the same quantity after it disappears. The pick-up

5-6 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

time and the hold time can be further delayed by 0 15 seconds. This
might be necessary if, for example, clamping of the command outputs
should be avoided in case of recurrent noise bursts on the power line,
produced by switching operations involving slow speed isolators. The
interference so generated is characterized by high amplitude and
relatively long duration of up to 8 seconds.

Note: Since the command outputs only respond after the


above mentioned pick-up time, "freezing" of the
outputs - setting c) - even in case of a continuous
command requires this delay to be set to zero. The
command prolongation times have to be set to a
value higher than the alarm detection time (i.e. > 1
second) to ensure a steady output signal.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.6. Configuration notes for the NSD570 Analog

5.6.1. Analog Channel selection


In case of the NSD570 Analog, channel selection means the choice of
transmission bandwidth and channel center frequency. Being able to
select the transmission bandwidth and to set the channel center
frequency in steps of 60 Hz permits the best use to be made of any
"frequency gaps" there may be.
The choice of bandwidth is mainly influenced by two factors:
desired command transmission time
the free bands available when a communications channel is used
for several purposes.
The bandwidth is usually based on the first criterion and can be
chosen with the aid of the table in Section 2 of the Technical Data
NSD570 (1KHW000892-EN); see annex of this manual). The
bandwidths given are overall values, which apply equally to NSD570
Analog version with one or with several commands.
A good compromise between bandwidth, transmission time, security
and dependability is provided by channels 480 Hz and 960 Hz wide,
which are suitable for most applications. Where shorter transmission
times are desired, wider channels may be selected without
encountering any difficulties and without diminishing the security
against false tripping signals.
60 Hz steps for selecting the channel center frequency enable the
ideal frequency to be chosen for the particular case.
In case of a band limited carrier channel of a multiplex equipment for
example, the NSD570 Analog center frequency should be close to the
center of the carrier channel, because the group delay is lowest there.
In the frequency multiplexing mode, i.e. when several NSD570 Analog
share a common communications channel, the center frequencies
must be chosen such that there is no overlapping of the frequencies of
neighboring NSD570 channels.
A gap between channel frequencies is not necessary, provided that
adjacent NSD570 channels have the same bandwidth and the overall
bandwidth does not exceed 3700 Hz (usable bandwidth is from 300 Hz
to 4000 Hz; examples of channel allocation can be seen in Fig. 3.19 in
Section 3.5.3.3). If the NSD570 channels have different bandwidths,
some restrictions have to be taken into account. Please refer to Table
5.1 in Section 5.6.2.
The instructions in Section 5.6.3 must be observed for 2-wire
operation.

5-8 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.6.2. Parallel operation of analog NSD570s


Several NSD570s may be operated in parallel in a frequency-division
multiplex mode on a four-wire connection. AF channels can thus be
used simultaneously in different systems for different purposes. Since
this reduces the bandwidth available to each NSD570, the
transmission times increase correspondingly.
Parallel operation does not require gaps between frequency bands if
they use the same bandwidth, i.e. the various channels can be placed
adjacent to each other.
Where NSD570 with different bandwidths are operated in parallel, the
following gaps between frequency bands have to be kept, i.e. the
various channels can not be placed adjacent to each other:

Bandwidth Device 1 *1
120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz
120 Hz 0 Hz
240 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz
Bandwidth Device 2

360 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz
480 Hz 120 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz
960 Hz 180 Hz 180 Hz 120 Hz 120 Hz 0 Hz
1200 Hz 240 Hz 240 Hz 180 Hz 180 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz
2
2400 Hz 480 Hz 420 Hz 420 Hz 360 Hz 300 Hz * 240 Hz
2
2800 Hz 600 Hz 600 Hz 540 Hz * 540 Hz

*1 The NSD570 channels with 2400 Hz and 2800 Hz bandwidth are not mentioned here because they can not
be combined with other 2400 Hz or 2800 Hz channels.

2
* Since the usable band for the NSD570 is from 300 to 4000 Hz, the resulting overall bandwidth of 3700 Hz
is exceeded with the required gap taken into account!

Table 5.1

Where several NSD570s with different bandwidths are operated in


parallel, it is advisable to select the transmit levels (signal powers)
proportional to the bandwidth; this results in identical signal-to-noise
ratios in the remote receivers. The relationship (rounded to 3 dB steps)
between the levels is given in the Table 5.2.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-9


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Bandwidth Signal power at a point of zero relative level


2800 Hz 0 dBm0
2400 Hz 0 dBm0
1200 Hz - 3 dBm0
960 Hz - 6 dBm0
480 Hz - 9 dBm0
360 Hz - 9 dBm0
240 Hz - 12 dBm0
120 Hz - 15 dBm0

Table 5.2

Attention must be paid to correct line terminations when operating


NSD570s in parallel (a maximum of three parallel devices is
recommended). Only one unit may be set to 600 Ohms impedance,
while the others must be set to high impedance. Alternatively, the lines
may be terminated with 600 Ohm resistors at the barrier transformers
and all NDS570s set to high impedance. This is the recommended
setting since the devices can be taken out of operation without
influencing the other devices.
The input impedance is programmed on the Analog Interface G3LA,
see "Programming and Testing Instructions" in the annex.
The summed voltage of the transmitters operating in parallel must not
exceed 3.5 Vpeak, corresponding to +10 dBm peak envelope power, to
avoid that the transmitters overload each other.
The summed voltage at the receivers operating in parallel has also to
be taken into account. Please refer to Section 5.6.5 Receive level for
NSD570 Analog.

Caution When two NSD570 - operated in parallel - are using


single tone commands, then the power boost ratio
must not exceed 6 dB. To allow a higher boost ratio
of up to 9 dB, a gap of 60 Hz has to be introduced
between the two adjacent frequency bands.

5-10 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.6.3. 2-wire and 4-wire operation of NSD570 Analog

A 4-wire operation is recommended.

Caution T-operation requires a 4-wire communication link.

For one unit per pair of cores, 2-wire operation is possible without a
hybrid and frequency gaps; however, the following must be observed:
Transmitter and receiver must use separate frequency bands, a
frequency gap between them is only necessary if the bandwidth is
different (please refer to Table 5.1 in Section 5.6.2.) or if the power
boost ratio exceeds 6 dB when single tone commands are used
(to allow a higher boost ratio of up to 9 dB, a gap of 60 Hz has to
be introduced between the two adjacent frequency bands).
The NSD570 receivers alarm pick-up level must be set to 12 dB
The Rx-level must be set 6dB above the measured receive guard
signal level, i.e. 6 dB higher than for 4-wire operation; the resulting
level margin before alarm release is then 6 dB.
Example: measured receive guard level is 12 dBm, the setting in
HMI570 must then be Rx Level [dBm] = 6
The communication link attenuation must be less than 12 dB.
In case of higher link attenuation in 2-wire operation, the transmit and
receive directions must be separated by a hybrid. The permissible link
attenuation then increases in proportion to the transhybrid loss by
some 15 dB. In spite of the use of a hybrid, the transmitter and
receiver are not allowed to use the same frequency band.

Note: Use Rx-AF Signal Output on G3LA (X100/3, X100/4)


for 2-wire operation.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-11


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.6.4. Transmit level and power boosting for NSD570 Analog


The transmitting level can be set in a wide range using the HMI570
(refer to the "Programming and Testing Instructions" in the annex of
this manual).
When the communications channel is a leased line, any national
regulations with respect to the transmitting levels of the guard signal
and the tripping signal must be observed.
In case of the NSD570 Analog, the power of the command signal can
be boosted in relation to the guard signal. This is generally what is
meant by power boosting. The ratio between the boosted command
signal and the guard signal is referred to as boost ratio BR and
usually expressed in decibels (dB). Programming is done by means of
the HMI570 and enables the power boost to be set from 0 to 9 dB in
steps of 1 dB. The maximum output level with power boosting,
however, must not exceed +11 dBm!
Boosting the power of the tripping signal is used primarily in two cases:
When using leased lines for which regulations permit only a low-
power guard signal, but a higher tripping signal level of short
duration.
In a multi-purpose system, where the teleprotection equipment is
sharing an AF channel in parallel with speech or data transmission
in a frequency multiplexing mode. This is typical with PLC (power
line carrier). In this case, any speech and any modem signal
superimposed on it are switched off whilst tripping signals are being
transmitted so that the total PLC transmitter power is available to
the NSD570. This ensures the best possible signal-to-noise ratio at
the NSD570 receiver. The maximum boost ratio which can be
achieved depends on which other PLC signals can be switched off
during the transmission of a tripping signal.

The suppression of these other signals is initiated by the power boost


criterion output ("BOOST") on the NSD570, which is a potential-free
and polarity-free solid state output on the module G3LA, non-
conducting in the quiescent state and conducting during a tripping
signal.

5-12 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Caution If the transmit level is measured by means of the


HMI570 in guard state, the level will vary approx.
2.5 dB because the guard signal is modulated to
transmit data via the EOC. The SNR-value
displayed by the HMI570 will vary as well,
depending on the packets transmitted via the EOC.
The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level
measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if
the EOC is switched off!

5.6.5. Receive level for NSD570 Analog


In case of 4-wire operation and NSD570 in parallel or in case of
NSD570 in 2-wire operation the maximum Rx line level depends on
the Rx Level settings made by means of the HMI570.
The following table shows the maximum Rx line level against the Rx
Level setting:

Rx Level [dBm] Line Level [Vp] Rx Level [dBm] Line Level [Vp]
0 3.32
-1 2.96 -16 0.53
-2 2.64 -17 0.47
-3 2.35 -18 0.42
-4 2.09 -19 0.37
-5 1.87 -20 0.33
-6 1.66 -21 0.30
-7 1.48 -22 0.26
-8 1.32 -23 0.23
-9 1.18 -24 0.21
-10 1.05 -25 0.19
-11 0.94 -26 0.17
-12 0.83 -27 0.15
-13 0.74 -28 0.13
-14 0.66 -29 0.12
-15 0.59 -30 0.10

Table 5.3

Note: The NSD570 Analog does not support the measuring


of the internal Rx level, the table above therefore
represents the levels calculated for the line side.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-13


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.6.6. NSD570 Analog over PLC equipment ETL500


The standard connection of the NSD570 to the PLC is via 4-wire port
AF4 on the AF interface board type O4LE of ETL500. The level at the
port has to be set to 10 dBm. This port allows boosting of the ETL500
whenever an NSD570 command is transmitted.
The NSD570 boost control output must be connected to the external
boost input of the ETL500 on the O4LE board. The voltage supply for
the signal is provided by ETL500/O4LE.

Note: When using the NSD570 via PLC equipment type


ETL500, boosting should be disabled on the NSD570,
but enabled on the PLC equipment (since the power
boost ratio depends on which facilities are using the
PLC channel).

The single channel ETL500 allows boosting of at most one external


teleprotection equipment. The ETL500 sets the boost ratio for the
NSD570 signal as high as possible, but not higher than 8 dB.
The dual channel ETL500 allows independent boosting of up to two
external teleprotection equipment, one in channel 1 and the other in
channel 2. Boosting of the NSD570 in channel 1 has priority over
boosting of the NSD570 in channel 2.
If the ETL500 is operated with the internal teleprotection equipment
NSD550, boosting of NSD550 has priority over boosting of NSD570.
If two or more NSD570 need to be operated over one channel of
ETL500, the NSD570 4-wire ports have to be connected in parallel to
port AF4 on the O4LE board of ETL500. To maintain the impedance of
600 Ohm at the port, one of the NSD570 must be set to 600 Ohm
impedance, the others to high impedance. Alternatively, the lines may
be terminated with 600 Ohm resistors at the barrier transformers and
all NDS570s set to high impedance. This is the recommended setting
since the devices can be taken out of operation without influencing the
other devices. Similarly, the boost control outputs of all NSD570 also
have to be connected in parallel to the external boost input of the
O4LE board. Care has to be taken that the input and output levels at
the O4LE port AF4 are correctly set. With each of the NSD570 set to
an output level of 10 dBm, the input level to the ETL500 at O4LE port
AF4 must be set to:
- 10 dBm in case of a single NSD570,
- 4 dBm in case of two NSD570 connected in parallel,
- 0.5 dBm in case of three NSD570 connected in parallel.

5-14 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The O4LE output port AF4 of ETL500 will usually carry more signals
than just the NSD570 signals due to other services such as speech
and data transmitted by the ETL500. To prevent the NSD570 inputs
connected to the AF4 port to be overdriven by these additional signals,
the output filter of the AF4 port on the O4LE board of ETL500 should
be enabled. The bandwidth of the filter must be set such that the
frequency bands occupied by the NSD570 signals are within the
passband of the filter.
Refer to Figure 3-10 of the ETL500 Instruction Manual 1KHL015946-
EN for correct settings of NSD570 center frequency and bandwidth.

Note: The NSD570 may be placed above speech. The


maximum programmable bandwidth for the NSD570
Analog is then 1200 Hz (for that purpose speech must
be limited to 2400 Hz, to 2200 Hz or to 2000 Hz if an
NSD550 with ETL-pilot as guard signal is used, or to
2000 Hz if an NSD550 with its own guard signal is
used).

All NSD570 operating modes may be selected when using the


NSD570 with the PLC equipment. If only two commands for
permissive tripping are required, single tone commands are
recommended (since they are virtually independent from the gain
distortion of the communications channel and because they have a
higher dependability, as the signal-to-noise ratio with a single tone
command is better than with a dual tone command).
With dual tone commands selected for the use with the PLC
equipment, the gain distortion of the communications channel must not
vary more than 3 dB within the NSD570 bandwidth. This can be
ensured by proper equalization of the PLC channel, using the ETL500
built in equalizer. The additional delay caused by the equalization filter
has to be taken into account.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-15


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.7. Configuration notes for the digital NSD570 Digital

5.7.1. Digital Channel selection

In the case of the NSD570 Digital, channel selection means the choice
of the line interface on the digital interface type G3LD. It may be either
one of the two on-board interfaces (G.703 codirectional or RS530 /
RS-422/V.11) or one of the possible piggyback module interfaces
(E1/T1 or optical). For each interface type a subset of settings is
available (to configure the operating mode or data rate for example).

The main application of the digital interfaces is either a point-to-point


connection of two distant NSD570 equipment or the interfacing of
NSD570 to a PDH multiplexer or a data circuit-terminating equipment
(DCE).

5.7.2. G.703 interface application notes

A codirectional interface only requires two pairs of conductors (instead


of the four needed by a contra-directional scheme). Each pair is used
to transfer a combined data and clock signal between the two sets of
terminal equipment. The combined signal comprises a 64 kbps
information signal, a 64 kHz bit clock and the 8 kHz octet clock. The
symbol rate of the combined clock/data signal is 256 kBaud.

Transmitter

comb. data / clock signal Tx

Receiver

comb. data / clock signal Rx

G.703 Interface on G3LD PCM Multiplexer

5-G703-Appl-notes.vsd

Fig. 5.1 G.703 interface application

The signals are coupled into and out of the equipment by isolating
transformers such that only the voltage difference between the cores is
processed. Thus the influence of common mode interference on signal
evaluation depends on the degree of longitudinal balance.
It may be configured whether the transmitted clock/data signal is
synchronized on the internal 64 kHz timing signal only or if the timing
information which is reproduced from the received clock/data signal
shall be used to synchronize the transmitted clock/data signal. When
interfacing NSD570 with a PCM multiplexer, the recommended setting
for the G.703 Tx Clock synchronization is "Rx", considering the
multiplexer as clock master.

5-16 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

If two NSD570 with G.703 interfaces are operated in a


Note:
point-to-point configuration, only one of them must be
configured for synchronizing the transmitter clock on
the received clock/data signal. With this setting a clock
loop can be avoided.

Note: Normally the data circuit-terminating equipment


(DCE) with a G.703 codirectional interface provides
the octet timing as described in the ITU-T standard.
However, some modems and converters may not
follow these rules and introduce a bit-shift between
octet boundaries. The NSD570 Digital will not work in
this case. Please contact your local representative in
order to get some workaround information.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-17


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.7.3. RS-530 (RS-422/V.11) interface application notes


The electrical characteristics of this interface conform to the standard
TIA/EIA-422 (RS-422), which is electrically identical to the standards
V.11 (ITU-T), X.27 (ITU-T) and Part 3 of DIN 66259. The data transfer
rate is either 64 kbps or 56 kbps.
The RS-530 (RS-422/V.11) interface on G3LD can be programmed for
the modes of operation described below. The signal designations (SD,
RD, ST, RT, TT) were taken from the TIA/EIA-449 recommendation.

5.7.3.1. Transmit and receive timing provided by the DCE


In this case, the outgoing data signal (SD) is synchronized to the
transmit timing signal (ST) and the incoming data signal (RD) is
sampled at the rate of the receive timing signal (RT).

Transmitter

SD (Send Data)

ST (Send Timing)

Receiver

RD (Receive Data)

RT (Receive Timing)
Data Circuit-Terminating
Equipment (DCE)
RS-530 Interface G3LD

5-RS530-Appl-notes.vsd

Fig. 5.2 RS-530 interface application with Tx and Rx timing by DCE

The basic configuration for the above application is:


RS530 Rx Clock set to "ext. RT"
RS530 Tx Clock set to "ext. ST"
RS530 Rx Clock Sync set to "none"
RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT set to "none"
RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to "off"

5.7.3.2. Transmit timing provided by the DCE


The interface only requires the transmit timing signal (ST) from the
DCE. The outgoing data (SD) is synchronized to this clock. The
internal clock used to sample the incoming signal is synchronized by
the data signal (RD). Provision is also made for synchronizing the
sampling of the incoming data to the transmit timing signal (ST). This
requires that the ST signal is connected externally in parallel also
to the RT input and the interface must be configured accordingly.

5-18 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Transmitter

SD (Send Data)

ST (Send Timing)

Receiver

RD (Receive Data)

Data Circuit-Terminating
RS-530 Interface on G3LD Equipment (DCE)

5-RS530-Appl_notes.vsd

Fig. 5.3 RS-530 interface application with Tx timing by DCE

The basic configuration for the above application is:


RS530 Rx Clock set to "internal"
RS530 Tx Clock set to "ext. ST"
RS530 Rx Clock Sync set to "RD"
RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT set to "none"
RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to "off"

5.7.3.3. Transmit timing for the DCE provided by the G3LD


In this operating mode, the G3LD generates its own transmit timing
signal (TT) and transmits it together with the data signal (SD) to the
DCE. The transmit timing signal (TT) can be either synchronized to the
incoming data signal (RD) (clock loop) or derived from the internal
quartz oscillator.

Transmitter

SD (Send Data)

TT (Terminal Timing)

Receiver

RD (Receive Data)

Data Circuit-Terminating
RS-530 Interface on G3LD Equipment (DCE)

5-RS530-Appl_notes.vsd

Fig. 5.4 RS-530 interface application with TT for DCE by G3LD

The basic configuration for the above application is:


RS530 Rx Clock set to "internal"
RS530 Tx Clock set to "internal"
RS530 Rx Clock Sync set to "RD"
RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT set to "RD" or "none"
RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to "on"

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-19


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.7.3.4. Transmit and receive timing generated internally (G3LD)


Data is transferred between the G3LD and the DCE without
transmitting a timing information. The receive timing signal is
generated internally in the G3LD and synchronized to the incoming
data (RD). The outgoing data signal (SD) can be transmitted in
synchronism with the incoming data or with the internal clock
frequency of G3LD.

Transmitter

SD (Send Data)

Receiver

RD (Receive Data)

Data Circuit-Terminating
RS-530 Interface on G3LD Equipment (DCE)

5-RS530-Appl_notes.vsd

Fig. 5.5 RS-530 interface application with Tx/Rx timing internally

The basic configuration for the above application is:


RS530 Rx Clock set to "internal"
RS530 Tx Clock set to "internal"
RS530 Rx Clock Sync set to "RD"
RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT set to "RD" or "none"
RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to "off"

Note: If two NSD570 with RS-530 interfaces are operated in a


point-to-point configuration, one of them has to be
configured as "Master" (the send data SD are
synchronized on the internal clock only, i.e. Rx Clock
Sync and Tx Clock Sync TT are both "none") and the
other as "Slave" (the send data are synchronized on the
timing information which is reproduced from the received
data signal, i.e. Rx Clock Sync and Tx Clock Sync TT
are both set to "RD"). With these settings a clock loop
can be avoided.
For the "Master" station, alternatively the terminal timing
(TT) signal provided by the remote station can be used
as an external clock reference (wired on the ST inputs).

5-20 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.7.4. E1/T1 Interface application notes

The E1/T1 interface allows to interconnect NSD570 with a PDH


multiplexer or even with an SDH/SONET add/drop multiplexer
featuring E1/T1 interfaces. Framing, signaling and line coding can be
configured according to prevalent standards.
For data transmission the NSD570 does not utilize the full payload of
the 2.048 Mbps frame (PCM30/31 for SDH access) or 1.544 Mbps
frame (PCM24 for SONET access).
Data are transmitted in the first timeslot (TS1) after the synchronization
pulse. Therefore, in a NSD570 link over a PDH system, only TS1 has
to be connected through the system. For both E1/T1, when using AMI
line coding, additionally TS3 has to be connected through the system.
With this coding, TS3 is used for loss of signal detection.

5.7.4.1. E1 Interface
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the E1 interface
and the communication equipment (e.g. a SDH multiplexer), the
receiver sensitivity can be programmed to short haul for a maximum
cable attenuation of 10 dB or to long haul for a maximum cable
attenuation of 43 dB. Maximum cable length: see Technical Data.
The E1 interface is configured to recover the clock for transmission
from the received signal, assuming the connected PDH multiplexer or
SDH add/drop multiplexer is the clock master.
An internal elastic buffer size can be configured individually for the
input and the output circuits. This buffer may help to compensate clock
deviations or clock wander between the internal and the external
timing. Compensation of jitter and detection of slips is also possible by
means of a higher buffer size thus introducing a higher delay. A
compromise has to be found in actual tests with the used
communication equipment regarding high jitter capability versus low
additional delay.
The E1 coding (HDB3 or AMI) and frame format (double frame or
CRC4 multiframe) can be configured to comply with different
communication system interfaces.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-21


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.7.4.2. T1 Interface
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the T1 interface
and the communication equipment (e.g. a SONET multiplexer), the
receiver sensitivity can be programmed to short haul for a maximum
cable attenuation of 10 dB or to long haul for a maximum cable
attenuation of 36 dB. Maximum cable length: see Technical Data.
The T1 interface is configured to recover the clock for transmission
from the received signal, assuming the connected PDH multiplexer or
SONET add/drop multiplexer is the clock master.
An internal elastic buffer size can be configured individually for the
input and the output circuits. This buffer may help to compensate clock
deviations or clock wander between the internal and the external
timing. Compensation of jitter and detection of slips is also possible by
means of a higher buffer size thus introducing a higher delay. A
compromise has to be found in actual tests with the used
communication equipment regarding high jitter capability versus low
additional delay.
The T1 coding (B8ZS or AMI) and frame format (4 frames or extended
superframe) can be configured to comply with different communication
system interfaces.

5.7.5. Optical interface application notes


The optical interface permits the transmission of protection signals via
fiber optical cables at a data rate of 2.048 Mbps. The optical interface
OTERM/P2P can be programmed to operate with a direct fiber
connection and additionally with FOX-6+, FOX-20 and the OTERM
interface of the FOX515. The optical interface IEEE C37.94 can be
utilized with a multiplexer that complies with this standard for optical
fiber interfaces between teleprotection and multiplexer equipment.
The correct framing, signaling and line coding is automatically set after
choosing the interface type out of the HMI570 pull down menu.

5.7.5.1. Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface


This optical interface allows interconnecting NSD570 with a FOX515
multiplexer, using the optical 2 Mbps access card OTERM.
Further a point-to-point link with a distance of up to 50 km can be
realized connecting two optical interfaces directly.
For data transmission NSD570 utilizes a bit orientated FOX-6Plus
frame with MCMI coding where only channel 1 is used. Other channels
are at free disposal.

5-22 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

In a point-to-point application a byte orientated E1 (PCM31) frame is


used.
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the optical interface
and the communication equipment and its input saturation power, the
laser output power can be programmed for long haul (< -1 dBm) or
short haul (< -17 dBm, default) application.
The optical interface recovers the clock for transmission from the
received signal, assuming the connected FOX515 multiplexer is the
clock master.
A communication link over a FOX515 multiplexer enables the
operation between the optical interface on one side and all other
electrical interfaces of the NSD570, connected to the corresponding
data I/O-board of FOX515 on the other side.
There is no other manual configuration needed.

5.7.5.2. Optical IEEE C37.94 Interface


This optical interface allows interconnecting NSD570 with a dedicated
multiplexer interface according to IEEE C37.94.
For data transmission NSD570 utilizes the IEEE C37.94 frame with 16
bit header, 48 bit overhead and 8 bit data as described in the
corresponding standard. The coding scheme is NRZ.
The output power is < -11 dBm and not selectable.
The optical interface recovers the clock for transmission from the
received signal, assuming the connected multiplexer is clock master.
There is no manual configuration needed.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-23


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.8. Configuration examples

5.8.1. Example of NSD570 Analog configuration


(File name: Default_TPE1_Analog.xml)

Device Information

Line Interface Type analog


Line Interface Position 1
Serial Number
Firmware Download Counter 0
Configuration Download Counter 0

Hardware Versions

Interface Slot Module Piggyback


Power Supply Unit 1 (N01) Version 0
Power Supply Unit 2 (N09) Version 0
Common Interface (N22) Version 0
Line Interface TPE 1 (N28) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) Version 0 Version 0
Line Interface TPE 2 (N58) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84)
Version 0 Version 0
LAN Interface
Bus Plane Version 0

Firmware Versions

Microcontroller 0.00
Digital Signal Processor 0.00

5-24 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Device Identification

Configuration Version 1.00


Configuration Type analog
Station Name default config TPE 1
HE Number HE xxxxxx
Device Address 100

Common Settings

Device Mode Normal


Unblocking Extra Delay [ms] 10
Unblocking Pulse Duration [ms] 200
Command Outputs During Link Failure do not change
Link Failure Pickup Time [s] 10
Link Failure Hold Time [s] 0
GPS Sync off
Embedded Operation Channel ( EOC ) on
Cyclic Loop Test Interval 6h

Analog Interface

Line Type four wire


Rx Bandwidth [Hz] 480
Rx Center Frequency [Hz] 2400
Tx Bandwidth [Hz] 480
Tx Center Frequency [Hz] 2400
Analog Operating Mode 2 single tone commands
Power Boost [dB] 0
Unblocking Threshold [dBm0] -14
Tx Level [dBm] -6
Rx Level [dBm] -6
Tx Alarm Threshold [dB] -6
Rx Alarm Threshold [+/- dB] 6

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-25


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Command Settings

Tx Trip Duration Max Tx Trip Tx Input Rx Prolon-


Command Application
Monitoring Duration [s] Delay [ms] gation [ms]
A permissive off 5 0 10
B permissive off 5 0 10
C off off 5 0 0
D off off 5 0 0

Relay Interfaces

Interface 1 Interface 2 Interface 3 Interface 4


TPE 1
(N34) (N40) (N46) (N52)
Used on off off off
Input 1 Command A Command C Command A Command A
Input 2 Command B Command D Command B Command B
Output 1 Command A Command C Command A Command A
Output 2 Command B Command D Command B Command B
Relay Output 1 not used not used not used not used
Relay Output 2 not used not used not used not used

Interface 1 Interface 2 Interface 3 Interface 4


TPE 2
(N64) (N70) (N76) (N84)
Used off off off off
Input 1 Command A Command A Command A Command A
Input 2 Command B Command B Command B Command B
Output 1 Command A Command A Command A Command A
Output 2 Command B Command B Command B Command B
Relay Output 1 not used not used not used not used
Relay Output 2 not used not used not used not used

5-26 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Alarm Settings

Pickup Time [s] 15


Hold Time [s] 15

User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3


HW Alarm Local off off off
HW Warning Local off off off
Link Alarm Local off off off
Tx Alarm Local off off off
Rx Alarm Local off off off
Tx Signal Local off off off
Rx Signal Local off off off
SNR / BER Local off off off

HW Alarm Remote off off off


Link Alarm Remote off off off
Tx Alarm Remote off off off
Rx Alarm Remote off off off
Tx Signal Remote off off off
Rx Signal Remote off off off
SNR / BER Remote off off off

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-27


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Jumper Settings
Analog Interface
Jumper Settings Impedance

Rx Impedance 600 Ohm


Tx Impedance 600 Ohm

Relay Interfaces
Jumper Settings Nominal Battery Voltage

TPE 1 Input 1 Input 2


Relay Interface 1 (N34) 125 .. 250VDC 125 .. 250V DC
Relay Interface 2 (N40) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 3 (N46) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 (N52) not assembled not assembled

TPE 2 Input 1 Input 2


Relay Interface 1 (N64) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 2 (N70) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 3 (N76) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 (N84) not assembled not assembled

Rack Assembly

Slot Module Piggyback


Power Supply Unit 1 (N01) G3LH
Power Supply Unit 2 (N09) not assembled
Line Interface TPE 1 (N28) G3LA not assembled
Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) G3LR not assembled
Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) not assembled not assembled
Line Interface TPE 2 (N58) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interfaces 3 TPE 2 (N76) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84)
not assembled not assembled
LAN Interface

5-28 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.8.2. Example of NSD570 Digital configuration


(File name: Default_TPE1_Digital.xml)

Device Information

Line Interface Type digital


Line Interface Position 1
Serial Number
Firmware Download Counter 0
Configuration Download Counter 0

Hardware Versions

Interface Slot Module Piggyback


Power Supply Unit 1 (N01) Version 0
Power Supply Unit 2 (N09) Version 0
Common Interface (N22) Version 0
Line Interface TPE 1 (N28) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) Version 0 Version 0
Line Interface TPE 2 (N58) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) Version 0 Version 0
Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84)
Version 0 Version 0
LAN Interface
Bus Plane Version 0

Firmware Versions

Microcontroller 0.00
Digital Signal Processor 0.00

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-29


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Device Identification

Configuration Version 1.00


Configuration Type digital
Station Name default config TPE 1
HE Number HE xxxxxx
Device Address 200

Common Settings

Device Mode Normal


Unblocking Extra Delay [ms] 5
Unblocking Pulse Duration [ms] 200
Command Outputs During Link Failure do not change
Link Failure Pickup Time [s] 10
Link Failure Hold Time [s] 0
GPS Sync off
Embedded Operation Channel ( EOC ) on
Cyclic Loop Test Interval 6h

Digital Interface

Interface Type G703 64kbps codirectional


BER Alarm Threshold ( 1E... ) -6
Digital Address Check off
Local Digital Address 341
Remote Digital Address 682
G.703 Tx Clock Sync Rx

5-30 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Command Settings

Tx Trip Duration Max Tx Trip Tx Input Rx Prolon-


Command Application
Monitoring Duration [s] Delay [ms] gation [ms]
A permissive off 5 0 10
B permissive off 5 0 10
C off off 5 0 0
D off off 5 0 0
E off off 5 0 0
F off off 5 0 0
G off off 5 0 0
H off off 5 0 0

Relay Interfaces

Interface 1 Interface 2 Interface 3 Interface 4


TPE 1
(N34) (N40) (N46) (N52)
Used on off off off
Input 1 Command A Command C Command E Command G
Input 2 Command B Command D Command F Command H
Output 1 Command A Command C Command E Command G
Output 2 Command B Command D Command F Command H
Relay Output 1 not used not used not used not used
Relay Output 2 not used not used not used not used

Interface 1 Interface 2 Interface 3 Interface 4


TPE 2
(N64) (N70) (N76) (N84)
Used off off off off
Input 1 Command A Command C Command E Command G
Input 2 Command B Command D Command F Command H
Output 1 Command A Command C Command E Command G
Output 2 Command B Command D Command F Command H
Relay Output 1 not used not used not used not used
Relay Output 2 not used not used not used not used

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-31


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Alarm Settings

Pickup Time [s] 15


Hold Time [s] 15

User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3


HW Alarm Local off off off
HW Warning Local off off off
Link Alarm Local off off off
Tx Alarm Local off off off
Rx Alarm Local off off off
Tx Signal Local off off off
Rx Signal Local off off off
SNR / BER Local off off off

HW Alarm Remote off off off


Link Alarm Remote off off off
Tx Alarm Remote off off off
Rx Alarm Remote off off off
Tx Signal Remote off off off
Rx Signal Remote off off off
SNR / BER Remote off off off

5-32 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Jumper Settings
Relay Interfaces
Jumper Settings Nominal Battery Voltage

TPE 1 Input 1 Input 2


Relay Interface 1 (N34) 125 .. 250VDC 125 .. 250V DC
Relay Interface 2 (N40) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 3 (N46) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 (N52) not assembled not assembled

TPE 2 Input 1 Input 2


Relay Interface 1 (N64) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 2 (N70) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 3 (N76) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 (N84) not assembled not assembled

Rack Assembly

Slot Module Piggyback


Power Supply Unit 1 (N01) G3LH
Power Supply Unit 2 (N09) not assembled
Line Interface TPE 1 (N28) G3LD not assembled
Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) G3LR not assembled
Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) not assembled not assembled
Line Interface TPE 2 (N58) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interfaces 3 TPE 2 (N76) not assembled not assembled
Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84)
not assembled not assembled
LAN Interface

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-33


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.9. Performance Criteria

5.9.1. General
A fundamental requirement in all the applications that teleprotection
equipment is used in, is that command signals are communicated
reliably at the highest possible speed (transmission time). In the event
of a fault on the protected unit, the command signals must be received
at the remote end in the shortest possible time even if the channel is
disturbed by the fault (dependability).
On the other hand, interference on the communications channel must
never cause unwanted operation of the protection by simulating a
tripping signal when there is no fault on the power system (security).
The most important features of a teleprotection equipment are
therefore transmission time, dependability and security. From the
communications engineering point of view, the bandwidth or data rate
a teleprotection equipment uses must also be taken into account.
By security is understood that the receiver does not generate spurious
tripping signals in the presence of interference on the communications
channel. Dependability characterizes the receiver's ability to recognize
a genuine tripping signal within a given time in spite of interference on
the communications channel. It is obvious that to demand maximum
security at the same time as maximum dependability is contradictory
and one can only be increased at the expense of the other.
When using the NSD570 Analog with single tone command signals,
interference with the guard signal by an alien single tone, which
matches exactly one of the trip frequencies, could generate a false
command if the level of the interference signal is significantly higher
than the guard signal level.
The security against single tone interference depends on how the
command outputs are programmed to respond in case of a link alarm.
Should alien single tone interference appear, select the transmission
of dual tone command signals. This setting prevents an unintended
tripping by a discrete sine tone.

Note: Maloperation can mean both fail to trip (sometimes


called underfunction) and false trip (sometimes called
overfunction).

5-34 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.9.2. Transmission time


Traditional teleprotection have a set of fixed signal evaluation times for
which the equipment delivers the requested performance (trans-
mission time, dependability and security).
For example there could be found three different evaluation times: One
for blocking (T1, fast), one for permissive tripping (T2, medium) and
one for direct tripping (T3, slow), each selection being compliant with
the requested security and dependability for the given application.
Once the equipment is programmed for direct tripping (T3, slow) for
example, it will not trip very fast even if the actual prevailing channel
conditions would permit to do so.
For the NSD570 Analog, this disadvantage can be avoided by using
patented dynamic adaptation. For the NSD570 this can be seen as two
receivers connected in parallel: a fast one (T1), and a slower one (T2).
Both comply with the requested security for a given application (user
programmable) such as blocking, permissive tripping or direct tripping.
If now the actual channel condition during command transmission is
good, the NSD570 will decide to trip with its fast receiver (T1) and not
wait for the slower one (T2). If the actual channel condition is worse, it
will not trip with receiver T1 but wait for receiver T2 to trip.
With this in mind, shorter transmission times can therefore be
expected on average, compared with traditional solutions.
Moreover, the decision threshold for accepting a trip is permanently
and smoothly adapted to the actual prevailing received noise power:
from "low" for good channels to "high" for noisy channels. This
prevents noise from producing unwanted trips.
For the NSD570 Digital, the dynamic adaptation works as follows:
The messages (guard or trip or test) are transmitted in consecutive
frames. Depending on the actual digital channel condition the receiver
trips after the reception of
- N error free-frames ( good channel)
- M erroneous frames with max. 1 error corrected ( channel with
bit errors); with M > N;
N and M depend on the application setting (blocking, permissive
tripping or direct tripping).
The adaptation is the dynamic selection between tripping after N
frames (fast, in case of no errors) or M frames (slower, in case of
errors). The error correcting facility has a beneficial impact on
dependability.

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-35


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.9.2.1. Nominal transmission time


The nominal transmission time T0 is the time elapsed from the
initiating of the command input of the teleprotection transmitter until
the teleprotection receiver has given an output, measured under noise
or bit error free conditions, i.e. there is no interference on the channel.
The measurement is carried out with the transmitter and receiver
connected back-to-back via the line interface terminals.
The nominal transmission time T0 is composed of three terms:

T0 = TI/O + Tg + Tev

TI/O Switching times of the relay interfaces at the transmitting and


receiving end, TI/O approx. 1 ms if a solid state output is used
or approx. 8 ms if a relay contact is used for the command.

Tg NSD570 channel delay (analog: group delay of the filters


which depends on the channel bandwidth and whether the
EOC is switched on or not; digital: due to conversion from
digital to the format of the data interface in use).

Tev Signal evaluation time in the NSD570 receiver. It depends on


the settings of the command application. Since there is no
channel interference, the dynamic adaptation is not in
operation and the fastest receiver will always become
effective when measuring T0.

5.9.2.2. Maximum Actual Transmission Time


In order to estimate the actual transmission time Tac in practical
applications, the delay introduced by the communications channel
(cable, microwave, PLC, multiplexer, cable, microwave) must be
added to the nominal transmission time. Severe disturbances (noise or
bit errors) on the transmission path may occasionally introduce an
additional delay of a few milliseconds.
Commands which are not received within Tac are considered as lost or
missed commands (refer also to Section 5.9.5 Dependability).
The actual transmission time of the NSD570 is measured, for example,
by means of the manual or cyclic loop tests, see Section 3.5.12.

5-36 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

5.9.3. Security

The NSD570 with its dynamic adaptation of the receiver provides the
best security / dependability trade-off for the chosen command applic-
ation at lowest possible transmission time.
Security is expressed as the "worst case" false signal rate (probability
of unwanted commands Puc) for blocks of noise or bit errors of 200 ms
duration. "Worst case" is defined as the level of interference at which
the guard signal is completely suppressed in analog channels and
corresponds to a bit error rate of 0.1 to 0.5 in digital channels.
Levels of security are virtually independent of the chosen NSD570
Analog bandwidth or NSD570 Digital interface type or data rate.
The security level Puc is fixed for each of the possible command
applications.

5.9.4. Security Measurements


All security measurements were performed according to the
procedures prescribed in IEC 60834-1:
noise/bit error burst 200 ms
duration of pause 200 ms
noise bandwidth 4 kHz
SNR -10 dB -30 dB
BER 0.1 0.5

Security is determined by coupling bursts of white noise of high


amplitude into the communication channel of the analog or digital
NSD570. For measuring the security of the digital NSD570, a bit error
generator that introduces random bit errors of a certain quantity can be
used alternatively. The number of bursts injected and the number of
false commands they cause at the receiving end are counted.
The probability of unwanted commands is then calculated according to
the following relationship:

Puc = Nuc / NB

Puc = probability of an unwanted command


Nuc = number of unwanted commands received
NB = number of noise bursts injected

Configuration and settings April 2004 5-37


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

5.9.5. Dependability
For analog channels dependability is expressed as the signal-to-noise
ratio (SNR) for a noise bandwidth of 4 kHz, which must be maintained
during the transmission of a tripping signal to enable that it can be
received within 1.3 times the nominal transmission time T0 (probability
of missing a command Pmc < 1%). Dependability varies with the
bandwidth, so the signal-to-noise ratio will differ in accordance with the
chosen bandwidth.
For digital channels dependability is expressed as the bit error rate
BER, which must be maintained during the transmission of a tripping
signal to enable that it can be received within 1.3 times the nominal
transmission time T0 (probability of missing a command Pmc < 1%).

5.9.6. Dependability Measurements


All dependability measurements were performed according to the
procedures prescribed in IEC 60834-1:
command duration 50 ms or 3 x T0
duration of pause 2 x command duration
noise bandwidth 4 kHz
SNR -6 dB +20 dB
BER 1E-01 1E-06
continuous noise/bit errors

Dependability is determined by sending a large number of commands


to the remote station. The number of commands transmitted and the
number of commands received within a specified time (normally 1.3 x
T0, 1.5 x T0 and 2 x T0) are recorded. The lower the signal-to-noise
ratio (SNR) and the higher the bit error rate (BER) at the input of the
receiving NSD570, the fewer the commands which will be received in
the prescribed time.
The following applies for a sufficiently high number of transmitted
commands:

Pmc = (NT - NR) / NT

Pmc = probability of missing a command


NT = number of commands transmitted
NR = number of commands received

5-38 April 2004 Configuration and settings


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

6. Installation and wiring

6.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 6-3

6.2. Safety instructions ................................................................... 6-3


6.2.1. General .................................................................................... 6-5

6.3. Unpacking................................................................................ 6-5


6.3.1. Inspection upon receipt............................................................ 6-5
6.3.2. What to do if there is transport damage ................................... 6-5
6.3.3. Precautions to avoid transport damage ................................... 6-5

6.4. Installation................................................................................ 6-6


6.4.1. Place of installation and ambient conditions ............................ 6-6
6.4.2. Cabinet .................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.3. Installing racks in cabinets ....................................................... 6-6

6.5. Wiring....................................................................................... 6-6


6.5.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 6-6
6.5.2. Grounding system.................................................................... 6-7
6.5.3. External connections................................................................ 6-7
6.5.3.1. Power Supply......................................................................... 6-10
6.5.3.2. Station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization................. 6-11
6.5.3.2.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-11
6.5.3.2.2. Connection via G1LB cable for RTC sync/station bus ........... 6-12
6.5.3.3. System alarm relays .............................................................. 6-12
6.5.3.3.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-12
6.5.3.3.2. Connection via G3LC cable for alarm relays.......................... 6-13
6.5.3.4. Relay Interface G3LR ............................................................ 6-14
6.5.3.4.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-14
6.5.3.4.2. Connection via G3LR cable for relay interface....................... 6-15
6.5.3.5. Analog Interface G3LA........................................................... 6-16
6.5.3.5.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-16
6.5.3.5.2. Connection via G3LA cable for analog interface.................... 6-17
6.5.3.6. Digital Interface G3LD............................................................ 6-18
6.5.3.6.1. RS-422 RS-449/RS-530/X.21interface ............................... 6-18
6.5.3.6.2. G.703 codirectional interface ................................................. 6-21
6.5.3.6.3. E1/T1 Interface G1LE ............................................................ 6-22
6.5.3.6.4. Optical Interface G1LO .......................................................... 6-24
6.5.3.7. LAN Interface G3LL ............................................................... 6-27
6.5.3.7.1. Ethernet 10/100BaseT LAN interface .................................... 6-27
6.5.3.7.2. Station bus............................................................................. 6-28

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.4. Internal connections............................................................... 6-29


6.5.4.1. Display Panel G1LC............................................................... 6-29

6.6. Photographs .......................................................................... 6-30

6-2 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6. Installation and wiring

6.1. Introduction
Installation of the equipment can only be made smoothly if it is
properly planned beforehand. The system should be engineered not
only to take account of immediate needs, but also allow for long-term
network development.

6.2. Safety instructions

Mechanical installation

The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.


DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip


DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Working on the equipment

Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect


DANGER cables during periods of lightning.

Insertion and removal of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for


redundant power supply units - is permitted when
the equipment is powered on. Before plugging
modules in and out, the power supply of the
equipment has to be switched OFF.

Back cover

Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level


DANGER behind the back cover. Before removing the back
cover, the isolating terminals of the external cables
must be opened or the cables to the terminals must
be disconnected.

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Electrical Installation

This is a Class equipment specified in IEC 60950.


DANGER The equipment and the cabinet must be earthed.
The equipment must be supplied over circuit
breaker.

The circuit breaker for the power supply of the


DANGER equipment must be switched OFF.
The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the
cabinet must be switched OFF.

Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or


DANGER from the equipment.

The isolating terminals from the external cables


DANGER must be kept open during installation, maintenance
and before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

The Faston supply connectors at the rear of the rack


DANGER must be covered with an isolation sleeve.

The power supply is dangerous (hazardous voltage


DANGER and/or hazardous energy level).
Do not install the equipment with a live supply.

Caution When an analog NSD570 is connected to cables,


pilot wires or leased circuits, the equipment must
only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers
withstanding a 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms test voltage at
50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national
regulations or to electric utilities' practice.

Caution Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally


open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

Power supply for alarm

Caution The alarm power supply must be short current and


over current protected.

6-4 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Laser / LED

Caution Class Laser/LED Product.


Laser / LED

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,


ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

6.2.1. General
The aim is not just to install the equipment properly, but also to ensure
its long-term operational reliability. Strictly observe all safety
instructions during installation so that if damage does occur, warranty
and service rights do not become void.

6.3. Unpacking

6.3.1. Inspection upon receipt


Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt.
Notify the nearest ABB company or agent without delay should
departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.

6.3.2. What to do if there is transport damage


Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. Where there is
evidence of transport damage, lodge a claim immediately in writing
with the last carrier, notify the nearest ABB company or agent and also
ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Communication Systems, CH-5400
Baden, Switzerland.

6.3.3. Precautions to avoid transport damage


Insert the modules carefully but firmly into the racks so that they
cannot fall out. Modules and other loose parts that are packed
separately must be packed and secured such as to preclude damage.

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.4. Installation

6.4.1. Place of installation and ambient conditions


The room where the equipment is installed should be free of dust, the
floor covered if possible with a semi-conducting plastic flooring
material and cement floors and walls should be suitably painted.
The room must be well ventilated so that the temperature is in the
range +10 to +45C and the relative humidity between 30 and 70 %.
Lead/acid batteries must not be in the same room.

6.4.2. Cabinet
The standard equipment is supplied in an ABB cabinet Type E40A.
These cabinets are equipped with a hinged frame and are suitable for
installation:
standing against a wall,
back-to-back,
side-by-side,
standing alone.
A gap of 2 to 3 cm should be left between cabinets standing side-by-
side to permit single cabinets to be removed without difficulty. Leave
sufficient space in front to avoid damage when the hinged frame is
opened. There must generally be enough room for carrying out
maintenance and for using the associated instruments.
Do not install equipment cabinets in corners, which would hinder
opening the hinged frame and working on the cabinet.
Free access is especially important in the case of cabinets not
equipped with a hinged frame. Cabinets are normally erected on a
pedestal or as a suite of cabinets on a platform to facilitate cleaning
the floor and routing of cables.

6.4.3. Installing racks in cabinets


Pay attention when determining the cabinet layout that air can circulate
freely around the equipment and overheating cannot take place. To
this end, a space of at least 4 cm must be left between the racks.

6.5. Wiring

6.5.1. Introduction
While being installed, the equipment must be switched off and no
external connections may be made to it.

6-6 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.2. Grounding system


The grounding system must go out radially from the station ground rail.
On no account may there be any loops that would permit circulating
ground currents.
Every cabinet must have its own ground conductor (gauge > 25 mm2)
connected by adequately rated cable lugs to the station ground rail.
The ground connection to the cabinet shall be clearly visible and made
to the designated ground terminal.
For safety reasons, looping ground conductors to or from neighboring
cabinets or other equipment is not permissible.
To ensure proper RF-grounding and EMC protection, the hinged frame
or mounting rack inside the cabinet must be connected to the ground
rail of the cabinet using a short copper band (length < 20 cm). In
addition, the hinged frame or mounting rack must be blank (non-
painted) in order to ensure a low impedance RF-grounding of the
NSD570 rack bolted to it. If not, then one has to connect the NSD570
rack via a short copper band (length < 20 cm) to an unpainted spot of
the hinged frame.

6.5.3. External connections


Connections are made via cables to be plugged into the connectors at
the rear of the equipment. Some of these connectors (those of type
Phoenix) also allow direct plugging of screwless spring clamp type
terminal blocks. The external connections are then made by clamping
wires into these terminal blocks.
When clamping wires into the terminals plugging of screwless spring
clamp type terminal blocks, do not clamp more than one wire per
terminal.

Note: Do not clamp more than one wire per terminal when
using screwless spring clamp type terminal blocks.

The length of the optional available connecting cables is 2500 mm.

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

All external cables have to be secured to the cable rail in the rear of
the equipment with the help of plastic cable binders as shown. In case
of screened cables, the upper cable binder has to be replaced with the
metallic spring clamp supplied with the cable, in order to ensure a low
impedance electrical connection of the cable screen to the equipment
chassis also at high frequencies, see Fig. 6.1.

RS-422 - G.703 E1/T1


RS-449/RS-530/X.21

Plastic cable binder Metallic spring clamp

Fig. 6.1 Mounting of external cables with cable screen

6-8 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Ethernet on LAN Interface G3LL

Plastic cable binder Metallic spring clamp

Fig. 6.2 Mounting of external cables with cable screen (G3LL)

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-9


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.1. Power Supply


The NSD570 must always be connected via circuit breakers to the
supply voltage(s). In case of redundant supply (two power supplies),
circuit breakers have to be inserted in both supply lines.
Recommended circuit breakers:
B9AS Label E: CI-BREAK 60 VDC / 250 VAC
Ident. number: 1KHL015141R0001
Type: S282 K6A
Max. voltage: 60 VDC or 250 VAC

B9AV Label E: CI-BREAK > 60 VDC 250 VDC


Ident. number: 1KHL015999R0001
Type: S282 UC-K 6A
Max. voltage: 250 VDC

The supply connectors (Faston, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm) are at the rear of
the module rack. For exact locations refer to Fig. 6.3.

View from rear:


Power Supply 2:

DC+ Positive battery pole DC supply


AC L or AC Line supply

DC- Negative battery pole DC


AC N supply
or AC Neutral supply

Power Supply 1:
DC+
AC L Positive battery pole DC supply
or AC Line supply
DC-
AC N Negative battery pole DC supply
or AC Neutral supply

PE

Protective earth connectors

Plastic cable binders

Fig. 6.3 Supply connections

6-10 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.3.2. Station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization

6.5.3.2.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment


The screwless (spring-clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto
connector X103 of the supply backplane G1LB.
Recommended wire size: 0.8 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs).
Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.14 to 1.5 mm2.

X103
G1LB
BACKPLANE
SUPPLY

G3LC
INTERFACE
COMMON
A
1

RS-485
1

B
2

GND
3
7

GPS-SYNC (IRIG-B)
4
+
5
-

EXT-SYNC (1 PPS)
6
+
7
-

6-G1LB_Connector.vsd

Fig. 6.4 Connector for station bus and Real Time Clock
synchronization

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-11


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.2.2. Connection via G1LB cable for RTC sync/station bus


The cable is equipped with screwless (spring-clamp) type terminals.
Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs).
Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

COMMON RS-485 GPS-SYNC (IRIG-B) EXT-SYNC (1 PPS)


INTERFACE
G3LC A B GND

SUPPLY
BACKPLANE
G1LB + - + -
X103 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
G1LB CABLE FOR
RTC SYNC/STATION BUS

RTC SYNC/STATION BUS


WH BN GN GY PK BU RD YE

Terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

6-G1LB_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.5 Station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization

6.5.3.3. System alarm relays

6.5.3.3.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment


The screwless (spring-clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto
connector X102 of the common interface G3LC.
Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2.
Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

6-12 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

X102

G3LC
INTERFACE
COMMON
1
NO

ALARM RELAY 1
2
C
1

CONTACT RATING: 150W, 8A MAKE,


ALARM CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN ALARM POS.
NOTE :
3
NC
4
8

5A CARRY, 0.6A BREAK


5
6
NO

ALARM RELAY 2
7
C
8
NC
6-G3LC_Connector.vsd

Fig. 6.6 Connector for system alarm relays

6.5.3.3.2. Connection via G3LC cable for alarm relays


The cable is equipped with screwless (spring-clamp) type terminals.
Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2.
Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

COMMON ALARM RELAY 1 ALARM RELAY 2


INTERFACE
G3LC NOTE :
ALARM CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN ALARM POS.
CONTACT RATING: 150W, 8A MAKE,
5A CARRY, 0.6A BREAK

NO C NC NO C NC
X102 1 2 3 6 7 8

G3LC CABLE FOR


ALARM RELAYS
BK BK BK BK BK BK GNYE
Terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE

6-GL3C_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.7 G3LC cable for alarm relays

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-13


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.4. Relay Interface G3LR

6.5.3.4.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment


The screwless (spring-clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto
connector X101 of the relay interface G3LR.
Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2.
Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

X101

G3LR

RELAY
INTERFACE
JUMPER
1A+1D
1A+1C
1A+1B
G1LR
RELAY INTERFACE
G3LR CABLE FOR

125VDC...250VDC
60VDC...110VDC
External dry contact

24VDC...48VDC
U BAT nom.
(option)
G1LR
1A

1
-
1B

TX1
1C
1D

2
+

(VOLT. RANGE: 24...250VDC)


JUMPER
2A+2C
2A+2D

2A+2B
G1LR
1

INPUT
External dry contact
125VDC...250VDC
60VDC...110VDC
24VDC...48VDC
U BAT nom.
2A
3
-
2B

TX2
2C
2D
4
+

(SOLID STATE / 5...250VDC/2A) (HEAVY DUTY / 5...250VDC/5A CARRY)


5
-

RX1

OUTPUT
6
+
7
-

RX2
8
+
9
NO

RX/REL1
10
C
11
NC

14
OUTPUT
12
NO

RX/REL2
13
C
14
NC

6-G3LR_Connector.vsd

Fig. 6.8 Connector for relay interface

6-14 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.3.4.2. Connection via G3LR cable for relay interface


The cable is equipped with screwless (spring clamp) type terminals.
Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2.
Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

RELAY INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT


INTERFACE (VOLT. RANGE: 24...250VDC) (SOLID STATE / 5...250VDC/2A) (HEAVY DUTY / 5...250VDC/5A CARRY)
G3LR
TX1 TX2 RX1 RX2 RX/REL 1 RX/REL2
JUMPER U BAT nom. JUMPER U BAT nom.
1A+1B 24VDC...48VDC 2A+2B 24VDC...48VDC
1A+1C 60VDC...110VDC 2A+2C 60VDC...110VDC
1A+1D 125VDC...250VDC 2A+2D 125VDC...250VDC
G1LR External dry contact G1LR External dry contact

G1LR
1D
1C

2C
2D
1A
1B

2A
2B
(option)

- + - + - + - + NO C NC NO C NC
X101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
G3LR CABLE FOR
RELAY INTERFACE
BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK GNYE

Terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 PE

6-G3LR_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.9 G3LR cable for relay interface

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-15


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.5. Analog Interface G3LA

6.5.3.5.1. Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment


The screwless (spring clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto
connector X100 of the Analog Interface G3LA.
Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs).
Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

X100

INTERFACE
ANALOG
G3LA
JUMPER OUTPUT
TB
TA

IMPEDANCE
X302

X301
>1.5kOhm
600Ohm

TA
TB
X303

TX-
AF
1 2

JUMPER
RB
RA

IMPEDANCE
X203 RB

X202
RA
>1.5kOhm
600Ohm
INPUT

X204
6

RX-AF
3
4
5

BOOST
6

6-G3LA_Connector.vsd

Fig. 6.10 Connector for analog interface

6-16 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.3.5.2. Connection via G3LA cable for analog interface


The cable is equipped with screwless (spring clamp) type terminals.
Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs).
Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

ANALOG RX-AF
IMPEDANCE TX-AF IMPEDANCE BOOST
INTERFACE
G3LA
X301 X202
TA RA
X302 X203
TB RB

X204
X303
JUMPER OUTPUT JUMPER INPUT
TA 600Ohm RA 600Ohm
TB >1.5kOhm RB >1.5kOhm

X100 1 2 3 4 5 6
G3LA CABLE FOR
ANALOG INTERFACE
WH BN GN YE GY PK

Terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6

6-G3LA_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.11 G3LA cable for analog interface

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-17


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.6. Digital Interface G3LD

6.5.3.6.1. RS-422 RS-449/RS-530/X.21interface

a) Connector at rear of equipment (male Sub-D 25 poles)

G3LD
INTERFACE
DIGITAL
X101

PE
1

1
SD-A
14

DATA
SEND
2
SD-B

14
RD-A

RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND


DATA

RS-422 INTERFACE
3
RD-B

25

16
13 RT-A

TIMING TIMING TIMING


17
RT-B

9
TT-A

24
11 TT-B

ST-A
15

ST-B
12

SG
7

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.12 Connector for digital interface (male Sub-D 25 poles)

6-18 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

b) Connection via G3LD cable with isolating terminals (10 poles)


The cable is equipped with screwless (spring-clamp) type terminals.
Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2 (shielded twisted pairs).
Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
DIGITAL RS-422 INTERFACE
INTERFACE
G3LD SEND RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND
DATA DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING

PE

RD-A

RD-B
SD-A

SD-B

RT-A

RT-B

ST-A

ST-B
TT-A

TT-B
CHASSIS
GND

X101 1 2 14 3 16 17 9 24 11 15 12
G3LD*CABLE WITH
ISOLATING TERMINALS
WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD BK VT

Terminals 5 6 1 2 3 4 9 10 7 8 PE

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.13 G3LD cable with isolating terminals (10 poles)

c) Connection via G3LD cable with RS-449 interface (37 poles)


DIGITAL RS-422 INTERFACE
INTERFACE
G3LD SEND RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND
DATA DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING

PE
RD-A

RD-B
SD-A

SD-B

RT-A

RT-B

ST-A

ST-B
TT-A

TT-B

CHASSIS
GND
X101 1 2 14 3 16 17 9 24 11 15 12
G3LD*CABLE WITH
RS-449 INTERFACE
(37-P) WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD BK VT

1 4 22 6 24 8 26 17 35 5 23

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.14 G3LD cable with RS-449 interface (male Sub-D


connector 37 poles)

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-19


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

d) Connection via G3LD cable with RS-530 interface (25 poles)


DIGITAL RS-422 INTERFACE
INTERFACE
G3LD SEND RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND
DATA DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING

PE
CHASSIS

RD-A

RD-B
SD-A

SD-B

RT-A

RT-B

ST-A

ST-B
TT-A

TT-B
GND
X101 1 2 14 3 16 17 9 24 11 15 12
G3LD*CABLE WITH
RS-530 INTERFACE (25-P)
WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD BK VT

1 2 14 3 16 17 9 24 11 15 12

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.15 G3LD cable with RS-530 interface (male Sub-D


connector 25 poles)

e) Connection via G3LD cable with X.21 interface (15 poles)


DIGITAL RS-422 INTERFACE
INTERFACE
G3LD SEND RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND
DATA DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING

PE
RD-A

RD-B
SD-A

SD-B

RT-A

RT-B

ST-A

ST-B
TT-A

CHASSIS
TT-B

GND
X101 1 2 14 3 16 17 9 24 11 15 12
G3LD*CABLE WITH
X.21 INTERFACE (15-P)
WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD

1 2 9 4 11 7 14 6 13

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.16 G3LD cable with X.21 interface (male Sub-D connector
15 poles)

6-20 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.3.6.2. G.703 codirectional interface


a) Connector at rear of equipment (RJ45, 8 poles)

G3LD
INTERFACE
DIGITAL
G.703 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE
X201

DATA
6
+

RX
3
-

DATA
4
+

TX
5
-
2
1

7
8
8

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.17 Connector for G.703 codirectional interface


(RJ45, 8 poles)
b) Connection via G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1 interface
(RJ45, 8 poles)
The cable has RJ45 connectors at both ends and in addition is
equipped with a connection module that allows toolless connection of
wires of size 0.5 mm (AWG 24) 0.65 mm (AWG 22), shielded
twisted pairs.
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
G.703 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE
RJ45 Press-Fit
G3LD RX TX
DATA DATA 1 1
2 2
3 = Rx - 3 = Rx -
CHASSIS 4 = Tx + 6 = Rx +
+ - + - GND
X201 6 3 4 5 2 7 8 1 5 = Tx - 5 = Tx -
G3LD*CABLE FOR
G.703/E1/T1INTERFACE
(RJ45 connector 8 poles)
6 = Rx + 4 = Tx +
7 7
Press-fit 8 8
terminals 6 3 4 5 2 7 8 1
View of pins: top-down,
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd as real terminal strip

Fig. 6.18 G.703 codirectional interface with G3LD cable for


G.703/E1/T1 interface (RJ45, 8 poles)

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-21


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.6.3. E1/T1 Interface G1LE


a) Connector at rear of equipment (RJ45, 8 poles)
The connector is located on the optional piggyback module G1LE,
mounted face down on top of the Digital Interface G3LD.

G3LD
INTERFACE
DIGITAL
(OPTION)
G1LE
X101
RL2

DATA

E1/T1 INTERFACE
RX
1
RL1

2
XL2

DATA
4

TX
XL1

5
3

8
7
8

1
6

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.19 Connector for E1/T1 interface (RJ45, 8 poles)

6-22 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

b) Connection via G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1 Interface


(RJ45, 8 poles)
The cable has RJ45 connectors at both ends and in addition is
equipped with a connection module that allows toolless connection of
wires of size 0.5 mm (AWG 24) 0.65 mm (AWG 22), shielded
twisted pairs.

DIGITAL
INTERFACE
G1LE
(OPTION) E1/T1 INTERFACE
RJ45 Press-Fit
G3LD
RX TX 1 = RL2 1 = RL2
DATA DATA
2 = RL1 2 = RL1
3 3
4 = XL2 6
RL2
CHASSIS
5 = XL1 5 = XL1
RL1

XL2

XL1
GND
X101 1 2 4 5 3 7 8 6
6 4 = XL2
G3LD*CABLE FOR
G.703/E1/T1INTERFACE
(RJ45 connector 8 poles)
7 7
8 8
Press-fit
terminals 1 2 4 5 3 7 8 6
View of pins: top-down,
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd as real terminal strip

Fig. 6.20 E1/T1 interface with G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1


interface (RJ45 8 poles)

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-23


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.6.4. Optical Interface G1LO


When handling with optical fibers please remember:
Fiberoptic Installation

Caution Optical connectors


Clean all optical connectors by an approved method
before making any optical connection.
When making an optical connection, do not rotate
the optical connector unnecessarily.
When not connected, fit all optical plugs and
couplings with captive caps.

Caution Damage to optical fibers


When dressing fibers, take care not to exceed the
minimum bend radius (typically 35 mm) and do not
over tighten binders used for dressing as damage
may result.
When connecting other external cables and also the
rear cover, ensure that the optical fibers are not
bruised or crimped.

a) Connector at rear of equipment (E2000)


The connector is located on the optional piggyback module G1LO,
mounted face down on top of the digital interface G3LD.

G3LD
INTERFACE
DIGITAL
E2000)
X701 (OPT. CONN.

(OPTION)
G1LO
RX

OPTICAL INTERFACE
TX

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

Fig. 6.21 Connector E2000 for optical fiber

6-24 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

b) Connection via optical cable (E2000 or FC/PC)


The available optical cables have E2000 connectors at both ends or
E2000 and FC/PC connectors.

DIGITAL G1LO
INTERFACE (OPTION) OPTICAL INTERFACE
G3LD

X701 (OPT. CONN. RX TX


E2000) RD BU

1) 1)

6-G3LD_Cable.vsd

1)
Optical cable type Connector
V9WP, V9WR E2000 E2000
V9WQ, V9WS E2000 FC/PC
Fig. 6.22 Optical Interface G1LO with optical cable

For the fiber optic connections, the NSD570 provides E-2000 Duplex
Compact 0.1 dB - SM APC mating adapters with 0.1 dB insertion loss.
This kind of adapter features spring loaded metal shutter that avoid
laser radiation exposure when they are mated on one end only.

Fig. 6.23 E-2000 duplex compact mating adapters


These adapters match with E-2000 0.1 dB Duplex Compact and
Simplex SM APC fiber optic connectors that are suitable for

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-25


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

termination of fiber cable types according to ITU-T G.652, G.653,


G.654 and G.655. This kind of connectors features integrated black
protective caps that avoid laser radiation exposure when they are
unmated.

Fig. 6.24 E-2000 duplex compact fiber optic connector

Fig. 6.25 E-2000 simplex fiber optic connector

6-26 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.3.7. LAN Interface G3LL

6.5.3.7.1. Ethernet 10/100BaseT LAN interface

a) Connector at rear of equipment (RJ45, 8 poles)

X201 RJ45

G3LL
LAN Interface
1
TX+

Ethernet Interface
DATA
TX
1
TX-

2
RX+

DATA
3

RX
RX-

6
4
5
7
8
75 75

PE

6-G3LL_Connector.vsd

Fig. 6.26 Connector for Ethernet interface (RJ45, 8 poles)

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-27


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.5.3.7.2. Station bus

b) Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment


The screwless (spring clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto
connector X500 of the LAN Interface G3LL.
Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs).
Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.

X500

G3LL
LAN Interface
A
1

RS-485
B
2

GND
3
1

4
5
6

7
7

6-G3LL_Connector.vsd

Fig. 6.27 Connector for station bus interface (7 poles)

b) Station bus wiring


For a proper operation of the NSD570 LAN Interface it is necessary to
wire the station bus of the supply backplane G1LB (Pin 1, 2 and 3 of
the connector X103) to the station bus of the NSD570 LAN Interface
G3LL (Pin 1, 2 and 3 of the connector X500).
This can be done with the optional connecting cable G3LL*CABLE
FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC (1KHW001213R0001). The optional
connecting cable G1LB*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC
(1KHW000668R0001) will then be dispensable.

6-28 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

6.5.4. Internal connections


All internal connections within the Module Rack G7BI are provided by
Supply Backplane G1LB, Common Interface G3LC and Bus Plane with
Front Cover G1LA except for the optional Display Panel G1LC.

6.5.4.1. Display Panel G1LC


The optional Display Panel G1LC is assembled to the module rack
G7BI, replacing the blanking cover plate that is mounted in front of the
power supply units. An enclosed ribbon cable connects the Display
Panel to the adjacent Common Interface G3LC as follows:

Fig. 6.28 Mounting of the Display Panel G1LC

Caution:

The ribbon cable has to be


mounted abducing down-
wards.

Fig. 6.29 Correct connection of the ribbon cable

Installation and wiring April 2004 6-29


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

6.6. Photographs

Fig. 6.30 Front view of the NSD570 module rack, equipped with
two line interfaces - each of them operating four Relay
Interfaces G3LR - and the optional Display Panel
G1LC.

Fig. 6.31 Rear view of the NSD570 module rack, equipped with
an Analog Interface G3LA and a Digital Interface
G3LD - each of them operating four Relay Interfaces
G3LR, with connecting cables (rear cover removed).

6-30 April 2004 Installation and wiring


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

7. Commissioning

7.1. Safety instructions ................................................................... 7-2

7.2. Testing the communication channel ........................................ 7-4

7.3. Commissioning the equipment................................................. 7-5


7.3.1. Preliminary inspection and checks........................................... 7-5
7.3.2. Checks according to commissioning instructions..................... 7-6
7.3.3. HMI570 functions to support commissioning ........................... 7-6

Commissioning April 2004 7-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

7. Commissioning

7.1. Safety instructions

Personnel qualification
An authorized and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out installing, programming,
commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting and
work of the equipment.

Mechanical Installation
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip


DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Working on the equipment


Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning.

Warning labels
Precautions and indications to hazardous voltages
DANGER and hazardous energy level must be strictly
observed.

Inserting and removing of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for


redundant power supply units - is permitted when
the equipment is powered on. Before plugging
modules in and out, the power supply of the
equipment has to be switched OFF.

7-2 April 2004 Commissioning


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Back cover
Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER behind the back cover. Before removing the back
cover, the isolating terminals of the external cables
must be opened or the cables to the terminals must
be disconnected.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,


ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Laser / LED

Caution Class Laser/LED Product.


Laser / LED

Using HMI570

Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using


certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commis-
sioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote
test mode).
However, when a user is logged in with only "view
permission", it is not possible to disable the device.

Common Interface G3LC


Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Relay Interface G3LR


Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Commissioning April 2004 7-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

LAN Interface G3LL

The LAN Interface G3LL contains a lithium battery.


DANGER
Danger of explosion exists if the lithium battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

For replacing and inserting the battery always use a


potentially-free soldering iron.

Check the polarity before inserting the battery.

Caution For disposal of the lithium battery, the regional and


national regulations for electrical and electronic
waste have to be observed.

7-4 April 2004 Commissioning


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

7.2. Testing the communication channel


It is essential that the behavior and the characteristics of the
communication link between the sets of teleprotection equipment are
checked prior to final commissioning. This is necessary to confirm the
design criteria used for engineering the system or, if the criteria were
inaccurate, to take the appropriate corrective action.
When an analog communication link is installed, it is of interest
whether the frequency response is appropriate and whether there are
noise or spurious/interference signals present in the bandwidth used of
the NSD570.
When a digital communication link is installed, it is of interest whether
there are bit errors present in the channel used of the NSD570.
In case the NSD570s are in a point-to-point connection, it is necessary
to know whether the permissible line attenuation (analog) or the
permissible line length (digital) is not exceeded.
It is assumed that the communication link is commissioned properly
before the teleprotection equipment is set into operation.
In any case it is advisable to measure the transmission delay that is
introduced by the communication link. Refer to Section 5.9.2. of this
manual for remarks about "Transmission Time".

7.3. Commissioning the equipment


Once the prevailing conditions of the communication channel have
been established, it is permissible to proceed with commissioning the
equipment itself. Before switching on the power supply, perform the
checks below. Correct any deviations or shortcomings immediately.

7.3.1. Preliminary inspection and checks


a) Check that the cabinet is grounded in accordance with regulations.
b) Check that the polarity of the power supply is correct.
c) Check that the external connections to the cabinet terminals are
correct in relation to users diagrams of the cabinet.
d) Check that all the internal connections have been made and that
they are correct.
e) Check that all the modules are properly inserted in their intended
slots.
f) Check the configuration and settings in relation to the settings given
by the customer.

Commissioning April 2004 7-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

7.3.2. Checks according to commissioning instructions


Since the equipment is tested according to the Programming and
Testing Instructions 1KHW000898-EN prior to delivery, only those
settings have to be made that are necessary to adapt the equipment to
the operating conditions prevailing in the customers plant.
The Commissioning Instructions are given in document 1KHW000900-
EN, which is available in the annex of this manual.

Caution Do not close/establish the connections to the


protection devices until the NSD570 is properly
commissioned.

7.3.3. HMI570 functions to support commissioning


The following functions of the HMI570 can be used to simplify the
measurements and to reduce travel during commissioning:

a) Manual loop test


b) Local test mode
c) Remote test mode

Refer to Section 3.5.12. of this manual for a detailed description of the


above mentioned test facilities.

7-6 April 2004 Commissioning


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

8. Operation and maintenance

8.1. Safety instructions ................................................................... 8-2

8.2. Operation ................................................................................. 8-5


8.2.1. Normal operation ..................................................................... 8-5
8.2.2. Equipment failure ..................................................................... 8-5

8.3. Maintenance ............................................................................ 8-6


8.3.1. Periodic Functional Checks ..................................................... 8-6
8.3.1.1. Check input power supply voltage ........................................... 8-6
8.3.1.2. Checks during operation .......................................................... 8-6
8.3.1.3. Check status data .................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1.4. Check alarm events ................................................................. 8-7
8.3.1.5. Alarm polling for several NSD570 in a substation.................... 8-8
8.3.1.6. Check AF line levels ................................................................ 8-8
8.3.1.7. Check bit error rates ................................................................ 8-8
8.3.1.8. Removing the equipment from service for testing.................... 8-9
8.3.1.9. Checking the entire link............................................................ 8-9

Operation and maintenance April 2004 8-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

8. Operation and maintenance

8.1. Safety instructions

Personnel qualification

An authorized and properly trained personnel only is


DANGER admitted to carry out installing, programming,
commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting and
work of the equipment.

Warning labels

Precautions and indications to hazardous voltages


DANGER and hazardous energy level must be strictly
observed.

Mechanical Installation

The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.


DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip


DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Working on the equipment

Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect


DANGER cables during periods of lightning.

Inserting and removing of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for


redundant power supply units - is permitted when
the equipment is powered on. Before plugging
modules in and out, the power supply of the
equipment has to be switched OFF.

Back cover

Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level


DANGER behind the back cover. Before removing the back
cover, the isolating terminals of the external cables
must be opened or the cables to the terminals must
be disconnected.

8-2 April 2004 Operation and maintenance


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,


ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Electrical Installation

The isolating terminals of the external cables must


DANGER be kept open during installation, maintenance and
before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

Laser / LED

Caution Class Laser/LED Product.


Laser / LED

Using HMI570

Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using


certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commis-
sioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote
test mode).
However, when a user is logged in with only "view
permission", it is not possible to disable the device.

Common Interface G3LC

Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level


DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Relay Interface G3LR

Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level


DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Operation and maintenance April 2004 8-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Caution The following safety instructions must be strictly


observed to prevent injury to persons and damage
to plant.

It is important that these Operating Instructions are read and fully


comprehended by all people involved including personnel that has
already undergone training and is otherwise qualified before
changing the configuration or carrying out maintenance etc.
Take note of the instructions in Section 6.3 to avoid damage to the
equipment while being transported.
Cabinets that have not been secured to the floor can tip forwards
when the hinged equipment frame is opened.
Safety devices such as cover plates must not be removed or
bypassed.
Pay attention to high-voltage warnings.
Before switching on the power supply, check that the circuit is
protected by a miniature circuit breaker and the equipment/cabinet
is properly grounded and check the polarity and value of the power
supply.
It is not permitted to insert or withdraw modules during operation;
the power supply must be switched off first.
The modules contain CMOS integrated circuits that can be
damaged by electrostatic discharge. It is important to take certain
precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge before removing the
packing or withdrawing them from the racks. Indispensable
precautions to avoid ESD damage are earthing of people working
on the modules and a working surface that protected against
electrostatic discharge. Only transport modules in their original
packing or installed in racks.
It is not permitted to modify the equipment in any way.

8-4 April 2004 Operation and maintenance


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

8.2. Operation

8.2.1. Normal operation


The LEDs on the front of the equipment indicate its status. Only the
green LEDs should be lit in normal operation. The red LEDs indicate
and alarm status and should not light during normal operation.
Refer to Section 3.3.4. of this manual where a detailed explanation of
the various LEDs is given.

8.2.2. Equipment failure


Refer to Section 9 Troubleshooting for a list of possible failures.
A faulty operation will be indicated by red LEDs on the front plate of
the module rack. In case there is some fault with the system or the
link, red LEDs in the "SYSTEM ALARMS" field of the line interface on
the front plate will light up. If there is a hardware failure on a specific
module, its "Ok / Fail" LED will turn red.
Refer to Section 3.3.4. of this manual where a detailed explanation of
the various LEDs is given.
If any of the red alarm LEDs of the system light up, the corresponding
alarm contact on the common interface G3LC will also operate after
the configured alarm pick up delay.
The "Upload Alarm" function or the event recorder functions of the
HMI570 can be used to see the details of the alarms, see Section
4.8.9.2. and 4.8.10.2.
See Section 9.3.4. List of low level alarms and corrective actions for
details about causes of alarms.

Operation and maintenance April 2004 8-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

8.3. Maintenance
All NSD570 modules are subject to a thorough final test following
manufacturing and the complete equipment is calibrated and tested
before shipment.
The most important functions are performed digitally by the software
and are therefore not subject to ageing. Because of the digital
techniques involved, the settings made by means of the user interface
program HMI570 and the stability of the equipment as a whole are
guaranteed over a long period of time.
The various processors on the modules include a number of self-
monitoring functions, which together with the loop test performed at
periodic intervals continuously check the operation of the modules and
the availability of the communications channel as a whole.
Nevertheless, testing at periodic intervals is recommended. The
frequency of testing depends very much on the operating conditions in
the particular installation, but should not be less than once every two
years. The following periodic measurements are recommended.

8.3.1. Periodic Functional Checks


It is important that the reasons for readings, which diverge widely from
values recorded during commissioning, be found, even if this means
checking the entire equipment.
Checking and testing must be carried out by qualified and authorized
personnel only, using suitable instruments. Incorrect settings can
impair the proper operation of the equipment.

8.3.1.1. Check input power supply voltage


Verify that the external power supply voltage is within tolerance
(48 V DC 250 V DC 20% or 100 V AC 240 V AC -15% +10%).

8.3.1.2. Checks during operation


The ability of the equipment to function correctly can be checked by
manually initiating the loop test: simply press the button "Loop Test" on
the front plate of the module rack. Provided that the signal transmitted
by the test is received back again within the allotted time, the LED
"Trip" lights up and the "Guard" LED is deactivated for about 3 s to
confirm that the test was successful. If not, the "Ok / Fail" LED flashes
for about 5 s.

8-6 April 2004 Operation and maintenance


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Should the equipment fail the loop test in two consecutive attempts, it
must be removed from service and checked according to the following
Sections.
In case of the NSD570 Analog, the transmitting and receiving levels
shall be checked by means of the HMI570 (see Section 8.3.1.6) after
completing the loop test. Readjustment is unnecessary, provided that
the receiver level does not vary by more than 3 dB from its nominal
value. If the discrepancy is greater, the transmitter level at the remote
station and the attenuation of the communications channel should be
checked before readjusting the receiver.
In case of the NSD570 Digital, the quality of the communications
channel shall be checked by means of the HMI570 (see Section
8.3.1.7) after completing the loop test. This may be verified for
example by using a bit error rate test equipment, which provides the
required data interface and transmission rate. It shall be connected to
the communications channel instead of the NSD570 Digital. Corrective
actions are unnecessary, provided that the measured bit error rate is
less than 1E-07. The peak voltage of the output signal at the remote
station and the attenuation of the communications channel (i.e. the
peak voltage of the signal at the receiver) should be checked before
continuing with fault diagnostics.

Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation


the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of
the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes
the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked
for approx. 10 seconds.
During this time no commands can be transmitted.

8.3.1.3. Check status data


The status data of both the local and remote equipment can be
uploaded in the HMI570, using the function Upload Status in the
Status / Alarm menu. A printout of the status data can be taken for
documentation purpose and compared with the previous status data.

8.3.1.4. Check alarm events


The alarms stored by the built in event recorder of the NSD570
terminals can be inspected. Upload the stored events by activating
Upload Latest Events in the Event Recorder menu.

Operation and maintenance April 2004 8-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

8.3.1.5. Alarm polling for several NSD570 in a substation

Note: This function is available only in association with the


LAN Interface G3LL!
To check the alarm status of a number of NSD570 terminals
connected by the station bus, the function Alarm polling can be used
(see also Section 9.3.6 of this Manual). The alarm status of the
addressed terminals is polled in selectable intervals and in case of any
alarm, the alarm text is recorded in a file and displayed on the screen.

8.3.1.6. Check AF line levels


The HMI570 can be used to check the levels of the AF signals
transferred over the analog NSD570 link. The function is accessible by
clicking on the Upload Status link in the Status / Alarm menu. A
printout of the status data can be taken for documentation purpose
and compared with the previous status data.

Note: The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level
measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if
the EOC is switched off!

8.3.1.7. Check bit error rates


The HMI570 can be used to check the prevailing bit error rate (BER) of
the digital NSD570 link. The function is accessible by clicking on the
Upload Status link in the Status / Alarm menu. A printout of the
status data can be taken for documentation purpose and compared
with the previous status data.

Note: The Bit Error Rate (BER) short term measurement


does only have an adequate accuracy if the prevailing
BER is higher than 1E-05!
The measurement of the short term average BER
takes 16 seconds, the long term average BER is only
displayed after the equipment is continuously
powered for at least 4.5 hours (262 minutes).

8-8 April 2004 Operation and maintenance


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

8.3.1.8. Removing the equipment from service for testing


1. Switch off the equipment and open all isolating terminals to the
protection equipment afterwards.
2. Switch on the equipment again by closing the circuit breakers.
3. Set the equipment to the Local Test Mode by clicking on the
designated button in the Commissioning menu of the HMI570.
4. Check that the unit is indeed in the local test mode (corresponding
warning message appears on screen and the "Ok / Fail" LED of the
line interface flashes).
5. Inject commands at the local terminal blocks and check the local
command outputs for correct operation.
(Note: The trip counters will count the local commands as well!).
6. Deactivate the Local Test Mode by clicking on the designated
button in the Commissioning menu of the HMI570.
7. Carry out the manual loop test according to Section 8.3.1.2.
8. The isolating terminals to the protection equipment may be closed
again, provided that there is no alarm.
9. If required, synchronize the trip counters in the local and in the
remote station by resetting them (menu Status / Alarm -> link Trip
Counter -> link Reset Trip Counter: mark check box "All" and
click on the button Reset Trip Counter).

8.3.1.9. Checking the entire link


Following any changes made to the NSD570 equipment or other
components of the communications channel, it is recommended to
repeat the commissioning procedure described in the document
"Commissioning Instructions" 1KHW000900-EN in the annex of this
manual for the units at both ends of the line.
Replace any modules found to be faulty. It is not recommended to
carry out any repairs on site.

Operation and maintenance April 2004 8-9


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

9. Troubleshooting

9.1. Safety instructions ................................................................... 9-2

9.2. Fuses ....................................................................................... 9-4

9.3. Alarms...................................................................................... 9-5


9.3.1. Alarm concept.......................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2. Alarm pick up and hold delay................................................... 9-6
9.3.2.1. High level alarms ..................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2.2. Low level common alarms and relay interface alarms ............. 9-7
9.3.2.3. Analog interface alarms ......................................................... 9-10
9.3.2.4. Digital interface alarms .......................................................... 9-10
9.3.3. Problem localization............................................................... 9-12
9.3.4. List of low level alarms and corrective actions ....................... 9-13
9.3.5. Alarm event recorder ............................................................. 9-20
9.3.6. Alarm polling .......................................................................... 9-21

9.4. Warnings................................................................................ 9-21

9.5. Some basic checks ................................................................ 9-22

9.6. Frequently asked questions ................................................... 9-23


9.6.1. General .................................................................................. 9-23
9.6.2. Where can I get the latest version of this FAQ?..................... 9-25

9.7. Replacing faulty modules....................................................... 9-26

9.8. Returning modules for repair ................................................. 9-26

9.9. Support .................................................................................. 9-26

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

9. Troubleshooting

Should the communication between two NSD570 units fail, either the
communications channel or one of the NSD570 modules can be
defective.
Following a systematic procedure is the quickest way to localize and
eliminate a fault.

9.1. Safety instructions

Personnel qualification
An authorized and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out installing, programming,
commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting and
work of the equipment.

Mechanical Installation
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip


DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Working on the equipment


Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning.

Inserting and removing of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for


redundant power supply units - is permitted when
the equipment is powered on. Before plugging
modules in and out, the power supply of the
equipment has to be switched OFF.

Safety and monitoring facilities


Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates
DANGER must not be removed or by-passed.

9-2 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Back cover
Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER behind the back cover. Before removing the back
cover, the isolating terminals of the external cables
must be opened or the cables to the terminals must
be disconnected.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,


ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Using HMI570

Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using


certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commis-
sioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote
test mode).
However, when a user is logged in with only "view
permission", it is not possible to disable the device.

Common Interface G3LC


Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Relay Interface G3LR


Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level
DANGER on the module and the cable.
Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Laser / LED

Caution Class Laser/LED Product.


Laser / LED

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Caution Read the following safety instructions carefully


before attempting to locate faults.

Fault-finding may only be conducted by properly trained personnel


that have been authorized to do so.
It is not permitted to insert or withdraw modules during operation;
the power supply must be switched off first.
The modules contain CMOS integrated circuits that can be
damaged by electrostatic discharge. It is important to take certain
precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge before removing the
packing or withdrawing them from the racks. Indispensable
precautions to avoid ESD damage are earthing of people working
on the modules and a working surface that is protected against
electrostatic discharge. Only transport modules in their original
packing or installed in racks.
The modules are manufactured according to the latest SMD
technology. Repair at the component level is therefore neither
intended nor recommended. As a rule, corrective action is confined
to locating and replacing defective modules.
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connections to the modules
Common Interface G3LC and Relay Interface G3LR. Take care not
to touch these connections under any circumstances.
It is not permitted to modify the equipment in any way.

9.2. Fuses
Used fuses in the equipment (per power supply unit):
G3LH: 2.5 AT / 250 V (5 x 20 mm)

9-4 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

9.3. Alarms

9.3.1. Alarm concept


The alarm concept of the NSD570 system is designed to
- detect and locate the sources responsible for abnormal operation of
the system, and
- provide information about the kind of problems detected.
The NSD570 alarms are hierarchically organized, with high level
alarms on top and a variety of low level alarms at the bottom of the
hierarchy. Low level alarms are grouped into 3 categories:
- common alarms and relay interface alarms
- analog interface alarms
- digital interface alarms
Begin and end of all low level alarms are recorded with date/time
stamps by the event recorder integral to the NSD570.
The high level alarms can be signaled - with a configurable delay/hold
time - on the various outputs of the Relay Interfaces G3LR.
A number of alarms are generated by the HMI570. These HMI-alarms
are not mapped into high level alarms and cannot be routed to relay
outputs.
Three user alarms can be mapped on the outputs on G3LR. The alarm
sources to generate these user alarms can be configured individually
by logical OR-gating of any from the high level alarms "HW Alarm",
"HW Warning", "Link Alarm", "Transmit Alarm" and "Receive Alarm"
with some special alarms (Tx/Rx Signal, SNR/BER alarm). This is valid
for the local alarms as well as for the remote alarms (except for "HW
Warning").
The programmed pick up delay for the outputs will be activated by the
first configured alarm of the list that appears, and the hold time will be
counted down to zero when the last configured alarm in the list has
disappeared.
For each NSD570 in the rack there is an alarm relay with switch over
contacts available on the Common Interface G3LC. It is activated if
any of the local alarms of the corresponding device appear.
The programmed alarm pick-up and hold delay is valid for these
outputs too.

Note: The remote alarms are not signaled on the alarm


outputs of the local G3LC. But they are included in
the System Alarm which may be mapped on any
available output of the Relay Interfaces G3LR.

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

9.3.2. Alarm pick up and hold delay


The alarm pick-up time and the alarm hold time can be set in the range
from 1 15 seconds. They are valid for all alarms in common, i.e. for
the high level alarms and the user alarms, which are mapped on the
outputs of G3LR, and for the alarm relays on G3LC that reflect the
local alarm of the two devices in a rack.

9.3.2.1. High level alarms


The following table lists the high level alarms, their meaning and
output devices (red LEDs on equipment front; switch over contacts on
G3LR which are programmable by means of the HMI570):

High level Re- Meaning Displayed Output via


alarm mark by LED G3LR contact

HW Warning The equipment is operational, X X


but one of the redundant power Unit 1,
supply units (PSU) failed Unit 2

HW Alarm Signals that a hardware problem X X


in the equipment generating the OK / Fail
alarm has been detected (on the
modules
concerned)

Link Alarm Indicates that the quality of the X


received signal is insufficient.
Possible reasons are excessive
noise, low input level, interfe-
rence, faulty transmitter at the
remote side,

Transmit Alarm Signals a problem detected in the X X


equipment's transmit part Transmit

Receive Alarm Signals a problem detected in the X X


equipment's receive part Receive

Local Alarm 1) OR function of all alarms of the X X


local equipment Local
(except HW-Warning)

Remote Alarm 2) OR function of all alarms of the X X


remote equipment Remote
(except HW-Warning)

System Alarm Local Alarm OR Remote Alarm X

Table 9.1 High level alarms

Remarks:

1) For each line interface, a switch over contact is available on G3LC


2) The alarm is sent via EOC over the link to the remote equipment, so that the following
equation holds: Remote Alarm on Local Equipment = Local Alarm on Remote Equipment.

9-6 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

9.3.2.2. Low level common alarms and relay interface alarms


Self-testing routines continuously monitor the operational status of the
NSD570. Alarm is given in the following cases:
The system detects incompatibilities with the hardware used
(during startup)
The short circuit supervision for the two solid state outputs on the
relay interfaces has picked up (Imax > 2.5 A approx.)
Tx single component failure in one of the two input circuits on the
relay interfaces
HW Warning: undervoltage alarm of one of the two redundant
power supply modules
Alarm: cyclic loop test failure (after 3 unsuccessful attempts)
Rx single component failure (guard and command signals being
either received simultaneously or completely lost)
Tx command duration (if monitoring is enabled, the guard signal is
sent again after the configured maximum Tx command duration
time has elapsed)
Checksum error (internal and external program and data memory)
Internal system clock error / external synchronization error
External power supply and internal supply voltage failure
Real Time Bus communication error
Hardware and/or software configuration error
EOC checksum error
Alarm signal from the remote station
Local or remote test mode activated

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

The following table lists the low level common alarms and the relay
interface alarms, and shows their influence on the high level alarms.

High Level Alarm

Interface)
Transmit

OK / Fail
Warning

Receive
Remark

Remote

System
Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm
Local
Code

(Line
Link
HW

HW
Low Level Alarm
HW Release Common Interface and Bus Plane 0.20 X X X X OK
do not match
Overcurrent in MOSFET output 2 3) 0.19 X X X X OK
Overcurrent in MOSFET output 1 3) 0.18 X X X X OK
Single component failure input 2 3) 0.17 X X X X X OK
Single component failure input 1 3) 0.16 X X X X X OK
Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) 4) 0.14 OK
Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) 4) 0.13 OK
Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) 4) 0.12 OK
Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) 4) 0.11 OK
Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) 4) 0.10 OK
Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) 4) 0.9 OK
Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) 4) 0.8 OK
Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) 4) 0.7 OK
Micro controller FLASH verify error 0.5 X X X X Fail
5 V supply voltage failure 0.4 X X X X OK
Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 2 0.3 X OK
Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 1 0.2 X OK
Undervoltage alarm supply 2 5) 0.1 X X X X OK
Undervoltage alarm supply 1 6) 0.0 X X X X OK
Program memory internal CRC check failed 1.31 X X X X Fail
Program memory SDRAM CRC check failed 1.30 X X X X Fail
Data memory lookup table CRC check failed 1.29 X X X X Fail
Program memory internal CRC add. segment 1.28 X X X X Fail
failed
SDRAM data memory check failed 1.26 X X X X Fail
Internal data memory check failed 1.25 X X X X Fail
Program Memory micro controller CRC check 1.24 X X X X Fail
failed
Remote test mode active 1.21 X X X Flashing
Local test mode active 1.20 X X X Flashing
Wrong time from RTC 1.18 X X X OK
No signal (IRIG-B) on RTC 1.16 X X X OK
More Relay Interfaces configured than plugged 4) 1.12 X X X OK
Wrong slot for Line Interface 1.10 X X X X Fail
Configuration error 1.7 X X X X Fail
Link failure: command outputs set to a pre- 1.6 X X X X OK
defined state
Loop test error 1.5 X X X OK
Unblocking pulse 7) 1.4 OK

9-8 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

High Level Alarm

Interface)
Transmit

OK / Fail
Warning

Receive
Remark

Remote

System
Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm
Local
Code

(Line
Link
HW

HW
Low Level Alarm
Remote alarm 1.3 X OK
CRC failure EOC 1.2 X X X X OK
Simultaneous trip and guard received 1.1 X X X X OK
No trip and no guard 1.0 X X X X X OK
Tx continuous command H 4) 4.19 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command G 4) 4.18 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command F 4) 4.17 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command E 4) 4.16 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command D 4) 4.15 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command C 4) 4.14 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command B 4) 4.13 X X X X OK
Tx continuous command A 4) 4.12 X X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) 4) 4.11 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) 4) 4.10 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) 4) 4.9 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) 4) 4.8 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) 4) 4.7 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) 4) 4.6 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) 4) 4.5 X X X OK
Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) 4) 4.4 X X X OK
Continuous command alarm 4) 4.0 X X X X OK

Table 9.2 Low level common alarms and relay interface alarms

Remarks:

3) Only in combination with other relay interface alarms; the corresponding Ok / Fail LED of
the affected relay interface lights up red
4) Only in combination with other relay interface alarms
5) LED Supply Unit 2 lights red
6) LED Supply Unit 1 lights red
7) Generates an entry in the event recorder only and activates an output contact, if configured

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-9


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

9.3.2.3. Analog interface alarms


The following criteria are continuously monitored and produce alarms:
Tx signal level drop off below configured limit (- dB from nominal)
Rx signal level out of configured limits ( dB from nominal)
Signal-to-noise ratio too low (the threshold for the SNR alarm
depends on the setting of the bandwidth and the operating mode; in
general it is 3 dB above the specified value for Pmc < 1%)
Internal supply voltage failure

The following table lists the low level analog interface alarms, and
shows their influence on the high level alarms.

High Level Alarm

Interface)
Transmit

OK / Fail
Warning

Receive
Remark

Remote

System
Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm
Local
Code

(Line
Link
HW

HW

Low Level Alarm


SNR Alarm 2.6 X X X X X OK
Receive level alarm 2.5 X X X X X OK
Transmit level alarm 2.4 X X X X OK
+/- 12 V supply voltage failure 2.0 X X X X Fail

Table 9.3 Low level analog interface alarms

9.3.2.4. Digital interface alarms


The following criteria are continuously monitored and produce alarms:
FPGA initialization failure
Address error
Synchronization error
Bit error rate above the configured level
LOS Loss Of incoming Signal (G.703/E1/T1/Optical)
AIS Alarm Indication Signal (G.703/E1/T1)
LFA Loss of Frame Alignment (E1/T1)
RRA Receive Remote Alarm (E1/T1/Optical Direct Fiber)
Laser failure (G1LO)

9-10 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

The following criteria are monitored during start-up and produce


alarms:
Missing piggyback (if configured) or not supported by the firmware
loaded on G3LD
FPGA CRC/loading failure on G3LD
Specific E1/T1 framer errors on G1LE and G1LO (see list below)

The following table lists the low level digital interface alarms, and
shows their influence on the high level alarms.

High Level Alarm

Interface)
Transmit

OK / Fail
Warning

Receive
Remark

Remote

System
Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm
Local
Code

(Line
Link
HW

HW
Low Level Alarm
Laser Failure 3.28 X X X X X Fail
Remote equipment has wrong address 3.25 X X X X OK
BER Bit Error Rate alarm 3.24 X X X X X OK
Alarm Indication Signal G.703 3.21 X X X X X OK
Loss of Signal G.703 3.20 X X X X X OK
Pattern synchronization error 3.17 X X X X OK
Read error from E1/T1 framer 8) 3.13 X X X X Fail
Write error to E1/T1 framer 8) 3.12 X X X X Fail
Piggyback missing 3.8 X X X X Fail
LOS Loss of Signal 8) 3.7 X X X X X OK
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 3.6 X X X X X OK
LFA Loss of Frame Alignment 3.5 X X X X X OK
RRA Receive Remote Alarm 9) 3.4 X X OK
FW version does not support piggyback 3.3 X X X X Fail
Initialization failure in FPGA 3.2 X X X X Fail
CRC failure while loading FPGA 3.1 X X X X Fail
FPGA not loaded 3.0 X X X X Fail

Table 9.4 Low level digital interface alarms

Remarks:

8) Also applicable for Optical Interface G1LO (Optical Direct Fiber, Optical FOX/OTERM, Optical
IEEE C37.94).
9) Also applicable for Optical Interface G1LO (Optical Direct Fiber).

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-11


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

9.3.3. Problem localization


If for both equipment in a link the state of hardware alarms and link
alarms are known, the source of the problem can be localized to one
or several of the four major fault areas of a link marked in Fig. 9.1.
Table 9.5 shows how the affected areas can be found from the alarm
information.
Note that an equipments link alarm is only considered to be valid
when no hardware alarm is present.

Equipment A Equipment B
Channel A to B

Commands NSD570 NSD570 Commands


Channel B to A

9-Fault-location.vsd

Fig. 9.1 The four major fault location areas of an NSD570 link

Equipment A Equipment B

Hardware Link Hardware Link Problem localized in


Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
No No No No -
No No No Yes Channel A > B
No Yes No No Channel B > A
No Yes No Yes Channels B > A and A > B
Yes X No X Equipment A
No X Yes X Equipment B
Yes X Yes X Equipment A and B

Table 9.5 Alarm localization with link and hardware alarms

9-12 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

9.3.4. List of low level alarms and corrective actions


Once the problem has been localized, corrective actions are required
to eliminate the source of the problem. The following table lists all low
level alarms with explanations and proposed corrective actions (in
italic).
The alarms with entry HMI in column Alarm Code at the end of the
following table are generated by the user interface program HMI570.

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
HW Release Common Interface and Bus 0.20 Change the bus plane or the common interface board
Plane do not match (whichever does have a non-compatible hardware version).
Refer to document 1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements
NSD570
Overcurrent in MOSFET output 2 0.19 This error appears always in conjunction with at least one
Error Relay Interface (Alarm Code 0.7 to 0.14) that
indicates the plug-in position of the affected relay board(s).
1. Disconnect the external cable from the affected relay
interface and check whether the alarm disappears.
Overcurrent in MOSFET output 1 0.18
2. If after step 1 the alarm does not disappear, check for short
circuits between the wires connected to output 1 or 2 of the
affected boards. Decrease the externally applied voltage or
increase the load impedance at output 1 or 2 of the affected
relay interface.
Single component failure input 2 0.17 A hardware error on input 1 or 2 of one or more of the relay
interfaces has been detected. This error appears always in
conjunction with at least one Error Relay Interface (Alarm
Single component failure input 1 0.16 Code 0.7 to 0.14) that indicates the plug-in position of the
affected relay board(s).
Replace the affected relay interface(s).
Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) 0.14 Indicates the plug-in position of the relay interface(s)
Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) 0.13 generating at least one of the following low level alarms:

Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) 0.12 - Overcurrent in MOSFET output 2 (Alarm Code 0.19),
- Overcurrent in MOSFET output 1 (Alarm Code 0.18),
Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) 0.11
- Single component failure input 2 (Alarm Code 0.17),
Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) 0.10
- Single component failure input 1 (Alarm Code 0.16).
Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) 0.9
Follow the instructions given for these low level alarms.
Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) 0.8
Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) 0.7
Micro-controller FLASH verify error 0.5 Error during startup of the DSP / micro controller on the line
interface, indicating a hardware defect of the micro controller or
FLASH memory.
Replace the line interface
5 V supply voltage failure 0.4 Supply on Common Interface faulty or contact problems at the
connector.
Check connectors to busplane, replace module rack.
Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 2 0.3 Replace defective power supply module 2
Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 1 0.2 Replace defective power supply module 1

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-13


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
Undervoltage alarm supply 2 0.1 Burden for supply module 2 too high (secondary short circuit),
supply monitoring on common interface defective, supply
module defective or no primary voltage.
Watch the Supply LEDs while troubleshooting:
pull out each individual module, otherwise replace power
supply unit 2, otherwise replace module rack.
Undervoltage alarm supply 1 0.0 Burden for supply module 1 too high (secondary short circuit),
supply monitoring on common interface defective, supply
module defective or no primary voltage.
Watch the Supply LEDs while troubleshooting:
pull out each individual module, otherwise replace power
supply unit 1, otherwise replace module rack.

Program memory internal CRC check failed 1.31 Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line
interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
Program memory SDRAM CRC check failed 1.30 Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line
interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
Data memory lookup table CRC check failed 1.29 Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line
interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
Program memory internal CRC add. 1.28 Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line
segment failed interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
SDRAM data memory check failed 1.26 Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line
interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
Internal data memory check failed 1.25 Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line
interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
Program Memory micro-controller CRC 1.24 Indicating a hardware defect of the micro-controller FLASH
check failed memory on the line interface.
If persistent: replace the line interface.
Remote test mode active 1.21 The remote test mode is still active.
Deactivate the remote test mode and conclude testing /
commissioning activities before leaving the equipment.
Local test mode active 1.20 The local test mode is still active.
Deactivate the local test mode and conclude testing /
commissioning activities before leaving the equipment.
Wrong time from RTC 1.18 If no externally sync time (GPS Sync = IRIG-B) is available or
card never operated before or not powered up for several days
-> internal time not valid
Set time
If externally sync time (GPS Sync = IRIG-B)
Check timing source and connections
No signal (IRIG-B) on RTC 1.16 Check timing source and connections

9-14 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
More Relay Interfaces configured than 1.12 This error appears always in conjunction with at least one
plugged Comm. error Relay Interface (Alarm Code 4.4 to 4.11) that
indicates the plug-in position of the affected relay board(s).
Plug missing relay interfaces or replace defective ones. Refer
to same time appearing alarms Comm. error Relay Interface
for finding faulty or missing boards.
Reset the equipment using HMI570.
Wrong slot for Line Interface 1.10 Use correct slot
Initialization alarm during startup 1.9 Error during startup of the line interface, indicating a hardware
defect of the DSP.
If persistent, replace the line interface.
Configuration error 1.7 Invalid configuration or board was not configured
Download valid configuration. If persistent, replace line
interface.
Link failure: command outputs set to a pre- 1.6 Check link
defined state
Loop test error 1.5 Check link, check settings, check hardware.
Unblocking pulse 1.4 Unblocking condition occurred (visible in event recorder only)
Remote alarm 1.3 Error in the remote device.
CRC failure EOC 1.2 Communication error in the EOC.
If persistent, check link.
Simultaneous trip and guard received 1.1 Check link.
No trip and no guard 1.0 Check link, check connections.

SNR Alarm 2.6 Check link.


Receive level alarm 2.5 Check link, check connections.
Transmit level alarm 2.4 Check connections for possible short circuits / overload,
disconnect cable; if still alarm, replace line interface
+/- 12 V supply voltage failure 2.0 Indicating a hardware defect of the internal 12 V supply on the
analog line interface
Replace the analog line interface if the error persists.

Laser Failure 3.28 The laser does not run properly due to a hardware problem.
Replace the optical interface G1LO.
Remote equipment has wrong address 3.25 The device address in the configuration file does not match
with the device address of the remote equipment.
Correct the device address in the configuration file or in the
remote equipment, so that they match.
BER Bit Error Rate alarm 3.24 The communication channel is distorted.
Find the reason for the distortion in the channel or increase the
BER Alarm Threshold in the configuration file.
Alarm Indication Signal G.703 3.21 The Alarm Indication Signal (all 1s bit pattern) according to
G.703 is received, generated by some multiplexer on the
communication channel.
Check the communication channel and correct the problem.

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-15


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
Loss Of Signal G.703 3.20 There is a problem with the communication channel: The
received signal level is insufficient or the channel is interrupted.
Check the wiring of the communication channel and check the
signal at the receiver input. Correct the communication
problem.
Pattern synchronization error 3.17 There is a synchronization problem or the communication
channel is distorted.
Check the synchronization settings of the local and the remote
device. Find the reason for the distortion in the channel and
correct the problem.
Read error from E1/T1 framer 3.13 The E1/T1 framer cannot be read due to a hardware problem.
Replace the digital line interface G3LD, otherwise replace the
E1/T1 interface G1LE or the optical interface G1LO.
Write error to E1/T1 framer 3.12 The E1/T1 framer cannot be written due to a hardware
problem.
Replace the digital line interface G3LD, otherwise replace the
E1/T1 interface G1LE or the optical interface G1LO.
Piggyback missing 3.8 An interface requiring a piggyback module has been
configured, but the piggyback module is not plugged.
Reconfigure the device or plug the piggyback module.
LOS Loss Of Signal 3.7 There is a problem with the communication channel: The
received signal level is insufficient or the channel is interrupted.
Check the wiring of the communication channel and check the
signal at the receiver input. Correct the communication
problem.
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 3.6 The Alarm Indication Signal (all 1s bit pattern) is present in the
received E1/T1 data, generated by some multiplexer on the
communication channel.
Check the communication channel and correct the problem.
LFA Loss of Frame Alignment 3.5 There is a synchronization problem or the communication
channel is distorted.
Check the synchronization settings of the local and the remote
device. Find the reason for the distortion in the channel and
correct the problem.
RRA Receive Remote Alarm 3.4 The remote equipment reports an error in the E1/T1 or Optical
Direct Fiber interface.
Check the E1/T1/Optical Direct Fiber settings of both the
remote or local device or replace the remote or local digital line
interface or replace the remote or local E1/T1 interface or the
optical interface.
FW version does not support piggyback 3.3 Update the firmware of the digital line interface to a version
that supports the piggyback. Refer to documents
1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570 and
1KHW000896 Firmware Download Description NSD570.
Initialization failure in FPGA 3.2 Some hardware in the digital line interface could not be
initialized.
Reset the equipment using HMI570. If the error persists,
replace the digital line interface.

9-16 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
CRC failure while loading FPGA 3.1 Some hardware in the digital line interface could not be
initialized.
Reset the equipment using HMI570. If the error persists,
replace the digital line interface.
FPGA not loaded 3.0 A hardware fault in the digital line interface has been detected.
Replace the digital line interface.

Tx continuous command H 4.19 The continuous command monitoring for the corresponding
Tx continuous command G 4.18 command (A H) is enabled and the maximum duration as
configured by HMI570 has been exceeded. This error appears
Tx continuous command F 4.17
always in conjunction with the Continuous command alarm
Tx continuous command E 4.16 (Alarm Code 4.0).
Tx continuous command D 4.15 Verify that the continuous command monitoring / maximum
Tx continuous command C 4.14 duration of the corresponding command (A H) as configured
Tx continuous command B 4.13 by HMI570 is correct or change the settings of the equipment
generating the command so that it is not longer than allowed.
Tx continuous command A 4.12
Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) 4.11 Either the corresponding relay interface is not plugged, the
Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) 4.10 relay interface is faulty or there is a problem with the connector
of the relay interface to the bus plane.
Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) 4.9
Plug the relay interface or if already plugged check its
Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) 4.8
connector to the bus plane. If the error persists, replace the
Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) 4.7 relay interface. If this does not help, replace the module rack.
Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) 4.6
Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) 4.5
Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) 4.4
Continuous command alarm 4.0 The maximum command duration as configured by HMI570
has been exceeded for one or several of the configured
commands. This error appears always in conjunction with at
least one Tx continuous command (Alarm Code 4.12 to
4.19).
Verify that the maximum command duration as configured by
HMI570 is correct or change the settings of the equipment
generating the commands so that they are not longer than
allowed.

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-17


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
Error! Alarm upload failed HMI HMI570 could not upload the alarms from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Can not connect to device HMI Refer to Section 4.10.7.1
Error! Communication incorrectly initialized HMI Refer to Section 4.10.7.2
Error! Configuration download failed HMI HMI570 could not download the configuration to the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Configuration file is invalid HMI The selected file is not a valid configuration file.
Try to load a valid configuration file.
Error! Configuration is invalid HMI The configuration is not valid.
Correct the settings to remove the detected conflicts given in
the warning text.
Error! Configuration load failed HMI HMI570 could not load the selected configuration from disk.
Check permissions for reading from the specified directory of
the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Configuration save failed HMI HMI570 could not save the configuration to disk.
Check permissions for writing to the specified directory of the
disk. Check the disk.
Error! Configuration upload failed HMI HMI570 could not upload the configuration from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Could not save HMI570 Options HMI HMI570 could not save the changed RS-232 port parameter.
You will have the default settings the next time you start the
HMI570.
Check permissions for writing to the HMI570 directory of the
disk. Check the disk.
Error! Device communication failed HMI The communication between the HMI570 and the device failed.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Device communication is busy! Please HMI Refer to Section 4.10.7.2
try it later again
Error! Device communication timeout HMI Refer to Section 4.10.7.2
Error! Device communication, device reports HMI A communication error or a compatibility problem has probably
wrong checksum occurred.
Error! Device communication, device reports HMI Retry the operation.
wrong end byte If the error persists, make sure that HMI570 and the line
Error! Device communication, device trans- HMI interface generating the alarm are compatible, using document
mission restart 1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570.

Error! Device could not execute this function HMI


Error! Device does not allow this function HMI
Error! Device reports unknown function HMI
Error! Disconnection failed HMI HMI570 could not disconnect from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.

9-18 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
Error! DSP boot failure HMI On the DSP interface, the DSP could not boot correctly due to
a hardware problem.
Replace the DSP interface.
Error! Event recorder contains invalid data HMI The event recorder contains invalid data and cannot be
uploaded by the HMI570.
Try to upload a smaller number of events. If that does not
work, you have to clear the event recorder.
Error! Event recorder file is invalid HMI The selected file is not a valid event recorder file.
Try to load a valid event recorder file.
Error! Event recorder load failed HMI HMI570 could not load the selected event recorder from disk.
Check permissions for reading from the specified directory of
the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Event recorder save failed HMI HMI570 could not save the event recorder to disk.
Check permissions for writing to the specified directory of the
disk. Check the disk.
Error! Event recorder upload failed HMI HMI570 could not upload the event recorder from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! File can not be saved or loaded HMI HMI570 cannot save or load a file.
Save error: Check permissions for reading from and writing to
the specified directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Firmware download failed HMI HMI570 could not download the selected firmware to the
device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! No configuration loaded HMI A configuration must be loaded.
Load a configuration from disk or upload a configuration from
device.
Error! No device connected HMI A device must be connected.
Connect to the device, if this fails:
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Send task failed HMI HMI570 could not send a task to the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Status upload failed HMI HMI570 could not upload the Status from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! The device is already connected by HMI Refer to Section 4.10.7.2
another user/application
Error! This configuration version is not HMI The installed HMI570 version does not support the version of
supported the configuration running on the device.
Update the HMI570 to the newest version.
Error! Time and date upload failed HMI HMI570 could not upload the time and date from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-19


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Low Level Alarm Alarm Explanation


Code Corrective Action
Error! Trip counter upload failed HMI HMI570 could not upload the trip counter from the device.
Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device.
Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Upload failed (wrong length) HMI HMI570 could not upload the configuration from the device.
Error! Wrong configuration checksum HMI Retry the operation.
Error! Wrong configuration length HMI If the error persists, make sure that HMI570 and the line
interface generating the alarm are compatible, using document
1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570.
Error! You don't have the permission to HMI A user without modify permission is not allowed to execute
execute this function ! some functions.
Refer to Section 4.10.5
Invalid password HMI Password during user login is not correct.
Type in the correct password or ask a user with admin
permission to change it.
Password must be at least 4 characters long HMI Use a password that is at least 4 characters long
You are not registered HMI The HMI570 does not know the user name.
Check that you typed the user name correct. If you are not
registered, ask a user with admin permission to add you as a
new user, refer to Section 4.10.5.

Table 9.6 Low level alarms with explanation and corrective actions

9.3.5. Alarm event recorder


The event recorder is described in detail in Section 3.5.10.
All alarm events available in the system are recorded continuously in
the nonvolatile memory of G3LA or G3LD with date and time stamps
supplied by the internal real time clock (RTC) of the equipment.
The following events are recorded:
changes of the alarm status of the system,
commands or loop tests sent/received,
external manipulations to the equipment, e.g. when the internal
clock is set or a new configuration is downloaded.
The RTC has an autonomy of about 12 hours. If the power supply to
the equipment is switched off for more than 12 hours, the time-stamp
supplied by the RTC will no longer be correct. Note that the RTC can
be synchronized to an external clock source via two special inputs
available on the Supply Backplane G1LB (refer to Section 3.5.10.5 and
Section 6.5.3.2).
Up to 7500 alarm events are recorded. If this number is exceeded, the
oldest events are discarded.

9-20 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

9.3.6. Alarm polling

Note: This function is available only in association with the


LAN Interface G3LL!

The alarm polling facility allows to monitor the alarm status of a


number of NSD570 terminals connected to the station bus. The alarm
status of the addressed terminals is polled in selectable intervals and
in case of any alarm, the alarm text is recorded to a log file and
displayed on the screen.
Once a list of NSD570 terminals to be polled has been configured, the
alarm polling can be switched on and off. With alarm polling enabled,
all devices in the list are polled at specified intervals (daily, hourly,
every xx minutes) and the alarms coming back if any are written to
the log file with date and time stamps.
If a device cannot be reached, a communication error will be recorded
for that device.
If a specific device in the network has to be connected via the HMI570,
the alarm polling function has to be switched off first.
All low level alarms are reported via alarm polling and can be viewed
on screen or in the log file.
A detailed description and the configuration of the HMI570 LAN for
setting up the Alarm Polling can be found in Section 4.10.13 of these
Operating Instructions.

9.4. Warnings
Warnings are used to signal that an equipment is not in normal
operation state, but otherwise working properly.
A warning is given from the NSD570 system when one of the two
power supply modules in the redundant configuration fails (under-
voltage detector on Common Interface G3LC activated).

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-21


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

9.5. Some basic checks


It is advisable to do the following basic checks before energizing a
teleprotection link. This minimizes the chance of a fault in the first
place and also reduces the time for troubleshooting in case there is
any.
Check of the communication line (as described in Section 7.2),
especially if the NSD570 Analog is used in the frequency band of a
PLC link.
Ensure that the wires are properly connected to the equipment.
Check that Tx and Rx lines are cross-connected to the
communication devices or to the remote equipment in a point-to-
point configuration.
Check whether the supply voltage to be applied to the equipment is
correct.
Ensure that all the modules are properly inserted in their intended
slots.
Check that the external connections are correct as per plant
drawings.

9-22 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

9.6. Frequently asked questions

9.6.1. General
Question:
The "Connect" operation is not successful. What can I do to correct
this problem?
Answer:
Check all hardware and its settings forming the communication path,
starting at the PC/notebook and ending at the equipment. The Section
"Communication between the HMI570 and the NSD570" in Section 4.5
gives the relevant information. If the communication path is made up of
several sections as in case of connection via modem, intranet/internet,
dedicated data channel and/or via EOC, proceed in steps, checking
the path sections in sequence starting at the side of the PC/notebook.
Question:
The "Connect" operation is still not successful. What else can I do to
correct this problem?
Answer:
Maybe the device address used is incorrect. Try the default device
addresses: use 241 for the device plugged in TPE 1 respectively 246
for TPE 2. Note that the station bus of the rack must be disconnected.
This is because all devices plugged in TPE 1 respectively TPE 2 share
the same default address. If the "Connect Device" was successful, the
programmed device address is shown and automatically used for the
next interactions (e.g. Configuration Upload From Device).
Question:
The "Connect" operation is again not successful. What else can I do to
correct this problem?
Answer:
For some reasons (e.g. a boot failure of the device indicated by the red
Fail LED and all others off) it is only possible to connect the device
with address 255. It is required to disconnect the station bus and plug
off one line interface in the rack first, before connecting with 255 to the
other line interface. After successfully connecting the device with
address 255, a firmware download has to be executed, see Section
4.8.11.7 Firmware Download. If the problem still exists, replace the
corresponding line interface module.

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-23


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Question:
The teleprotection link does not work. What can I do to correct this
problem?
Answer:
Check the alarms: If there is a hardware alarm at either side of the link,
the reason of it must be found and the problem corrected. Upload the
equipment status/alarm and study the alarm messages given by the
HMI570. One single problem can produce a number of such
messages.
If for both equipment of the link no hardware alarms are reported
(anymore), the problem has to be sought in the link. Upload the
equipment status/alarm and study the alarm messages given by the
HMI570. It may be possible to restrict the problem to one of the
following 3 cases:
1. excessive signal attenuation (voltage level at the analog or digital
receiver too low),
2. excessive line noise or bit errors,
3. excessive distortion or jitter.
Find and correct the source(s) of the problems by measuring at
different points along the communication line with data testers (for
NSD570 Digital) or level generators/selective level meters (for
NSD570 Analog).
Question:
Some alarms are present, signaled by alarm relay contacts and/or
alarm LEDs.
Answer:
Upload status/alarm data to see the details about the causes of the
alarms. If both hardware and link alarms are present, first remove the
cause of the hardware alarm. After this has been done, upload system
status once again and if a link alarm should still be present find the
cause of the link alarm. Check whether the alarm threshold levels are
appropriate.
Question:
Why do the AF levels and the SNR level displayed by the status of the
HMI570 fluctuate?
Answer:
The level will vary approx. 2.5 dB because the guard signal is
modulated to transmit data via the EOC. The SNR value displayed by
the HMI570 will vary as well, depending on the packets transmitted via
the EOC. The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level
measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if the EOC is
switched off!

9-24 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Question:
How can I calculate the guard and trip frequencies of the NSD570
Analog for the various operating modes and channel center
frequencies?
Answer:
See Section 3.5.4. Analog Operating Modes.
Question:
How are the outputs on the Relay Interface G3LR operated, if they are
configured as alarm outputs? And what about the LEDs of the outputs
on the front panel?
Answer:
The relay contacts on G3LR are operated in the same way than the
alarm relays on the Common Interface G3LC, i.e. the alarm condition
is the same as the power off state of the equipment (relay coil not
energized). On both modules the user can still choose by using the
corresponding output contacts - whether the alarm contact shall be
normally open or normally closed.
The solid-state outputs are operated differently. An alarm condition is
signaled with a conducting (energized) FET. Therefore the alarm
condition is not the same as the power off state of the equipment.
Both type of output contacts are activated only after the programmed
alarm delay time has elapsed. The same applies for the alarm hold
time.
The LEDs of the outputs on G3LR correspond with the state of the
contacts, i.e. they also light up only if the alarm delay time has elapsed
and they will light on for the duration of the alarm hold time.

9.6.2. Where can I get the latest version of this FAQ?


Send e-mail to:
utility.communications@ch.abb.com

Troubleshooting April 2004 9-25


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

9.7. Replacing faulty modules


Modules may only be replaced by properly trained personnel
authorized to do so. Strictly observe the safety instructions at the
beginning of this Section.
Except for the power supply G3HL, modules may not be withdrawn or
inserted while the equipment is in operation. Switch off the power
supply and disconnect external cables first.
As stated earlier, replacement of faulty items can be done only at
module level and not component level since surface mount technology
is used for components of most of the modules. While replacing a
faulty module with a new module, ensure that the fault is not due to
some incorrect external wiring or mode of operation. Else even the
new module will go faulty. Remember to program correct jumper
settings (if any) on the new module before replacement.

9.8. Returning modules for repair


A module identified and confirmed to be faulty should be sent for
repairs to ABB. It should be packed preferably in the original packing
or in anti-static bags with additional mechanical protection to avoid
damage during transport. It should be accompanied by a short
description of the observed fault.
ABB is not responsible for a module received which was damaged
during transport. The financial implications of the repairs depends
upon the agreement with the client.
Refer to document 1KHM010296 - Repair and Return Procedure in
the Appendix.

9.9. Support
Refer to document 1KHM010297 - Need Support for your Communi-
cation System? in the Appendix.

9-26 April 2004 Troubleshooting


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal

10.1. Safety instructions ................................................................. 10-2

10.2. Storage .................................................................................. 10-3

10.3. Decommissioning .................................................................. 10-3

10.4. Disposal ................................................................................. 10-3

Storage, decommissioning and disposal April 2004 10-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal

10.1. Safety instructions

Personnel qualification
An authorized and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out installing, programming,
commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting and
work of the equipment.

Mechanical Installation
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip


DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,


ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Electrical Installation
The circuit breaker for the power supply of the
DANGER equipment must be switched OFF.
The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the
cabinet must be switched OFF.

Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or


DANGER from the equipment.

The isolating terminals of the external cables must


DANGER be kept open during installation, maintenance and
before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

10-2 April 2004 Storage, decommissioning and disposal


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

10.2. Storage
The equipment must be stored at a temperature between -40 C and
+70 C and a relative humidity < 95 %, non-condensing.
The cabinet should be stored in its original wooden frame and plastic
cover. Make sure that the plastic cover is undamaged. Where the
equipment has to be stored for a long period, precautions to prevent
corrosion must be taken. This is especially important in humid
climates.
Modules should be stored preferably in their original packing with an
outer packing to protect against mechanical damage.

10.3. Decommissioning
The procedure for decommissioning the equipment is as follows:
First of all, the application in which the equipment is used, must be
disabled. This is of special importance when protection signaling is
concerned.
Switch off the circuit breaker controlling the power supply to the
equipment (OFF). Disconnect the power supply cable from the
equipment. Repeat for redundant power supply, if applicable.
Open the isolating terminals from the external cables.
Disconnect the external wiring according to the respective wiring
lists and diagrams to avoid any risk of disconnecting other
equipment by mistake.
If the complete cabinet has to be removed, support it in a way that
it cannot fall over when its anchoring is undone and remove the
bolts holding the base frame. The cabinet can then be lifted out
and dismantled. Should no suitable support for the cabinet be
available, it should be laid down horizontally.
If the NSD570 rack has to be removed from the cabinet,
disconnect the internal wiring between the NSD570 rack and the
terminal blocks in the cabinet. Then remove the screws holding
the rack at the front and withdraw the rack.
If it is intended to use an NSD570 rack somewhere else, carefully
pack it while observing the ESD rules.

10.4. Disposal
When disposing of the equipment, do so in strict accordance with
regional and national regulations for the disposal of electrical and
electronic components.
The modular construction of the equipment enables the printed circuit
boards and housings to be easily separated for recycling.

Storage, decommissioning and disposal April 2004 10-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

LAN Interface G3LL

Caution For disposal of the lithium battery, the regional and


national regulations for electrical and electronic
waste have to be observed.

10-4 April 2004 Storage, decommissioning and disposal


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

11. Appendices

11.1. Abbreviations ......................................................................... 11-2

11.2. Order numbers....................................................................... 11-4

11.3. Photographs .......................................................................... 11-7


11.3.1. Front view of NSD570............................................................ 11-7
11.3.2. Rear view of NSD570 ............................................................ 11-7

11.4. Dimension Drawing Module Rack G7BI................................. 11-8

Appendices April 2004 11-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

11. Appendices

11.1. Abbreviations

AC Alternating Current
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AF Audio Frequency
AWG American Wire Gauge
BER Bit Error Rate
C Common (terminal of switchover relays)
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EOC Embedded Operation Channel
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
HF High Frequency
HMI Human Machine Interface
HTML Hyper Text Markup Language
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
IEC International Engineering Consortium
IP Internet Protocol
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union
Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOS Loss Of Signal
MC /C Micro Controller
HMI570 NSD570 User Interface Program

11-2 April 2004 Appendices


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

N.A. / n.a. Not Applicable or Not Available


NC Normally Closed (terminal of switchover relays)
NO Normally Open (terminal of switchover relays)
PC Personal Computer
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Protective Earth
PLC Power Line Carrier
(communication via the high-voltage line)
RD Receive Data
RF Radio Frequency
RMS Root Mean Square
RT Receive Timing
RT-Bus Real Time Bus
RTC Real Time Clock
Rx Receive(r)
SD Send Data
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SMD Surface Mounted Device
SNR Signal to noise ratio
ST Send Timing
STP Shielded Twisted Pairs
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TPE Teleprotection Equipment
TT Terminal Timing
Tx Transmit(ter)
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pairs
WAN Wide Area Network

Appendices April 2004 11-3


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

11.2. Order numbers


Type Description Order number

Basic Equipment

NSD570 NSD570*BASIC EQUIPMENT ANALOG 1KHW000913R0001


Analog Consists of G7BI, G3LH, G3LA, G3LR (one each)

NSD570 NSD570*BASIC EQUIPMENT DIGITAL 1KHW000914R0001


Digital Consists of G7BI, G3LH, G3LD, G3LR (one each)

Module Rack

G7BI G7BI*MODULE RACK NSD570 1KHW000911R0001

Display Panel

G1LC G1LC*DISPLAY PANEL NSD570 1KHW001018R0001

Power Supply

G3LH G3LH*POWER SUPPLY NSD570 1KHW000909R0001

Interface Cards

G3LA G3LA*ANALOG INTERFACE NSD570 1KHW000884R0101

G3LD G3LD*DIGITAL INTERFACE NSD570 1KHW000886R0102

G1LE G1LE*E1/T1 INTERFACE NSD570 1KHW000888R0001

G1LO G1LO*OPTICAL INTERFACE OTERM/P2P 1KHW000965R0001


NSD570

G1LO G1LO*OPTICAL INTERFACE IEEE C37.94 1KHW000965R0010


NSD570

G3LR G3LR*RELAY INTERFACE NSD570 1KHW000880R0101

G1LR G1LR*INPUT TRIPPING VOLTAGE NSD570 1KHW000882R0001

Electrical Connecting Cables

G3LA*CABLE FOR ANALOG INTERFACE 1KHW000664R0001

G1LB*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC 1KHW000668R0001

G3LC*CABLE FOR ALARM RELAYS 1KHW000658R0001

G3LD*CABLE WITH X.21 INTERFACE (15-P) 1KHW000670R0001

G3LD*CABLE WITH RS-530 INTERFACE (25-P) 1KHW000669R0001

G3LD*CABLE WITH RS-449 INTERFACE (37-P) 1KHW000671R0001

G3LD*CABLE WITH ISOLATING TERMINALS 1KHW000662R0001

G3LD*CABLE FOR G.703/E1/T1 INTERFACE 1KHW001003R0001

G3LR*CABLE FOR RELAY INTERFACE 1KHW000659R0001

11-4 April 2004 Appendices


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Type Description Order number

Optical Connecting Cables

V9WP*FOC-CB SM 2F INTERN E2000-FC/PC 2M (2m) 1KHW000580R0002 1

V9WQ*FOC-CB SM 2F INTERN E2000-E2000 2M (2m) 1KHW000581R0002 1

V9WR*FOC-CB SM 2F EXTERN E2000-FC/PC 10M (10m) 1KHW000582R0010 1

V9WS*FOC-CB SM 2F EXTERN E2000-E2000 10M (10m) 1KHW000583R0010 1

LAN Interface

G3LL G3LL*LAN INTERFACE NSD570 1KHW001016R0001

G3LL*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC 1KHW001213R0001

Software and Documentation

NSD570*SOFTWARE & DOCUMENTATION CD 1KHW000925R0100

BRO Brochure NSD570 1KHA000746-SEN

BAL Operating Instructions NSD570 1KHW000890

DS Technical Data NSD570 1KHW000892

Software Installation Description HMI570 1KHW000894

Firmware Download Description NSD570 1KHW000896

PTI Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570 1KHW000898

CI Commissioning Instructions NSD570 1KHW000900

Compatibility Requirements NSD570 1KHW000902

Anomaly List NSD570 1KHW000904

Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL 1KHW001289

Copy Instructions Compact Flash Card G3LL 1KHW001291

Repair and Return Procedure 1KHM010296

Support Document 1KHM010297

Table 11.1 Order numbers

1 Other length available on request:


order number above plus R00xx where xx = length in meters.

Appendices April 2004 11-5


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

Type Description Order number

Optional items

For G7BI ESD EARTHING SET 4.5MM 1KHW000330R0001


(conductive bonded wrist strap for connection to
the ESD bonding point EBP at the rear of the rack)

For G7BI NSD570*STANDARD ACCESSORIES 1KHW001039R0001


(one set is delivered with each module rack)

For Special screwdriver from PHOENIX CONTACT SZS 0,6 x 3,5


modules (for releasing the tension spring of the connectors) Order No. 12 05 05 3

For cables Special screwdriver from PHOENIX CONTACT SZF 1 - 0,6 x 3,5
(for releasing the tension spring of the terminals) Order No. 12 04 51 7

Table 11.2 Order numbers accessories

11-6 April 2004 Appendices


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

11.3. Photographs

11.3.1. Front view of NSD570


The front view of NSD570 (see below) shows a fully equipped rack
with two redundant power supply modules (not in sight) and two
teleprotection equipment each with four relay interfaces.

Fig. 11.1 Front view of NSD570

11.3.2. Rear view of NSD570


The rear view of NSD570 (see below) shows the same equipment as
mentioned above with optionally available cables.

Fig. 11.2 Rear view of NSD570

Appendices April 2004 11-7


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000890-EN NSD570

11.4. Dimension Drawing Module Rack G7BI


All dimensions are in [mm].

Fig. 11.3 Front view

Fig. 11.4 Top view

11-8 April 2004 Appendices


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

Fig. 11.5 Side view

Appendices April 2004 11-9


NSD570 1KHW000890-EN ABB Switzerland Ltd

April 2004

12. Annex

Technical Data NSD570 1KHW000892

Software Installation Description HMI570 1KHW000894

Firmware Download Description NSD570 1KHW000896

Programming and
Testing Instructions NSD570 1KHW000898

Commissioning Instructions NSD570 1KHW000900

Compatibility Requirements NSD570 1KHW000902

Anomaly List NSD570 1KHW000904

Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL 1KHW001289

Copy Instructions Compact Flash Card G3LL 1KHW001291

Repair and Return procedure 1KHM010296

Support Document 1KHM010297

Annex April 2004 12-1


ABB Switzerland Ltd

TECHNICAL DATA NSD570

The teleprotection equipment NSD570 complies with EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low-Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC.

NSD570 complies with or exceeds the requirements according to IEC publication 60834-1 "Teleprotection
Equipment of Power Systems - Performance and Testing Part 1: Command Systems.

Contents:

1. System Overview...........................................................................................................................................2
2. Analog System Data......................................................................................................................................2
3. Digital System Data.......................................................................................................................................4
4. Common System Data ..................................................................................................................................5
5. Special Operating Modes ..............................................................................................................................6
6. Analog Interface (G3LA)................................................................................................................................7
7. Digital Line Interfaces (G3LD) .......................................................................................................................8
7.1. G.703 Codirectional Interface .............................................................................................................8
7.2. RS-422 Interface .................................................................................................................................9
7.3. E1/T1 Interface (G1LE) .....................................................................................................................10
7.4. Optical Interface (G1LO) ...................................................................................................................12
8. Relay Interface (G3LR) ...............................................................................................................................14
9. Power Supply (G3LH) .................................................................................................................................15
10. Common Interface (G3LC) ..........................................................................................................................16
11. Bus Plane With Front Cover (G1LA) ...........................................................................................................17
12. Supply Backplane (G1LB) ...........................................................................................................................17
13. Internal Tripping Voltage (G1LR) ................................................................................................................17
14. LCD Display Panel (G1LC) .........................................................................................................................17
15. LAN Interface Data (G3LL)..........................................................................................................................18
16. HMI570 User Interface ................................................................................................................................18
16.1. HMI570 LAN ...................................................................................................................................18
16.2. HMI570 PC .....................................................................................................................................19
17. Alarms .........................................................................................................................................................20
18. Event Recorder and Counters.....................................................................................................................21
19. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .........................................................................................................21
19.1. Electrical Safety ................................................................................................................................21
19.2. Emission............................................................................................................................................21
19.3. Immunity............................................................................................................................................21
19.4. Insulation ...........................................................................................................................................22
20. Mechanical Data, Dimensions and Weights................................................................................................23
21. Ambient Conditions .....................................................................................................................................24
21.1. Operation...........................................................................................................................................24
21.2. Transport ...........................................................................................................................................24
21.3. Storage..............................................................................................................................................24

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 1 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Application Transmission of protection commands for:


Line protection
- permissive tripping
- direct tripping
- blocking
Transformer protection (direct tripping)
Breaker failure protection (direct tripping)
Reactor and generator protection (direct tripping)

Operating mode Full duplex, bi-directional


- Point-to-point
- Point-to-multipoint for the protection of lines with T-offs
Communication medium analog and digital channels, fiberoptic channels
- pilot wires
- leased lines
- voice frequency channels of analog or digital communication systems
- PLC links
- data channels of digital multiplexers
- E1 or T1 circuits (SDH or SONET multiplexers)
- microwave radio links
Number of NSD570 in one rack 1 or 2
Mix of analogue and digital systems in the same rack in any combination
Mechanical design 19 inch rack, 4 height units (4U) including 1U for cable tray
2 slots for single or redundant power supply
2 x 5 slots for one line interface and up to 4 relay interfaces
Optional LCD front display panel
Optional Ethernet/LAN/WEB interface

2. ANALOG SYSTEM DATA

Number of commands 1, 2, 3 or 4 independent, simultaneous, in any combination


commands individually configurable blocking, permissive or direct tripping
free command allocation to one or more output contacts
Bandwidth programmable 120, 240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
Channel center frequencies programmable from 360 Hz to 3900 Hz in steps of 60 Hz
Frequency stability 1 Hz
Line interface analogue, type G3LA 4-wire or 2-wire circuit, full duplex operation
impedance 600 Ohm or high impedance
Command power boosting
Boost criterion free contact closes simultaneously with command transmission
Power boosting ratio selectable via HMI570 0 to 9 dB in steps of 1 dB
Operating modes 1 or 2 single-tone command(s) Command signal: single tone
Guard signal: single tone
Test signal: single tone
1 to 4 dual tone commands Command signal: 2 simultaneous tones
Guard signal: single tone
Test signal: 2 simultaneous tones
Admissible gain distortion for dual tone commands 3 dB (between the two tones)

Embedded Operation Channel (EOC)

- Configuration and monitoring of the opposite station from the local terminal
- Needs no additional bandwidth
- Operates in the guard channel
- Disabled during command transmission
- End-to-end operation for configurations with T-offs (normal T-operation)
Transmission rate NSD570 channel bandwidth data rate
120 / 240 / 360 Hz 20 bps
)
480 * / 960 Hz 50 bps
1200 / 2400 / 2800 Hz 100 bps
)
* 4 dual-tone commands in 480 Hz 20 bps
Required SNR > 6 dB

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 2 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

Nominal transmission time T0 including operating times of the relay interface (solid state outputs), EOC configured to ON,
command application set to direct tripping (except for 1 single-tone command).
Notes:
- Figures are given for back-to-back operation (according to IEC 60834-1).
- Transmission times are about 10% lower with Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) disabled.

Channel 1 single-tone 1 or 2 single-tone 1 or 2 dual-tone 1 to 3 dual-tone 1 to 4 dual-tone


Bandwidth command commands commands commands commands
(blocking only)
120 Hz 50 ms N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
240 Hz 27 ms 38 ms 43 ms N.A. N.A.
360 Hz 19 ms 26 ms 30 ms 31 ms N.A.
480 Hz 15 ms 20 ms 23 ms 24 ms 28 ms
960 Hz 8.5 ms 11 ms 13 ms 14 ms 15 ms
1200 Hz 7.0 ms 9.5 ms 11 ms 11 ms 12 ms
2400 Hz 4.5 ms 6.0 ms 7.0 ms 7.0 ms 7.0 ms
2800 Hz 4.5 ms 5.5 ms 6.0 ms 6.0 ms 6.5 ms

Security Puc measured according to IEC 60834-1 with 200 ms noise bursts / 200 ms pause
Puc for worst case SNR Single-tone commands Dual-tone commands
- blocking Puc < 1E-03 Puc < 1E-04
- permissive Puc < 1E-05 Puc < 1E-06
- direct Puc < 1E-08 Puc < 1E-09

Dependability Pmc measured according to IEC 60834-1 noise bandwidth 4 kHz


Notes:
- Command application: B = Blocking; P = Permissive tripping; D = Direct tripping.
- Figures are given with Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) configured to ON.
- Due to the available test equipment for dependability measurements, fractional numbers for T0 in
the table above had to be increased by 0.5 ms to the next higher integer number.

Required SNR (dB) for Pmc < 1% in 1.3 T0


Channel 1 single-tone 1 or 2 single-tone 1 or 2 dual-tone 1 to 3 dual-tone 1 to 4 dual-tone
Bandwidth command commands commands commands commands
B B P D B P D B P D B P D
120 Hz +10 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
240 Hz +8 -1 +3 +9 +1 +5 +11 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
360 Hz +8 +1 +5 +10 +3 +6 +12 +2 +6 +11 N.A. N.A. N.A.
480 Hz +4 +2 +6 +12 +4 +8 +15 +4 +7 +13 -1 +2 +5
960 Hz +5 +5 +9 +16 +6 +9 +14 +5 +8 +13 +3 +5 +8
1200 Hz +16 +4 +8 +16 +6 +10 +14 +6 +8 +13 +6 +8 +11
2400 Hz +7 +7 +10 +15 +8 +11 +16 +8 +11 +16 +8 +10 +14
2800 Hz +8 +5 +7 +9 +9 +12 +16 +10 +12 +16 +7 +10 +14

Required SNR (dB) for Pmc < 1% in 1.5 T0


Channel 1 single-tone 1 or 2 single-tone 1 or 2 dual-tone 1 to 3 dual-tone 1 to 4 dual-tone
Bandwidth command commands commands commands commands
B B P D B P D B P D B P D
120 Hz -5 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
240 Hz -1 -4 0 +8 0 +4 +10 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
360 Hz +1 -1 +3 +9 0 +5 +11 0 4 +10 N.A. N.A. N.A.
480 Hz +1 -1 +4 +11 +1 +6 +12 +1 +6 +12 -1 +1 +5
960 Hz +4 0 +3 +8 +4 +8 +13 +2 +6 +12 +2 +4 +8
1200 Hz +5 0 +2 +5 +4 +8 +13 +5 +8 +12 +5 +7 +10
2400 Hz +7 +3 +5 +11 +3 +4 +6 +4 +5 +7 +7 +9 +13
2800 Hz +8 +4 +6 +8 +5 +7 +13 +5 +9 +14 +3 +5 +6

Required SNR (dB) for Pmc < 1% in 2.0 T0


Channel 1 single-tone 1 or 2 single-tone 1 or 2 dual-tone 1 to 3 dual-tone 1 to 4 dual-tone
Bandwidth command commands commands commands commands
B B P D B P D B P D B P D
120 Hz -6 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
240 Hz -2 -8 -6 -2 -7 -5 -2 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
360 Hz 0 -6 -3 0 -5 -4 -1 -5 -3 -1 N.A. N.A. N.A.
480 Hz 0 -5 -1 +1 -4 -1 0 -4 -2 0 -5 -4 -3
960 Hz +3 -3 +1 +4 -1 0 +2 -1 0 +2 -2 -1 0
1200 Hz +4 -1 +2 +4 -1 +1 +4 0 +1 +3 0 +2 +3
2400 Hz +6 +1 +3 +6 +2 +3 +6 +3 +4 +6 +2 +3 +5
2800 Hz +7 +3 +5 +8 +3 +4 +6 +3 +5 +7 +2 +4 +5

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 3 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

3. DIGITAL SYSTEM DATA

Number of commands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 Independent, simultaneous, in any combination


commands individually configurable blocking, permissive or direct tripping
free command allocation to one or more output contacts

Line interface digital, type G3LD G.703.1, codirectional (RJ45 connector, 8 pole)
56 or 64 kbps RS-422/V.11 interface (Sub-D
connector, 25 pole = RS-530)

optional piggyback, type G1LE E1 interface: 2.048 Mbps (SDH), G.703.6


T1 interface: 1.544 Mbps (SONET)
(RJ45 connector, 8 pole)

optional connecting cables for RS-422/V.11 X.21/X.24 (Sub-D, 15 pole),


EIA RS-530 (Sub-D, 25 pole),
EIA RS-449 (Sub-D, 37 pole),
or terminal blocks with isolating blades

optional connecting cables for G.703/E1/T1 RJ45 (8 pole, direct wire connection)

Frequency stability 6.4 Hz ( 100 ppm)

Operating principle guard state guard message


command state command message
test state test message

Message coding Cyclic block code


- Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem BCH (31,21,5)
- Hamming Distance 5
- Code structure 21 bits for guard, commands, test, address
10 bits for error detection and correction

Frame length 6 x 8 bit = 48 bit in 64 kbps mode 31 bit BCH(31,21,5) plus 17 synchronization bits
7 x 7 bit = 49 bit in 56 kbps mode 31 bit BCH(31,21,5) plus 18 synchronization bits

Signal processing dynamic adaptive frame evaluation 2 to 6 frames / correction of max. 1 bit error
depending on prevailing channel condition
- blocking 2 or 3 frames
- permissive tripping 3 or 5 frames
- direct tripping 4 or 6 frames

Nominal transmission time T0 including operating time of the relay interface (solid state outputs)

- blocking T0 4 ms
- permissive tripping T0 5 ms
- direct tripping T0 6 ms

Security Puc according to IEC 60834-1 with 200 ms BER bursts / 200 ms pause
@BER = 0.5: @BER = 0.15 (worst case):
- blocking Puc < 1E-10 blocking Puc < 1E-05
- permissive Puc < 1E-17 permissive Puc < 1E-09
- direct Puc < 1E-24 direct Puc < 1E-12

Dependability Pmc measured according to IEC 60834-1


required BER for Pmc <1% in 1.3 T0
- blocking BER < 1E-03
- permissive BER < 8 x 1E-04
- direct BER < 5 x 1E-04

Addressing facility range of digital terminal addresses 0 to 1023

Embedded Operation Channel (EOC)

- Configuration and monitoring of the opposite equipment from the local terminal
- Needs no additional channel
- Available during guard and command state

Transmission rate channel data rate 56 kbps 1000 bps


channel data rate 64 kbps 1333 bps

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 4 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

4. COMMON SYSTEM DATA

Device address range for connecting to PC via HMI 1 to 240

Send command pick up time programmable for each command 0 to 10 ms, step 1 ms
(Tx Input Delay) compensation of sent commands duration equal to the pick-up time

Received command prolongation programmable for each command 0 to 3 s, in steps of 1 ms


(Rx Prolongation) default value for blocking 0 ms
default value for permissive tripping 10 ms
default value for direct tripping 100 ms

Unblocking output Unblocking condition analogue no guard and no trip received


unblocking threshold programmable -20 to -10 dB from nominal level (1 dB steps)
default unblocking threshold -14 dB from nominal level
detection delay less than nominal command transmission time
Unblocking condition digital LOS or AIS received, or invalid frames
detection delay less than nominal command transmission time
Extra output pick-up delay 0 ms to 100 ms, programmable in steps of 1 ms
(default 5 ms)
Unblocking pulse duration 50 ms to 500 ms, programmable in steps of 1 ms
(default 200 ms)
Unblocking output freely configurable onto free contacts of any relay interface G3LR

Command output status


during channel alarm Programmable
- Outputs are not influenced by the alarm (default)
- All outputs are forced into guard state
- Direct tripping O/Ps are forced to guard state, and permissive or blocking O/Ps to command state
- The command outputs retain the status they had immediately prior to the alarm
Pick-up time 0 to 15 s, programmable in steps of 1 s
(default 10 s)
Hold time 0 to 15 s, programmable in steps of 1 s
(default 0 s)

Command acknowledge free allocation of a command acknowledge O/P to one of the outputs of the relay interface G3LR
- for sent commands individual or collective
- for received commands collective

Received Guard state signaling free allocation to one of the outputs of the relay interface G3LR

Built-in test facilities:

Cyclic loop test - The loop test signal is transmitted in the same way as an unboosted tripping signal
- It is recognized by the receiver and echoed back to the transmitter
- A genuine tripping command is always given priority over any tests
configurable test interval 1 / 3 / 6 (default) / 12 / 24, hours, or disabled
first loop test sent 10 minutes after power-on
loop test alarm after 3 unsuccessful trials
if a loop test fails, the test interval is lowered to 5 minutes
event recording sent / replied / failed loop test

Manual loop test - Activated via HMI570, or by pressing the loop test button on the equipment front panel
test success indication green Trip LED lights up for 3 seconds
test failure indication red Fail LED flashes for 3 seconds
HMI window displays actual transmission time (Tac) as 12 round trip time

Local test mode - All sent commands are looped back by the local line interface
- The Guard signal is transmitted to the opposite station
- Commands are not transferred to the remote end
activated via HMI570
test mode indication Red Fail LED flashes (on local equipment)

Remote test mode - Remote command outputs are blocked


- All transmitted commands are sent back by the remote line interface to the local terminal
activated via HMI570 and EOC
test mode indication Red Fail LED flashes (on remote equipment)

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 5 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

5. SPECIAL OPERATING MODES

T-operation

- For the protection of cables and power lines with T-offs (multi-terminal lines)
- A command sent by any station is received by all other stations
- Transit through-connection of signals in T-stations between two NSD570 in the same rack, with minimum delay
- Restoring of guard signal in T-Station if one link fails
- EOC communication only available between outer stations (normal T-operation)

Transit delay NSD570 Analog for all bandwidths < 3 ms

Transit delay NSD570 Digital for all interface types / data rates < 3 ms

1+1 protection

- For path and equipment redundancy


- Two NSD570 in the same rack serving two different communication channels
- The command inputs/outputs of the two systems are connected in parallel ("first come, first served")

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 6 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

6. ANALOG INTERFACE (G3LA)

CE standards compliance Common Technical Regulation CTR017,


Technical Basis for Regulation TBR017

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570

Line interface 4-wire or 2-wire 600 Ohm terminated or high impedance


(jumper setting)

Boost output Electrically isolated via opto-coupler

Max. number of NSD570 connected in parallel to the same circuit 3 (recommended)

Transmitter:

AF output Isolated from ground balanced


Impedance terminated 600 Ohm
high-impedance > 1.5 kOhm
Return loss (Rnom = 600 Ohm) 300 Hz 500 Hz > 12.0 dB
500 Hz 4 kHz > 15.0 dB
Longitudinal conversion loss 300 Hz 600 Hz > 40 dB
(compliant with TBR017) 600 Hz 3.4 kHz > 46 dB
Balance-to-ground 300 Hz 4 kHz > 40 dB
Spurious emissions < 8 kHz < - 38 dBm
> 8 kHz < - 56 dBm
Signal level single tones guard signal - 24 dBm to + 2 dBm
adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB
command signal (incl. power boosting) - 24 dBm to + 11 dBm
Signal level dual tones (RMS) command signal (incl. power boosting) - 27 dBm to + 8 dBm
Transmitter monitor level drop off - 3 dB to -10 dB
adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB
Attenuation distortion 300 Hz 4 kHz 1.0 dB
Admissible transverse application of 50/60 Hz with min. receiving signal level 10 Vp

Boost control output Electrically isolated contact Opto-coupler


Contact ratings voltage max. 60 VDC
current max. 50 mA (limited)
polarity independent
Operating time pick-up delay < 250 us
Overvoltage protection voltage < 80 VDC
Power boosting ratio 0 to 9 dB,
adjustable in steps of 1 dB

Receiver:

AF input Isolated from ground balanced


Impedance terminated 600 Ohm
high-impedance > 1.5 kOhm
Return loss (Rnom = 600 Ohm) 300 Hz 500 Hz > 12.0 dB
500 Hz 4 kHz > 16.0 dB
Longitudinal conversion loss 300 Hz 600 Hz > 40 dB
(according to TBR017) 600 Hz 3.4 kHz > 46 dB
Balance-to-ground 300 Hz 4 kHz > 40 dB
Received signal level nominal - 30 dBm to + 2 dBm
adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB
Level monitor Lower and upper limit programmable 3 dB to 12 dB
adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB
Receiver dynamic range from nominal 15 dB
Attenuation distortion 300 Hz 4 kHz 1.0 dB
Admissible transverse application of 50/60 Hz with min. receiving signal level 10 Vp

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 7 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

7. DIGITAL LINE INTERFACES (G3LD)

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570

7.1. G.703 Codirectional Interface


Coding and electrical characteristics according to ITU-T G.703, jitter specification according to G.823.
Data and Clock output:

Bit rate 64 kbps


Symbol rate 256 kBaud
Clock tolerance 100 ppm
Longitudinal conversion loss 128 kHz > 50 dB
Output jitter amplitude Band B1 (20 Hz20 kHz) < 0.25 UI
Band B2 (3 kHz20 kHz) < 0.05 UI
Test load impedance 120 Ohm
Peak voltage of a pulse (Mark) 1.0 V
Peak voltage without a pulse (Space) 0 0.1 V
Synchronization of Tx clock frequency programmable ON/OFF on receive clock

UI = Unit Interval (1 / Symbol Rate)

Data and clock input:

Bit rate 64 kbps


Symbol rate 256 kBaud
Clock tolerance 100 ppm
Longitudinal conversion loss 128 kHz > 50 dB
Input jitter acceptance up to 4.33 Hz > 1.15 UI
20 Hz600 Hz > 0.25 UI
3 kHz20 kHz > 0.05 UI
Return loss 4 kHz 13 kHz > 12 dB
13 kHz 256 kHz > 18 dB
256 kHz 384 kHz > 14 dB
Input impedance 120 Ohm
Voltage of a pulse 1.0 V
Admissible transverse application of 50/60 Hz cable attenuation 3 dB 300 mVpp transversal

Various:

Shielding, cable screen to be earthed with metallic clamp on cable tray at rear side of rack
Maximum cable length 22 AWG 500 m
2
(using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair) (diameter 0.6438 mm = 0.3255 mm )
Alarms: incoming signal level too low Loss Of Signal (LOS)
4 x 8 = 32 following bits logical "1" Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Onboard Connector RJ45

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 8 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

7.2. RS-422 Interface


The electrical characteristics comply with TIA/EIA-422-B (RS-422) and ITU-T V.11, the pinout complies with TIA/EIA-530-A (RS-530).

Signal output (SD):

Bit rate 64 kbps or 56 kbps


Output voltage with 100 Ohm load 2 V differential
Synchronization of Tx clock frequency (configurable via HMI) off (none), ST, RD

Clock Output to DCE (TT):

Frequency 64 kHz or 56 kHz


Tolerance 100 ppm
Output voltage with 100 Ohm load 2 V differential
Synchronization of TT clock frequency (configurable via HMI) off (none), RD

Signal input (RD):

Bit rate 64 kbps or 56 kbps


Input voltage 6 V differential
7 V to signal ground
Sensitivity 0.2 V
Input impedance > 100 < 120 Ohm
Synchronization of Rx clock frequency (configurable via HMI) off (none), RT, RD
Clock tolerance when Rx clock is extracted from RD 100 ppm

Clock input transmitter (ST) and receiver (RT):

Bit rate 64 kbps or 56 kbps


Input voltage 6 V differential
7 V to signal ground
Sensitivity 0.2 V
Input impedance > 100 < 120 Ohm
Clock tolerance of external ST 100 ppm
Clock tolerance of external RT 100 ppm

Various:

Shielding, cable screen to be earthed with metallic clamp on cable tray at rear side of rack
Maximum cable length Internal clock 1000 m
(using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair, 22 AWG) External clock 500 m
Onboard Connector Sub-D, 25 pol, male, TIA/EIA-530-A
(RS-530)

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 9 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

7.3. E1/T1 Interface (G1LE)

Optional piggyback to be mounted on Digital Interface G3LD (configurable for E1 and T1 operation; E1 = default configuration).
Hardware release monitoring via HMI570
Connector on piggyback: RJ45

E1 interface (2 Mbps)

Coding and electrical characteristics comply with ITU-T recommendation G.703. Framing according to G.704, signaling according to G.775
and Q.703. Jitter performance according to G.823.
Data is transmitted in timeslot 1 of the E1 frame.

Signal output:

Bit rate 2048 kbps


Tolerance of bit clock 50 ppm
Output jitter amplitude Band B1 (20 Hz 100 kHz) < 1.5 UI
Band B2 (18 kHz 100 kHz) < 0.2 UI
Output impedance 120 Ohm
Peak voltage of a pulse (Mark) 3.0 V
Peak voltage without a pulse (Space) 0 0.3 V

Signal input:

Bit rate 2048 kbps


Tolerance of bit clock 50 ppm
Return Loss 51 kHz 102 kHz > 12 dB
102 kHz 2048 kHz > 18 dB
2048 kHz 3072 kHz > 14 dB
Input jitter acceptance up to 1.67 Hz > 18 UI
20 Hz2.4 kHz > 1.5 UI
18 kHz100 kHz > 0.2 UI
Input impedance 120 Ohm
Peak voltage of a pulse (Mark) 3.0 V
Peak voltage without a pulse (Space) 0 0.3 V

Various:

Shielding, cable screen to be earthed with metallic clamp on cable tray at rear side of rack
Maximum cable length 22 AWG 1500 m
2
(using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair) (diameter 0.6438 mm = 0.3255 mm )

Data stream encoding/decoding configurable for AMI or HDB3 (default)


Detection of code violations AMI -> all violations are recognized
HDB3 -> double violations and 4 subsequent
zeroes

Receiver sensitivity configurable for max. cable attenuation 10 dB (short haul; default)
43 dB (long haul)

Clock synchronization Slave mode on receive data


- if no data is received (LOS) switches automatically to free running mode

Internal elastic buffer size configurable individual for input/output 0 or 96 Bits, 1 or 2 frames (default)
-> compensates clock deviations and wander between internal/external timing
-> compensates jitter, detects slips with some additional delay
compromise to be made on high jitter tolerance versus low additional delay

Framing formats double-frame (default) Sync. pattern in timeslot 0 (E1)


- maximum synchronization delay 375 s
CRC4-multiframe transmission of CRC4 bits
- maximum synchronization delay 2.125 ms

Alarms: incoming signal too low,


too few transitions Loss Of Signal (LOS)
all one condition Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
alarm in remote station Remote Receive Alarm (RRA)
frame detection failed Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA)

Status messages counted events per second code violations


Invalid framing bits
CRC failure

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 10 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

T1 Interface (1.5 Mbps)


Coding and signal comply with ITU-T recommendation G.703 and ANSI T1.102. Framing according to G.704, signaling according to G.775
and Q.703.
Jitter performance according to G.823.

Data is transmitted in timeslot 1 of the T1 frame.

Signal output:

Bit rate 1544 kbps


Tolerance of bit clock 32 ppm
Output jitter amplitude Band B1 (10 Hz 40 kHz) < 5 UI
Band B2 (8 kHz 40 kHz) < 0.1 UI
Output impedance 100 Ohm
Tolerance of output impedance 5%
Peak voltage of a pulse 3.6 V
Minimum voltage of a pulse 2.4 V

Signal input:

Bit rate 1544 kbps


Tolerance of bit clock 130 ppm
Input impedance 100 Ohm
Tolerance of input impedance 5%
Peak voltage of a pulse 3.6 V
Minimum voltage of a pulse 2.4 V

Various:

Shielding, cable screen to be earthed with metallic clamp on cable tray at rear side of rack
Maximum cable length 22 AWG 2000 m
2
(using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair) (diameter 0.6438 mm = 0.3255 mm )

Data stream encoding/decoding configurable for AMI or B8ZS (default)

Receiver sensitivity configurable for max. cable attenuation 10 dB (short haul; default)
36 dB (long haul)

Clock synchronisation Slave mode on receiving data


- if no data is received (LOS) switches automatically to free running mode

Internal buffer size configurable individually for input/output 0 or 96 Bits, 1 or 2 frames (default)
-> compensates clock deviations/wander (between internal/external timing)
-> compensates jitter, detects slips (with some additional delay)
compromise to be made on high jitter capability versus low additional delay

Framing formats 4-multiframe (default) synchronization data in bit 1 (T1)


- maximum synchronization delay 1.5 ms
extended superframe (24 frames) additional transmission of CRC6 data
(in order to detect transmission bit errors;
remote alarm reception even with high BER)
- maximum synchronization delay 6.125 ms

Alarms: incoming signal level too low,


too few transitions Loss Of Signal (LOS)
all one condition Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
alarm in remote station Remote Receive Alarm (RRA)
frame detection failed Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA)

Status messages counted events per second code violations


invalid framing bits
CRC failures

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 11 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

7.4. Optical Interface (G1LO)

Optional piggyback to be mounted on Digital Interface G3LD (configurable for Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM operation; a
special version of the module - configurable for IEEE C37.94 - is available on request).

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570

Connector on piggyback: E2000/APC (others via adaptor)

Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface

Framing complies with ITU-T recommendation G.704 for Optical Direct Fiber and with FOX-6Plus for Optical FOX/OTERM operation. The
jitter performance is according to G.823.

Data is transmitted in timeslot 1 of the PCM31 frame for Optical Direct Fiber and in channel 1 of the FOX-6Plus frame if Optical
FOX/OTERM is selected.

Signal output:

Wavelength 1310 nm
Bit rate 2048 kBps
Tolerance of bit clock 50 ppm
Output jitter amplitude Band B1 (20 Hz 100 kHz) < 1.5 UI
Band B2 (18 kHz 100 kHz) < 0.2 UI
Optical output power Short haul -22 -17 dBm
Long haul -5 -1 dBm

Signal input:

Wavelength range Sensitivity < -32 dBm 850 1550 nm


Bit rate 2048 kbps
Tolerance of bit clock 50 ppm
Input jitter tolerance up to 1.67 Hz > 18 UI
20 2400 Hz > 1.5 UI
18 ... 100 kHz > 0.2 UI
Receiver input sensitivity < -36 dBm
Receiver saturation power > - 1 dBm

Various:

Maximum cable length 9 m singlemode fiber (acc. G.652) 50 km


50 m multimode fiber (acc. G.651) 25 km

Data stream encoding/decoding CMI

Clock synchronization Slave mode On receive data


- if no data is received (LOS) switches automatically to free running mode

Internal elastic buffer size Fixed setting 2 frames


-> compensates clock deviations and wander between internal/external timing
-> compensates jitter, detects slips with some additional delay

Framing format Optical Direct Fiber Double-frame Sync. pattern in timeslot 0 (PCM31)
- maximum synchronization delay 375 s

Framing format Optical FOX/OTERM According to FOX-6Plus 32 bits with 5 Sync. bits every 15.625 s
- can also be connected with OTERM on FOX515

Alarm Too few transitions Loss Of Signal (LOS)

Optical budget including aging 25 dB

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 12 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

Optical IEEE C37.94 Interface

Framing, jitter performance and alarm handling comply with IEEE C37.94.

Data is transmitted in the first 8 data bits of the IEEE C37.94 frame.

Signal output:

Wavelength 850 nm
Bit rate 2048 kbps
Tolerance of bit clock 100 ppm
Output jitter amplitude < 0.2 UI
Optical output power -16 -11 dBm

Signal input:

Wavelength range Sensitivity < -32 dBm 850 1550 nm


Bit rate 2048 kbps
Tolerance of bit clock 100 ppm
Input jitter tolerance > 0.1 UI
Receiver input sensitivity < -32 dBm
Receiver saturation power > - 1 dBm

Various:

Maximum cable length 50 m multimode fiber (acc. G.651) 3.5 km

Data stream encoding/decoding NRZ

Clock synchronization Slave mode On receive data


- if no data is received (LOS) switches automatically to free running mode

Internal elastic buffer size Fixed setting 2 frames


-> compensates clock deviations and wander between internal/external timing
-> compensates jitter, detects slips with some additional delay

Framing format According to IEEE C37.94 256 bits with 16 bit header, 48 bit overhead and 192
bit payload.

Alarms Too few transitions Loss Of Signal (LOS)


All one condition Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

Optical budget including aging 10 dB

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 13 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

8. RELAY INTERFACE (G3LR)

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570

Signal inputs (opto couplers)

Number of command send inputs 2, electrically isolated by opto couplers commands can be freely allocated to I/Ps

Method of tripping - external contact and station battery voltage polarity independent
- external dry contact with optional internal aux. tripping voltage G1LR

Nominal battery voltage (24, 48, 60, 110, 125, 220, 250) VDC tolerance 20 %

Input voltage ranges 3, programmable with jumpers:


Jumpers Nominal battery voltage
.A + .B 24 VDC to 48 VDC
.A + .C 60 VDC to 110 VDC
.A + .D 125 VDC to 250 VDC

Operating thresholds input operates at:


Jumpers Voltage
.A + .B 10 15 VDC
.A + .C 25 30 VDC
.A + .D 70 80 VDC

Contact burden input current 10 20 mA


for nominal battery voltage 24 VDC 5 10 mA

Operating time < 750 s, 450 s typical

Overvoltage protection 400 VDC

Signal outputs (solid state)

Number of outputs 2 electrically isolated commands, alarms and special functions freely
assignable
Normally Open contact solid-state relay bounce-free, shock and vibration safe
DC voltage 5 250 VDC (+ 20 % max.)
Tripping current ON/OFF ratio 1/3 up to 5 min./15 min. 2 A;
Continuous 1A
Current limitation typ. 2.6 A
Short circuit cut off after approx. 6 ms for 1 s
Leakage current 200 A; at 312 V / 70C
Operating time 250 s (typ. 60 s)
Reverse polarity protection 400 VDC

Signal outputs (Relay)

Number of outputs 2 (electrically isolated)


"Heavy Duty" commands, alarms and special
functions freely assignable
Normally Open contact mono stable,
or Normally Closed contact electromechanical relay
Max. switching power see diagram
Tripping command 5...250 VDC
250 VAC max.
Rated current 5 A carry (up to 45C)
10 A carry (for 1 sec.)
16 A make (for 200 ms)
Break current (DC inductive load) up to 1 A @ 250 VDC
(depending on L and R, an external
"arc suppression" may be required)

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 14 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

Operating time < 8 ms (typ. 5 ms)


Bounce < 1 ms (typ. 0.2 ms)
Reset time < 4 ms (typ. 3.6 ms)
Overvoltage protection 400 VDC

9. POWER SUPPLY (G3LH)

- Only one type for all specified voltages


- Electrically isolated
- Hot pluggable
- Output power 60 W sufficient to supply all possible rack assemblies
- Single or redundant configuration (passive load sharing, decoupled by means of diodes)

Nominal input voltage from 48 VDC to 250 VDC ( 20 %)


from 100 VAC to 240 VAC (-15%, +10%)

Plug-in Monitoring plugged / not plugged

Output voltage 12.3 VDC

Output voltage monitoring independent for both power supply modules

Efficiency DC > 80 %
AC > 75 %

Reverse polarity protection not applicable (bipolar connection possible)


Overvoltage protection on primary side
Inrush current limitation on primary side approx. 4.7 A
Short circuit proof on secondary side approx. 6 A
Immunity against power interruptions on primary side 20 ms
Fuse 5 x 20 mm 2.5 AT

Power consumption for 48 VDC nominal battery voltage:

basic version (rack, one supply module, one line interface, one relay interface):

basic version analog (2 commands) 10 W max


basic version digital (2 commands) 10 W max.

per additional supply module G3LH 3 W max.


per additional analog interface G3LA 3 W max.
per additional digital interface G3LD 3 W max.
per additional relay interface G3LR 1 W max.
optional LAN Interface G3LL 10 W max.
optional E1/T1 interface G1LE 0.5 W max.
optional optical interface G1LO 1.5 W max.
optional display panel G1LC 1.5 W max.
optional input tripping voltage G1LR 1 W max.

Onboard Connector: H 15 (DIN 41612)

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 15 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

10. COMMON INTERFACE (G3LC)

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570

LED indication on front panel Supervision of power supply output voltage green = ok, red = failed, dark = not plugged

Main functions on board DC/DC converter for internal +5 V supply voltage


clock source (8.192 MHz) for Real Time Bus (RTB) on busplane
local alarm of the two NSD570 in the rack Two heavy duty relay with free change-over
contacts

RS-232 interface (COM 1):

Service interface TIA/EIA-232-F (RS-232), DCE Electrically isolated


(front access, 9-pole Sub-D socket, female)

Transmission rate programmable 9600 bps / 19200 bps / 57600 bps

Direct connection to COM port of a PC/notebook = DTE

Connecting cable serial 1:1 cable, 9 pin Sub-D connector PC/notebook -> female, NSD570 -> male

Hardware flow control if requested from external devices RTS/CTS

If connected via a modem (= DCE) Null-Modem cable necessary (male-male) cross connection of 103 104, 105 106

Protocoll 8N1, no flow control

G3LC alarm outputs

Number of outputs 2 (electrically isolated)

"Heavy Duty" one relay for each NSD570 in the


rack (to signal a local alarm)

Normally Open contact mono stable,


or Normally Closed contact electromechanical relay

Max. switching power see diagram

Alarm voltage 5...250 VDC


250 VAC max.

Rated current 5 A carry (up to 45C)


10 A carry (for 1 sec.)
16 A make (for 200 ms)

Break current (DC inductive load) up to 1 A @ 250 VDC


(depending on L and R, an external
"arc suppression" may be required)

Operating time < 8 ms (typ. 5 ms)

Bounce < 1 ms (typ. 0.2 ms)

Reset time < 4 ms (typ. 3.6 ms)

Overvoltage protection 400 VDC

NSD570 intra-station network

Serial two wire station bus interface type RS-485


electrically compliant with TIA/EIA-485-A
cable twisted pair (incl. screen according RS-485
recommendation -> internal isolated ground)
max. cable length 500 m
max. no. of NSD570 in local station network 32

Synchronization of Real Time Clock


(RTC; on line interface)
One input for IRIG-B synchronization signal
One input for external second impulses (GPS) TTL

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 16 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

IRIG-B input:

Synchronization signal format IRIG-B unmodulated


Voltage levels Input LOW -15V ... + 0.8 V
Input HIGH + 2V ... + 15 V
Input resistance 750 Ohm
Over voltage protection 26 VDC
Precision of synchronization 0.5 ms

GPS Sync input

Synchronization signal format Pulses Every second (PPS)


Voltage levels Input LOW -0.5V ... + 0.8 V
(TTL) Input HIGH + 2V + 7 V
Input resistance 1 kOhm
Over voltage protection 5 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Precision of synchronization 0.5 ms

11. BUS PLANE WITH FRONT COVER (G1LA)

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570

12. SUPPLY BACKPLANE (G1LB)

Power supply connectors Fast-On 6.3 mm AC: L / N / PE, DC: + / - / PE

13. INTERNAL TRIPPING VOLTAGE (G1LR)

Optional piggyback module to be plugged onto G3LR.


If mounted, both command inputs of the module G3LR are operated by means of a dry external contact.

Internal auxiliary voltage 24 VDC 4 V

Power dissipation < 0.5 W per input

Insulation same as command inputs (see chapter on EMC)

14. LCD DISPLAY PANEL (G1LC)

Optional front panel (instead of Blanking Cover Plate), for displaying status, counters, alarm messages and firmware versions of the local
and remote NSD570.
For local access only, selected configuration data are also available (e.g. line interface settings, command application or relay interface
input/output assignment).

Readout device dot matrix LCD display two lines, 16 characters


Lightness adjustable background LED in 4 steps or switched OFF
Contrast adjustable in 16 steps
Standby time after last interaction adjustable 1 60 minutes
Handling menu-driven enabled by four front panel buttons
Internal connection via ribbon cable to Common Interface G3LC supply voltage 12 V / 2-wire data link

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 17 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

15. LAN INTERFACE DATA (G3LL)

Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface that allows to connect an NSD570 system to TCP/IP-networks for configuration and monitoring.
The HMI570 LAN application (server version of the HMI570) runs on the NSD570 LAN Interface.

Serial two wire station bus interface type RS-485


electrically compliant with TIA/EIA-485-A
cable twisted pair (incl. screen according RS-485
recommendation -> internal isolated ground)
max. cable length 500 m

Ethernet LAN interface type Ethernet 10/100 BaseT


electrically compliant with IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX
cable S/UTP (Screened / Unshielded Twisted Pair) or
S/STP (Screened / Shielded Twisted Pair)
Ethernet cable, category 5 or higher
max. cable length 100 m

On-board server architecture PC/AT compatible computer PC/104


ROM type 128 MB Compact Flash Card
RTC buffer Lithium battery
battery type MAXELL ER10/28, 3.6V, 410 mAh
battery lifetime 1.0 year @ +85C
4.5 year @ +25C

16. HMI570 USER INTERFACE

16.1. HMI570 LAN

The HMI570 LAN requires a NSD570 LAN Interface (G3LL)

Browser front end Internet Explorer, Netscape, Mozilla


standards: HTTP/1.1, HTML 4

Access to the system remote

Requirements for remote access installation on PC/notebook HTTP 1.1 browser and IP connection to the LAN
interface type G3LL of NSD570
connection to the NSD570s in a network via Corporate Network (Intranet) or Internet

Security 3 password levels admin/modify/view


Secure socket layer (SSL) connection (for remote access only)

HMI570 LAN main functions: configuration on-line


configuration off-line with file for downloading
testing and commissioning
status and alarm monitoring
local and remote access to configuration data , hardware inventory,
firmware- and software versions

Remote access facilities - intranet/internet using IP with embedded web server on LAN
interface type G3LL, 10/100BaseT (option)

Event recorder upload of all events recorded in an equipment


text display of events
events can be saved to file

Firmware download from a remote site via any communication channel,


via EOC of NSD570 Analog -> not recommended

Configuration download in case of failure reverting to the previous operating condition

Manual jumper settings on relay interfaces G3LR input command tripping voltage (4 jumpers)
(also stored in configuration file) on analogue interface G3LA line impedance (2 jumpers)

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 18 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

16.2. HMI570 PC

Browser front end Internet Explorer, Netscape, Mozilla


standards: HTTP/1.1, HTML 4

Hardware requirements (minimal) PC/notebook, x86 compatible CPU Pentium III


CPU clock 400 MHz
RAM 128 Mbyte
free harddisk space 50 Mbyte
SVGA, resolution 1024 x 768, 256 colors
operating system Windows NT/2000/XP

Access to the system local and remote

Requirements for local access installation on PC/notebook Browser plus Software on CD-ROM
with install-package
connection PC-to-NSD570 via serial RS-232 interface cable, or
via USB/RS-232 converter

Security 3 password levels admin/modify/view

HMI570 PC main functions: configuration on-line


configuration off-line with file for downloading
testing and commissioning
status and alarm monitoring
local and remote access to configuration data , hardware inventory,
firmware- and software versions

Local and remote access facilities - serial cable at 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 57600 bps

- embedded operation channel (EOC) at 100 bps max (NSD570 analog) or


at 1000 bps (NSD570 digital)

Event recorder upload of all events recorded in an equipment


text display of events
events can be saved to file

Firmware download locally or from a remote site via any communication channel,
via EOC of NSD570 Analog -> not recommended

Configuration download in case of failure reverting to the previous operating condition

Manual jumper settings on relay interfaces G3LR input command tripping voltage (4 jumpers)
(also stored in configuration file) on analogue interface G3LA line impedance (2 jumpers)

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 19 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

17. ALARMS

Alarm sources readable via the HMI

Tx signal level drop from nominal level - 3 dB to - 10 dB (programmable, 1 dB steps)


detection time <1s

Rx guard signal level deviation from nominal level > 3 dB 12 dB (programmable, 1 dB steps)
detection time <1s

SNR alarm threshold depending on command application setting (security):


approx. Pmc < 1 % value
detection time <1s

BER alarm threshold setting via HMI570 1E-01 / 1E-02 / 1E-03 / 1E-04 / 1E-05 /
1E-06 (default) / 1E-07 / 1E-08 / 1E-09
detection time < 16 s (worst case)

Wrong digital address detection time 2 frames

Tx single component failure from relay interface instantaneous alarm


Rx single component failure 2 criteria supervision guard and command signal state violation,
Instantaneous alarm

Tx command duration configurable for each command monitoring ENABLED or DISABLED


if monitoring is enabled sending guard signal after programmable delay:
1 to 15 s (default 5 s)
Rx output overload of solid-state command outputs instantaneous
Checksum error external SDRAM / internal SRAM failure instantaneous
Loop test error > 3 attempts
System clock error CPU, Real Time Bus instantaneous
General system error watchdog >5s
Module hardware alarm instantaneous
Power supply voltage too low instantaneous
Internal aux. supply voltage supervision of DC/DC converter 12 VDC / 3.3 VDC (on each board)

Alarm types

The following alarms are freely configurable via the HMI onto any free output of a relay interface G3LR:

System alarm / general alarm collective for all alarm sources (local and remote)
Hardware warning indicates that one of the two power supply modules in redundant configuration failed
Hardware alarm general hardware failure alarms
Link alarm indicates a link failure (SNR/BER, level/sync or loop test failure)
Transmit alarm indicates that the failure is in the local sending circuits or the Tx signal is incorrect
Receive alarm indicates that the failure is in the local receiving circuits or the Rx signal is incorrect
Local alarm indicates that the alarm originates from local equipment, also available on G3LC for each NSD570
in the rack
Remote alarm indicates that the alarm originates from remote equipment
User-defined alarm groups 1, 2, 3 freely configurable groups, as a combination of several alarms from the local or from the
remote equipment

General alarm output 1 free changeover contact on G3LC for each NSD570 in the rack
Alarm relay pick-up delay 0 to 15 s (default 15 s)
Alarm relay drop-off time 0 to 15 s (default 15 s)

Status and alarm LEDs on the front panel (per NSD570) light up immediately after alarm source is detected

One hardware status LED per line, relay and LAN interface green = Ok / red = Fail
One status LED for each input/output and relay contact green = activated, dark = not activated
Two status LEDs for Guard and Trip reception green = signal reception, dark = no signal
Four alarm LEDs per system Transmit, Receive, Local, Remote Alarm red = alarm
One hardware status LED per power supply module green = Ok / red = Fail; dark = no module plugged
One status LED for the LAN interface green = Ethernet link established, dark = no signal

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 20 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

18. EVENT RECORDER AND COUNTERS

Event recorder:

Start time and end time of transmitted commands


received commands
unblocking pulses
alarms
loop tests sent / replied / failed
manipulations start up / user-reset / configuration download
firmware download / set of date and time / start
manual loop test / reset counter / erase of event
recorder / previous configuration

Storage medium non-volatile memory

No. of recordable events before overwriting of the oldest event 7500 (sequentially stored)

Time resolution 1 ms

Accuracy of time stamp internal Real Time Clock free running max. + 20 seconds per day

synchronized - on external GPS receiver (IRIG-B)


- on external Pulses Per Second

RTC buffer in case of power supply failure for > 12 hours

Recording rate continuous 100 events per second


bursts < 1 min. 200 events per second

Trip counters non-volatile storage for each command


- commands transmitted up to 65536
- commands received up to 65536
- loop tests transmitted up to 65536
- loop tests received up to 65536
- unblocking condition up to 65536

resetting via HMI570 each single counter selectively or


all counters at once
Storage medium non-volatile memory

19. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)

19.1. Electrical Safety


Meets the safety requirements according to IEC 60950 / EN 60950

19.2. Emission
The equipment meets the EMC requirements for emission EN 50081-2: 1993 (EN 55022 class A)

Conducted emission 150 kHz to 30 MHz


EN 55022 Class A

LF disturbance emission (48 VDC) 0 kHz to 4 kHz


CCITT P.53 < 3 mV (psophometrically weighted)

Radiated emission 30 MHz to 1000 MHz


EN 55022 Class A

19.3. Immunity
The equipment meets the EMC requirements for immunity EN 61000-6-2: 1999

Radiated electromagnetic field 26 to 1000 MHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz repetition rate
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

Radiated electromagnetic field 1 2.5 GHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz repetition rate
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) contact air discharge


IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV 15 kV

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 21 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

Fast transient Surge immunity Conducted RF Damped Conducted CM


1) 2) 3) 4)
burst test interference oscillatory waves disturbance
IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 61000-4-16
Power Supply
DC supply input 4 kV 4 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
2 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
AC supply input 4 kV 4 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
2 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
Analog Line Interface
2/4-wire 2 kV 2 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
Boost output 2 kV 2 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
1 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
Digital Line Interface
RS-422/RS-530 2 kV 1.0 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
5)
1.5 kV CM
G.703.1 2 kV 1.0 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
5)
1.5 kV CM
E1/T1 2 kV 1.0 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
5)
1.5 kV CM
Relay Interface
Command Input 4 kV 4 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
2 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
Solid-state Output 4 kV 4 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
2 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
Relay Output 4 kV 4 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
2 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
Common Interface
Alarm Relay Output 4 kV 4 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
2 kV DM 1.25 kV DM
RS-485 Station Bus 2 kV 1.0 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
5)
1.5 kV CM
NMEA/IRIG-B Input 2 kV 1 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
GPS Sync. Input 2 kV 1 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
RS-232 Serial Interface 2 kV 1 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
LAN Interface
Ethernet 2 kV 1.0 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
1.0 kV DM
RS-485 Station Bus 2 kV 1.0 kV CM 10 V (e.m.f.) 2.5 kV CM 30 V
5)
1.5 kV CM
1)
5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate
2)
0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%
3)
1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
4)
Continuous mode, frequency 50 Hz
5)
Waveform 10/700 s

19.4. Insulation
Power Impulse Insulation
frequency Voltage resistance
withstand test (@500 VDC)
IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5
Power Supply
DC supply input 2.5 kV 5 kV 100 M
AC supply input 2.5 kV 5 kV 100 M
Analog Line Interface
2/4-wire 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M
Boost output 1.0 kV 2 kV 100 M
Digital Line Interface
RS-422/RS-530 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M
G.703.1 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M
E1/T1 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M
Relay Interface
Command Input 2.5 kV 5 kV 100 M
Solid-state Output 2.5 kV 5 kV 100 M
Relay Output 2.5 kV 5 kV 100 M
Common Interface
Alarm Relay Output 2.5 kV 5 kV 100 M
RS-485 Station Bus 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M
NMEA/IRIG-B Input 500 V 1 kV 100 M
GPS Sync. Input 500 V 1 kV 100 M
RS-232 Serial Interface 500 V 1 kV 100 M
LAN Interface
Ethernet 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M
RS-485 Station Bus 1.0 kV 1 kV 100 M

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 22 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

20. MECHANICAL DATA, DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Weight basic version (rack, one supply module, one line interface, one relay interface):

basic version analog (2 commands) 5.64 kg


basic version digital (2 commands) 5.60 kg

per additional supply module G3LH 0.60 kg


per additional analog interface G3LA 0.26 kg
per additional digital interface G3LD 0.18 kg
per additional relay interface G3LR 0.22 kg
optional LAN interface G3LL 0.32 kg
optional E1/T1 interface G1LE 0.04 kg
optional optical interface G1LO 0.10 kg
optional display panel G1LC 0.15 kg
optional input tripping voltage G1LR 0.02 kg

Height 3 units high = 133.35 mm (1 unit = 44.45 mm)


4 units high = 177.8 mm (including labelling strip and cable tray)

Overall depth 300 mm

Installation width 482.6 mm (19'')

Material side panels, cover plates hot-dip galvanized sheet


horizontal rails extruded aluminium section

Color RAL 7035 / Pantone 420 (light grey)

IP protection degree of protection IP20 (according EN 60529 / IEC 60529)

Equipment rack 19" wide conforming to standard DIN 41494

Dimension of modules (H x B x T) power supply unit 3U / 8R / 220 mm


line and relay interfaces 3U / 6R / 220 mm
LAN Interface 3U / 8R / 220 mm

No. of slots power supply unit 2


line interfaces 2
relay interfaces 8

Backtracing all modules labelled with barcode module type and serial number

Installation cabinet with hinged frame (typical) conforming to standard IEC 60297-3
or in a open frame
installation in a cubicle without hinged frame installation set available upon request

Removal of boards power supply module(s) from the front side


line and relay interfaces from the back side

EMC shielding front integrated in front panel (Ground layers)


back screening and protection cover

External connections by means of wires connected directly to spring-clamp terminals at the back of the equipment, or
by means of connecting cables with special terminations (terminal blocks with isolating blades),
cable length of optional connecting cables: 2500 mm

Wiring type of connecting terminals/sockets spring cage / RJ45 / Sub-D


2
directly to the modules G3LA, G3LC, G3LR 0.2 - 2.5 mm for solid and stranded wire
(AWG 24 - 12)
2
directly to the module G1LB 0.14 - 1.5 mm for solid and stranded wire
(AWG 28 - 16)

directly to module G3LD via RJ45/Sub-D refer to paragraph 7

to the power supply units via Faston connector 6.3 x 0.8 mm (DIN 4624)
2
to optional cables with isolating terminals 0.2 - 2.5 mm for stranded wire (AWG 24 - 12)
2
0.2 - 4.0 mm for solid wire (AWG 24 - 11)

to optional cables with Sub-D sockets refer to paragraph 7

to optional cables with RJ45 press-fit terminals 0.5 - 0.65 mm diameter (AWG 24 - 22) solid wire

shield earthing at the rear cable tray below the equipment

ESD earthing (for service & maintenance) snap fastener 4.5 mm at the rear cable tray,
(EBP - Earth Bonding Point) for connecting an ESD wrist bracelet

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 23 / 24


Technical Data NSD570 ABB Switzerland Ltd

21. AMBIENT CONDITIONS

21.1. Operation
Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K5

Within specification Temperature range -5 to + 45 C

Relative humidity (non condensing) 95%, < 28 g/m3

Operational - 20 to + 55 C

Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3M1

Vibration sinusoidal Complies with IEC 60068-2-6

Shock Complies with IEC 60068-2-27

21.2. Transport

Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-2 Class 2K4

Temperature range - 40 to +70 C

Relative humidity (non condensing) 95%, < 28 g/m3

Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-2 Class 2M1

Vibration sinusoidal Complies with IEC 60068-2-6

Shock Complies with IEC 60068-2-27

Free fall (0.25 m/equipment packed) Complies with IEC 60068-2-32

21.3. Storage
Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-1 Class 1K5

Temperature range - 40 to + 70 C

Relative humidity (non condensing) 95%, < 28 g/m3

Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-1, Class 1M1

All technical data are subject to change without notice.

ABB Switzerland Ltd


Utility Communications
CH-5400 Baden/Switzerland

Call Center: +41 844 845 845


E-mail: utility.communications@ch.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com/utilitycommunications

1KHW000892-EN Edition 2004-08-02 24 / 24


ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000894
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Software Installation Description: < HMI570 > - A 03-09-01
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
PTUKT2 02-10-01 sig. Schnyder 02-12-20 sig. Strittmatter - EN 1/4
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Teleprotection Equipment: NSD570

Software Installation Description: < HMI570 >

Contents:

1 Purpose of document 1
2 HMI570 Installation on Microsoft Windows 1
2.1 System requirements 1
2.2 Technical data 2
2.3 Installation of the HMI570 2
2.4 Deinstallation 4
2.5 Updates 4

List of equipment:
PC with Windows NT / 2000 / XP
HMI570 (Version 1.04 or higher)

) Note: Please refer 1KHW000902 for compatibility between software HMI570,


firmware and hardware of NSD570.

1 Purpose of document
This document describes the software installation process for the HMI570.

2 HMI570 Installation on Microsoft Windows

2.1 System requirements

The minimum requirements for installing and running the HMI570 are as follows:

1. x86 compatible Processor (AMD Athlon / Duron or Intel Pentium), 400 MHz
2. 128 MB of RAM
3. SVGA Controller with min. 1024 x 768 resolution and 256 colors
4. 50 MB of free disk space
5. CD ROM drive
6. Microsoft Windows NT4, 2000 or XP
7. Web-browser supporting HTTP/1.1 and HTML 4 (Internet Explorer 5 and higher, Netscape 6
and higher, Mozilla 1.x)
8. 1 free serial port (RS-232)

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Automation Systems
Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 2/4 1KHW000894

2.2 Technical data


Java Virtual Machine (JVM) Version 1.3.1

2.3 Installation of the HMI570


An Installation Package is provided for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, 2000 and XP.

1. Insert the HMI570 CD into the CD-ROM drive.


2. Double-click on the HMI570-install.exe to start the installation.
3. A welcome window will appear. If you are running other programs at the moment, choose
Cancel and close all other programs first, before starting the installation again. If no other
applications are running, choose Next to continue the installation.

4. Choose the folder where the HMI570 should be installed in. To install to a different folder,
either type in a new path or click on Change to browse for existing folder. Click on Next to
continue.
Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 3/4 1KHW000894

5. Choose the shortcut folder. To install to a different folder, type in the path or select an
existing folder from the list. The shortcut will be used to start the HMI570. Continue with
Next.

6. The installation program will now search for a Java Virtual Machine (JVM) on your system.
This could take a few moments. The JVM has to be version 1.3.1_09. If one or several
suitable JVMs were found, a list will be shown, where you can choose the JVM for the
HMI570. Go on with Next.
If no JVM Version 1.3.1_09 could be found, the installer can install it automatically. Click on
Next to install it. Already installed JVM of other versions - even newer ones - will not be
affected.
Important: If you decide to install the JVM 1.3.1_9 of the installation package, do not
change the installation path of the JVM. After the successful installation of JVM do not
reboot the system, if a prompt window appears. Click on No and then the installation of the
HMI570 will continue.

7. The current window shows a summary, which installation and shortcut folder you have
chosen and where the JVM is or will be installed, depending on if a JVM was found or not.
Click on Next to continue. The files will now be copied into the folders.
8. Click on Finish to complete the installation.
Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 4/4 1KHW000894

2.4 Deinstallation

Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Software


Choose HMI570 and click on Add/Remove

All the files and folders, that were installed, are being removed from your system. Only the files
installed to the JVM folder and the JVM remain on the system.

2.5 Updates

1. Uninstall the old version of the HMI570


Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Software
Choose HMI570 and click on Add/Remove

2. Install the new version of the HMI570

It is possible to install different version of the HMI570 on the same PC / notebook. Every version
must be installed in a separate directory and must be given a different shortcut name.
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHW000896
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Firmware Download Description: < NSD570 > - B 04-04-16
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
PTUKT2 02-10-02 sig. Schnyder 02-12-20 sig. Strittmatter - EN 1/3
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Teleprotection Equipment: NSD570

Firmware Download Description: < NSD570 >

Contents:

1 Purpose of document 2
2 General 2
2.1 Necessity for a firmware download 2
2.2 Risks of a firmware download